JP2002234272A - Packaging material for lithographic plate and packaging structure of lithographic plate - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To obtain a packaging material for a lithographic plate and a packaging structure of the lithographic plate which can surely keep the quality of the lithographic plate. SOLUTION: Interleaving paper 14, a cardboard 22 for protection, interior paper 16, an exterior material, etc., which can prevent deformation and impairment of the lithographic plate 10 and also have physical properties capable of preventing deterioration of a coating film are selected as the material for packaging the lithographic plate 10, and the packaging structure of the lithographic plate is constituted thereof.

Description

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0001]

The present invention relates to a lithographic printing plate packaging material and a lithographic printing plate packaging structure.

[0002]

2. Description of the Related Art Recent plate making methods (including electrophotographic plate making methods)
In order to facilitate the automation of the plate making process, lithographic printing plates such as photosensitive printing plates and heat-sensitive printing plates are widely used.
A lithographic printing plate is generally formed on a support such as a sheet-like or coil-like aluminum plate by, for example, graining, anodic oxidation,
A surface treatment such as a silicate treatment or other chemical conversion treatment is performed alone or in an appropriate combination, and then a photosensitive layer or a heat-sensitive layer (collectively referred to as a “coating film”) is applied (and, if necessary, a water-soluble barrier layer or the like). Various types of wax layers may be applied), dried, and then cut to a desired size. This lithographic printing plate is subjected to plate making processes such as exposure, development, and gumming,
The printer is set on a printing press and ink is applied to print characters, images, and the like on the paper. Also, among the lithographic printing plates, there is a so-called “discarded plate” or “blank plate” which is used by being set at a position where ink is not applied (that is, an area where printing is not performed) due to space limitations depending on the printing press used. Some are done. Such a discarded or blank plate often has the same configuration as the planographic printing plate to which ink is applied, and is included in the planographic printing plate.

[0003] Incidentally, the coating film of a lithographic printing plate may be damaged by a slight external force or the like or may be peeled off from a support. May be brought into contact and handled (transportation, storage, etc.). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2-25845 describes an interleaf paper made of synthetic pulp mixed paper subjected to a heat compression treatment. By configuring the slip sheet in this way, peeling of the coating film due to friction with the lithographic printing plate (so-called “film peeling”) does not occur.

However, depending on the relationship between the type of the lithographic printing plate and the slip sheet, the situation of handling of the lithographic printing plate, and the like, there is a possibility that the coating film cannot be reliably protected.

Further, the photosensitive printing plate has high photosensitivity, and even if exposed to light in a slight visible light wavelength band, a change occurs in the photosensitive layer. Since the heat-sensitive printing plate may also change the quality of the heat-sensitive layer due to the heat energy of the applied light or change the sensitivity due to the progress of the reaction, it is preferable to perform appropriate light shielding. further,
If any of the printing plates is subjected to a rapid change in humidity or temperature, there is an inconvenience such as dew formation on the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer due to dew formation, and thus it is necessary to prevent moisture.

[0006] For this reason, the lithographic printing plate is sometimes wrapped with light-shielding and moisture-proof interior paper from the time the lithographic printing plate is manufactured until it is loaded into an automatic plate making machine or the like. As the interior paper, for example, an aluminum kraft paper in which low-density polyethylene of about 13 μm is melt-coated on kraft paper and an aluminum foil of about 6 μm is adhered, and a bundle of products (lithographic printing plate) After wrapping the bundle, a part of the aluminum kraft paper (so-called ear part or upper surface part) is adhered with kraft adhesive tape, hot melt or the like. Further, as interior paper, a low-density polyethylene of about 10 μm to 70 μm is laminated on the aluminum foil of the aluminum kraft paper, or a black polyethylene film of about 70 μm is laminated on the low-density polyethylene, thereby shielding light. Some with improved moisture resistance are also used. Further, as another example of the interior paper, a structure in which an aluminum vapor-deposited film is attached (laminated) to kraft paper as a light-shielding / moisture-proof layer, for example, a thickness of 4.00 × 1
P of about 12 μm thickness with aluminum vapor deposition of about 0 ^-8 m
In some cases, an ET (polyethylene terephthalate) film or a NY (nylon) film having a thickness of about 15 μm and subjected to the same aluminum deposition is used.

However, this aluminum kraft paper cannot be recovered at the time of disposal, and must be disposed of as industrial waste, and must be disposed of by incineration or the like.

On the other hand, there has been proposed a light-shielding moisture-proof paper satisfying the required light-shielding property and moisture-proofing property without sticking an aluminum foil (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 9-1111697). In addition, since a light-shielding layer and a moisture-proof layer must be provided on the paper surface, the cost increases.

Furthermore, since both the photosensitive printing plate and the heat-sensitive printing plate are formed in a single thin plate shape, if there are scratches or deformations on the corners, sides, inside, etc., it is difficult to develop the photosensitive and heat-sensitive plates. However, problems such as blurring of the image and unevenness of the ink when printed are likely to occur.

Therefore, in order to prevent such scratches and deformation, various cardboard boxes for protecting the lithographic printing plate from external force and packaging it have been proposed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-16946).

In addition, in many cases, in combination with (or instead of) the cardboard box, a protective cardboard (sometimes referred to as a “cardboard”) is arranged in parallel with the lithographic printing plate. Is being done. In particular, when stacking a plurality of lithographic printing plates to form a stacked bundle in order to increase the efficiency of handling the cargo, place protective cardboard every predetermined number of lithographic printing plates to ensure that the lithographic printing plates are secure. Often protected.

However, depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate, even if such a cardboard box or protective cardboard is used, there is a possibility that deformation of the lithographic printing plate cannot be reliably prevented due to the handling condition of the lithographic printing plate and the like. There is.

[0013]

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of the above facts, the present invention provides a lithographic printing plate packaging material and a lithographic printing plate packaging that can package the lithographic printing plate while reliably maintaining the quality of the lithographic printing plate. The task is to obtain a structure.

[0014]

According to the first aspect of the present invention, the lithographic printing plate has predetermined physical properties that can be protected so as to maintain desired printing characteristics. And

That is, by packaging the lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate packaging material according to claim 1, the lithographic printing plate can maintain desired printing characteristics. For example, damage and deformation of the lithographic printing plate are prevented. Further, deterioration of the coating film (photosensitive layer or heat-sensitive layer) of the lithographic printing plate is prevented. As a result, the planographic printing plate maintains the desired printing characteristics, so that no inconvenience occurs during use (at the time of printing).

The lithographic printing plate packaging material widely includes, for example, slip paper, protective cardboard, interior materials, exterior materials (exterior boxes), pallets, skids, and the like. These need not necessarily be capable of protecting the lithographic printing plate alone, and those capable of protecting the lithographic printing plate by a combination of a plurality of types are also included in the lithographic printing plate packaging material of the present invention. .

According to the second aspect of the present invention, the planographic printing plate and the planographic printing plate having the predetermined physical properties capable of protecting the planographic printing plate while maintaining the desired printing characteristics while packaging the planographic printing plate. And a plate packaging material.

That is, in the lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to the second aspect, a lithographic printing plate packaging material having predetermined physical properties that can be protected so that the lithographic printing plate maintains desired printing characteristics is used. Since the lithographic printing plate is packaged, the lithographic printing plate can maintain desired printing characteristics. For example, damage and deformation of the lithographic printing plate are prevented. Further, deterioration of the coating film (photosensitive layer or heat-sensitive layer) of the lithographic printing plate is prevented. As a result, the planographic printing plate maintains the desired printing characteristics, so that no inconvenience occurs during use (at the time of printing).

The lithographic printing plate packaging material according to the present invention widely includes, for example, interleaf paper, protective cardboard, interior materials, exterior materials (exterior boxes), pallets, skids, and the like. These need not necessarily be capable of protecting the lithographic printing plate alone, and those capable of protecting the lithographic printing plate by a combination of a plurality of types are also included in the lithographic printing plate packaging material of the present invention. .

[0020]

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS (Basic Structure of Lithographic Printing Plate Packaging Structure) FIGS. 1 to 4 show a lithographic printing plate lithographic printing plate using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to a first embodiment of the present invention. The process of packaging 10 is shown.

The lithographic printing plate 10 is coated with a coating film (a photosensitive layer in the case of a photosensitive printing plate, or a heat-sensitive layer in the case of a heat-sensitive printing plate) on a thin aluminum support formed in a rectangular plate shape. ) Is applied. Exposure,
A plate making process such as a developing process and a gumming process is performed, the plate is set in a printing machine, and ink is applied, so that characters, images, and the like are printed on paper. The planographic printing plate 10 according to the present invention
Is a stage before a process required for printing (exposure, development, etc.) is performed, and in some cases, is referred to as a lithographic printing plate precursor or a lithographic printing plate material. The surface on which the coating film is formed is referred to as an image forming surface 10P, and the surface on which the coating film is not formed is referred to as a non-image forming surface 10Q. Depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate 10, there is a so-called double-sided product in which both sides are the image forming surface 10P, but FIG. 1 shows a so-called single-sided product in which only one side is the image forming surface 10P.

The specific configuration of the lithographic printing plate 10 is not particularly limited as long as the lithographic printing plate has such a configuration. For example, a lithographic printing plate for a heat mode type and a photon type laser printing plate may be used. A lithographic printing plate can be made directly from digital data.

The lithographic printing plate 10 can be made a lithographic printing plate corresponding to various plate making methods by selecting various components in the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer. Examples of specific embodiments of the lithographic printing plate of the present invention include the following (1) to
(11) is mentioned. (1) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer contains an infrared absorber, a compound that generates an acid by heat, and a compound that crosslinks with the acid. (2) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer contains an infrared absorbing agent and a compound which becomes alkali-soluble by heat. (3) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer includes two layers: a layer containing a compound that generates radicals by laser beam irradiation, a binder soluble in alkali, and a polyfunctional monomer or prepolymer, and an oxygen barrier layer. (4) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer comprises two layers: a physical development nucleus layer and a silver halide emulsion layer. (5) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer includes three layers: a polymerized layer containing a polyfunctional monomer and a polyfunctional binder, a layer containing silver halide and a reducing agent, and an oxygen barrier layer. (6) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer includes two layers: a layer containing a novolak resin and naphthoquinonediazide; and a layer containing silver halide. (7) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer contains an organic photoconductor. (8) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer includes two or three layers composed of a laser light absorbing layer removed by laser light irradiation, and a lipophilic layer and / or a hydrophilic layer. (9) a compound in which a photosensitive layer absorbs energy to generate an acid, a polymer compound having a functional group capable of generating a sulfonic acid or a carboxylic acid in a side chain by an acid, and an acid generator by absorbing visible light The embodiment which contains the compound which gives energy to. (10) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer contains a quinonediazide compound and a novolak resin. (11) An embodiment in which the photosensitive layer contains a compound which is decomposed by light or ultraviolet light to form a crosslinked structure with itself or another molecule in the layer, and a binder which is soluble in alkali.

Particularly, in recent years, a lithographic printing plate coated with a high-sensitivity photosensitive type coating film exposed by a laser or a heat-sensitive type lithographic printing plate may be used (for example, the above-mentioned (1) to ()). In the case of such a lithographic printing plate of the high sensitivity type, the use of the lithographic printing plate packaging material of the present invention can surely prevent the quality deterioration of the image forming surface.

Further, the lithographic printing plate 10 of the present embodiment (the lithographic printing plate of all aspects of (1) to (11) described above)
A planographic printing plate which is set in an automatic plate making machine having an automatic plate feeding function or a so-called plate setter in a state where the laminated bundle 12 is formed, and may be supplied to the plate making process (plate feeding).

As can be seen from FIG. 1, the interleaf paper 14 for protecting the coating film and the planographic printing plate 10 are alternately overlapped in the thickness direction, and the protective cardboard 22 is disposed on the upper and lower surfaces. Thus, a stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is configured. The number of the lithographic printing plates 10 constituting one stacked bundle 12 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 10 to 100 from the viewpoint of efficient transportation and storage. Also, as described above, 10 to 100 lithographic printing plates 1 are used.
In the case where the stacked bundle 12 is constituted by 0, it is preferable that the planographic printing plate 10 and the protective cardboard 22 are fixed by a fixing means such as an adhesive tape so as not to be displaced. Further, it is also possible to configure the stacked bundle 12 with more lithographic printing plates 10 so that transport and storage can be performed more efficiently (with a smaller number of times of handling the load). For example, the number of the lithographic printing plates 10 may be about 6500 at the maximum, and the protective cardboard 22 may be inserted for every 20 to 100 lithographic printing plates 10. Further, the number of the lithographic printing plates 10 may be about 6500 at the maximum, and the protective cardboard 22 may be arranged only above and below the lithographic printing plates 10. In addition, depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate 10, the protective cardboard 22 may be omitted.

[0027] The laminated bundle 12 thus constructed is
As shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. The interior paper 16 is made of, for example, one rectangular unbleached kraft paper having a predetermined size.

As shown in FIG. 2, the length of the long side 16L of the interior paper 16 is substantially the center of the interior paper 16 so that the long side 12L of the laminated bundle 12 and the short side 16S of the interior paper 16 are parallel. And the interior paper 16 is placed on the long side 12L of the laminated bundle 12.
The length is set to a predetermined value such that the vicinity of the short side 16 </ b> S of the interior paper 16 partially overlaps (see FIG. 3) in a state where the interior paper 16 is bent from both sides.

The length of the short side 16S of the interior paper 16 is
When the long side 16L side of the interior paper 16 is further folded from the state where the vicinity of the short side 16S partially overlaps, the upper side partially overlaps with the upper surface of the stacked bundle 12 in plan view (see FIG. 3). ), And have a predetermined length. By thus embedding the laminated bundle 12 with the interior paper 16,
As shown in FIG. 4, the laminated bundle 12 is
6 will be covered. Finally, the interior paper 16 is adhered at a predetermined position with an adhesive tape 24, and is fixed so that the interior paper 16 is not inadvertently spread or dropped.

The structure shown in FIG. 4 is an example of a structure in which the laminated bundle 12 is provided by the interior paper 16, and the present invention is not limited to this. In short, it is only necessary that the lithographic printing plate 10 can be reliably shielded from light and protected from moisture by covering the stacked bundle 12 with the interior paper 16 (in some cases, by combining with the exterior material 18 as described later). Also,
In the following, the laminated bundle wrapped by the interior paper 16 may be broadly referred to as a wrapped laminated bundle.

Depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate 10, the laminated bundle 12 is further packaged with a package. FIG. 5 shows a packaging box 110 made of cardboard as an example of such an exterior material.
It is shown.

As can be seen from the development shown in FIG. 6, the packaging box 110 has a short side of the bottom plate 112 and the top plate 11.
4, a bottom laminate 116 and a top laminate 118
Are provided adjacent to each other. A plurality of bending lines 120 are formed on the bottom laminated plate 116 and the top laminated plate 118.
As shown in FIG. 5, spiral stacked portions 122 and 124 are formed. Then, the laminated bundle 12 wrapped in the packaging box 110
The lithographic printing plate 10 is protected so that, for example, even if a large force is applied from the outside, the packaged object is not deformed or damaged.

The stacked bundle 12 may be further loaded on a pallet or a prepared loading member (both of which will be described later) according to the type of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the transport method.

Here, various kinds of interleaf paper 14, protective cardboard 22, interior paper 16, packaging box 110 (further, according to the present invention)
When pallets and other loading members are further used, these pallets and loading members are also included) according to the type, shape, characteristics, etc. of the lithographic printing plate 10.
Predetermined shapes, structures, physical properties, etc. are determined, and these are used alone or in combination with other lithographic printing plate packaging materials to package the lithographic printing plate 10 so that the characteristics of the lithographic printing plate 10 are kept constant. It is maintained within the range, so that the quality can be reliably maintained.

For example, as described above, the lithographic printing plate 10 (all the lithographic printing plates of (1) to (11)) of the present embodiment has an automatic plate feeding function in a state where the stacked bundle 12 is formed. It may be set on an automatic plate making machine or a so-called plate setter, and supplied to the plate making process (plate feeding).
In this case, it is necessary to separate the interleaf 14 and the protective cardboard 22 from the planographic printing plate 10 and supply the plate. Therefore, slip sheet 1
If an automatic plate making machine or a plate setter having an automatic plate feeding function for automatically performing the peeling of the plate 4 and the supply of the lithographic printing plate 10 is used, the plate making operation can be made more efficient.

However, if the interleaf 14 and the protective cardboard 22 are in close contact with the planographic printing plate 10, the interleaf 14 and the protective cardboard 22 are supplied without being separated from the planographic printing plate. There may be inconveniences such as the stop of the automatic plate feeding operation.

For example, the image forming surface 10 of the lithographic printing plate 10
If the interleaf 14 is sucked and lifted with a suction cup or the like in a state where the interleaf 14 is in contact with P, the interleaf 14 and the planographic printing plate 10 may be lifted and supplied while being integrated. Also, when the non-image forming surface 10Q of the lithographic printing plate 10 is sucked and lifted, the interleaving paper 14 is attached to the image forming surface 10P.
The lithographic printing plate 10 may be supplied in a state of being in close contact. Further, the lithographic printing plate 10 is
Image forming surface 10P or non-image forming surface 10Q (interleaf 14
Is lifted by suction, the interleaf paper 14 and the lithographic printing plate 10 may be lifted and supplied in a state in which the slip sheet 14 and the lithographic printing plate 10 are in close contact with each other.

Further, as an essential function of the interleaf paper 14, it is required that the coating film (image forming surface) of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be reliably protected, especially when the interleaf paper 14 rubs against the image forming surface. In addition, it is necessary to reliably prevent so-called film peeling (a phenomenon in which a coating film peels).

In order to satisfy such conditions, the slip sheet 14 of the present embodiment has a Beck smoothness (defined in JIS P8119) of a contact portion that comes into contact with the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10 for 3 seconds or more and 900 or more. Seconds or less.

Table 1 shows the relationship between the Beck smoothness of the contact portion (the portion in contact with the coating film) of the lithographic printing plate packaging material (for example, the slip sheet 14 and the protective cardboard 22) of the present invention and the peeling of the film. It is shown.

[0041]

[Table 1]

In the evaluation of the film peeling property shown in Table 1,
"◎" means that no film peeling occurred, and "○" means
Indicates that film peeling may occur slightly depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate 10, but this is not a degree that poses a problem in practical use. Further, “Examples of uses of packaging materials” in Table 1 are merely examples, and for example, the Beck smoothness of the contact portion is 3
A packaging material having a Beck smoothness of 60 to 900 or less may be used as the protective cardboard 22 as described later.

From Table 1, it can be seen that film peeling does not substantially occur in a packaging material having a Beck smoothness of 3 to 900 seconds at the contact portion. As described above, the interleaf paper 14 of the present embodiment uses a contact part having a Beck smoothness of 3 seconds or more and 900 seconds or less, so that film peeling of the lithographic printing plate 10 does not occur. In particular, the Beck smoothness of the contact portion is 100 for 3 seconds or more.
It is preferable to use a material having a time of not more than 250 seconds or not more than 250 seconds, since film peeling does not occur at all regardless of the type of the lithographic printing plate 10. For example, interleaf paper 1 by transportation
Even if 4 rubs against the coating film, so-called film peeling is reliably prevented.

As described above, the lithographic printing plate 10 of this embodiment is set on an automatic plate making machine having an automatic plate feeding function or a so-called plate setter in a state where the laminated bundle 12 is formed, and the plate making process is started. May be a lithographic printing plate supplied (plate feeding).

Table 1 also shows the relationship between the Beck smoothness of the contact portion of the lithographic printing plate packaging material of the present invention and the releasability from the coating film. "Releasability from coating film" in Table 1
The term “easy” refers to the ease with which the packaging material is peeled off from the coating film when the stacked bundle 12 is set on an automatic plate making machine having an automatic plate feeding function or a so-called plate setter and the plate is fed to the automatic plate making machine. ◎ indicates that the packaging material is peeled off from the coating film without any problem, and “「 ”indicates that the packaging material is not peeled off from the coating film depending on a very small portion of the lithographic printing plate 10. Indicates that the plate may be supplied together with the material.

From Table 1, it can be seen that the Beck smoothness of the contact portion is 8
In the case of a packaging material having a length of not less than 560 seconds and not more than 560 seconds, the type of the lithographic printing plate 10 does not matter when the stacked bundle 12 is set on an automatic plate making machine or a plate setter having an automatic plate feeding function and the plate is fed to the automatic plate making machine. In other words, it can be seen that the packaging material was surely peeled off from the coating film. Even if the Beck smoothness is out of this range, if the condition of 3 seconds or more and 900 seconds or less is satisfied, by appropriately selecting the type of the lithographic printing plate 10, the packaging material can be reliably removed from the coating film. It becomes possible to peel off.
Therefore, the lithographic printing plate 10 and the packaging material are not supplied to an automatic plate making machine or the like while being integrated, and the plate feeding operation does not stop.

As described above, since the interleaf paper 14 of the present embodiment has a Beck smoothness of the contact portion of 3 seconds or more and 900 seconds or less, an appropriate one is selected as the lithographic printing plate 10. If used, the lithographic printing plate 10 and the slip sheet 14 will not be supplied to an automatic plate making machine or the like while being integrated. In particular, the contact part has a Beck smoothness of 8 seconds or more and 56 seconds or more.
If the interleaf paper 14 of 0 seconds or less is used, it is ensured that the lithographic printing plate 10 and the interleaf paper 14 are supplied to an automatic plate making machine or the like irrespective of the type of the lithographic printing plate 10. Can be prevented.

Further, as long as the interleaf paper 14 satisfies the condition of Beck smoothness, the material other than the material and the Beck smoothness are not particularly limited. Therefore, by selecting a material having a low material cost, the interleaf 14 can be manufactured at low cost. For example, as the interleaf paper 14, paper using 100% wood pulp, paper using synthetic pulp without using 100% wood pulp, and paper having a low-density polyethylene layer on the surface of such paper are used. it can. Particularly, in the case of paper that does not use synthetic pulp, the material cost is low, so that the interleaf paper 14 can be manufactured at low cost. More specifically, a basis weight of 30 made from bleached kraft pulp
To 60 g / m ² , a density of 0.7 to 0.85 g / cm ³ , a water content of 4.0 to 8.0%, and a pH of 4 to 6, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

Depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate 10 or the like, the stacked bundle 12 may be formed without using the slip sheet 14. That is, as shown in FIG.
There is a case where only the lithographic printing plate 10 is laminated so that the coating film faces in the same direction (upward in FIG. 7) without using the lithographic printing plate. Here, the protective cardboard 22 is arranged so as to contact the coating film of the planographic printing plate 10 located at the uppermost position. The stacked lithographic printing plate 10 and the protective cardboard 22 constitute a stacked bundle 12. Also in this configuration, the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 34 is configured by arranging the stacked bundle 12 with the interior paper 16 (and, in some cases, by wrapping the packaging bundle 110).

In this configuration, since the protective cardboard 22 comes into contact with the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10, the protective cardboard 22 has a Beck smoothness of a contact portion with the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10. If a material that satisfies the above conditions is used, film peeling in the case where the protective cardboard 22 rubs against the coating film during transportation or the like is prevented. In particular,
Beck smoothness of the contact part is 3 seconds or more and 100 seconds or less, or 2
When the protective cardboard 22 for 50 seconds or more and 900 seconds or less is used, regardless of the type of the lithographic printing plate 10, the lithographic printing plate 1 is used.
0 is prevented from peeling off. Further, in the plate feeding operation, it is possible to reliably prevent the planographic printing plate 10 and the protective cardboard 22 from being supplied to an automatic plate making machine or the like while being integrated.

Furthermore, as long as the protective cardboard 22 satisfies the Beck smoothness condition as described above, the physical properties other than the material and the Beck smoothness are not particularly limited as in the case of the slip sheet 14. For example, as the material of the protective cardboard 22, natural fibers such as wood pulp and hemp, synthetic pulp obtained from a linear polymer such as polyolefin, and regenerated cellulose can be used alone or in combination. In particular, by selecting a low-cost material such as wood pulp or natural fiber, the protective cardboard 22 can be manufactured at low cost. More specifically, for example, raw material waste paper is beaten, and a sizing agent is added to a stock material diluted to a concentration of 4% so that the sizing agent becomes 0.1% of the cardboard weight and the paper strength agent becomes 0.2% of the cardboard weight. In addition, a density of 0.72 g / cm ³ and a basis weight of 64 were obtained by making paper using a stock to which aluminum sulfate was further added until the pH became 5.0.
0 g / m ² of protective cardboard 22 can be mentioned,
Of course, it is not limited to this.

Further, depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate 10 or the like, without using the interleaf 14 and the protective cardboard 22,
The laminated bundle 12 may be constituted. That is, as shown in FIG. 8, the lithographic printing plate 10 alone forms the stacked bundle 12, and the stacked bundle 12 is wrapped with the interior paper 16 to form the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 38 of the present embodiment. . Therefore, a part of the interior paper 16 is a contact portion that comes into contact with the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10.

In such a configuration, if at least a portion of the interior paper 16 that contacts the image forming surface of the lithographic printing plate 10, that is, the contact portion has a Beck smoothness that satisfies the above-described conditions, it can be transported. This prevents film peeling when the interior paper 16 rubs against the coating film. In particular, when the interior paper 16 having a Beck smoothness of the contact portion of 3 seconds or more and 100 seconds or less or 250 seconds or more and 900 seconds or less is used, regardless of the type of the lithographic printing plate 10, the film of the lithographic printing plate 10 may be used. Peeling is prevented.

Moreover, as long as the interior paper 16 satisfies the Beck smoothness condition as described above, its material and physical properties other than Beck smoothness are not particularly limited.
By selecting a material with low material cost, the interior paper 36 can be manufactured at low cost.

As described above, by using the lithographic printing plate packaging material having a Beck smoothness of 8 to 560 seconds at the contact portion, the lithographic printing plate 10 and the lithographic printing plate packaging material are integrated. In the configuration for preventing the lithographic printing plate from being conveyed to an automatic plate making machine or the like, the user of the lithographic printing plate supplies the lithographic printing plate 10 with an automatic plate feeding mechanism or manually supplies the plate in an actual use situation. By using the lithographic printing plate packaging material of the present invention, the quality of the image-formed surface can be reliably prevented without being influenced by the use of the lithographic printing plate (in other words, as a problem before the plate feeding method). Of course, the above (1)
Even a lithographic printing plate having an aspect other than (11) may be set in an automatic plate making machine having an automatic plate feeding function or a so-called plate setter and supplied to the plate making process (plate feeding). The lithographic printing plates are all lithographic printing plates 1 of the present embodiment.
It is included in 0.

In such a laminated bundle 12, if the static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P of the planographic printing plate 10 and the interleaf 14 or the static friction coefficient between the interleaf 14 and the protective cardboard 22 is small, The paper 14 collapses due to vibrations or the like when transporting the lithographic printing plate 14, or the slip sheet 14 or the protective cardboard 22 is shifted laterally with respect to the lithographic printing plate 10 (in the direction along the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10). ) And the image forming surface 10P
May be damaged.

Further, recently, a photosensitive or heat-sensitive type which draws with a laser (hereinafter, referred to as a “laser exposure type”)
There is a lithographic printing plate 10. In such a laser exposure type planographic printing plate 10, when the laminated bundle 14 is formed using the above-described protective cardboard 22, the moisture contained in the protective cardboard 22 may be reduced depending on the characteristics of the coating film. May be altered. For this reason, the protective cardboard 22 provided with a moisture-proof layer as needed may be used. As the moisture-proof layer, a layer having a structure in which a low-density polyethylene (LDPE) layer is adhered to generally used protective cardboard is often used.

However, when handling the stacked bundle 14 constituted by using such a protective cardboard 22 to which the LDPE layer is adhered, the static friction coefficient between the LDPE layer and the interleaf 14 becomes larger than that of the interleaf 14 and the lithographic printing. Since the coefficient of static friction with the image forming surface 10P of the plate 10 is relatively large, the slip sheet 14 and the protective cardboard 22 are laterally displaced integrally with the planographic printing plate 10 due to vibration or the like during handling. This lateral displacement may damage the image forming surface 10P.

From the viewpoint of preventing such inconvenience, as the protective cardboard 22 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
A cardboard main body 26 having sufficient strength to protect the lithographic printing plate 10, a moisture-proof layer 28 laminated on both sides of the cardboard main body 26, and a sticking paper on one side or both sides (one side in FIG. 9) What was constituted by sticking 30 can be used.

In the protective cardboard 22 having such a constitution, as the material of the cardboard main body 26, natural fibers such as wood pulp and hemp, synthetic pulp obtained from a linear polymer such as polyolefin, and regenerated cellulose are used alone or in combination. It can be mixed and used. In particular, wood pulp, natural fiber, etc.
By selecting a low-cost material, the cardboard main body 26 can be manufactured at low cost. More specifically, for example, raw material waste paper is beaten, and a sizing agent is added to a stock material diluted to a concentration of 4% with 0.1% of the weight of cardboard, and a paper strength agent with 0.1% of the weight of cardboard.
2% and further add aluminum sulfate to PH
Of the cardboard body 26 having a density of 0.72 g / cm ³ and a basis weight of 640 g / m ² obtained by making a paper using the stock added until the pH of the material becomes 5.0, of course, but not limited thereto. .

As the moisture-proof layer 28, for example, the above-described LDP
By using a material having low moisture permeability such as E (low density polyethylene), it is possible to prevent the moisture of the cardboard main body 26 itself from affecting the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10. In particular, in the case of a lithographic printing plate of a laser exposure type used in recent years, the protective cardboard 22 having such a moisture-proof layer 28 is used in order to prevent the coating film from being deteriorated by moisture of the cardboard body 26. Is preferred. Conversely, depending on the type of the coating film, there is also a case where the moisture is not affected (or extremely small) by the moisture of the cardboard main body 26. In such a case, the moisture-proof layer 28 is omitted, and the cost is reduced. The cardboard 22 may be manufactured.

The sticking paper 30 is, for example, paper having the same configuration as the slip sheet 14, and is integrally attached to the cardboard main body 26 when the moisture-proof layer 28 is laminated. In the state where the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 18 is configured, the sticking paper 30 is
The protective cardboard 22 is arranged so as to contact with. Therefore, the surface of the sticking paper 30 becomes the slip sheet contact surface 22A of the protective cardboard 22. When the adhesive sheet 30 comes into contact with the slip sheet 14 in this manner, the static friction coefficient Y between the protective cardboard 22 and the slip sheet 14 is reduced, and the slip sheet 14 and the lithographic printing plate 1
0 or smaller than the static friction coefficient X with the image forming surface (that is, Y ≦
X).

Table 2 shows the properties of each surface of the protective cardboard 22 and the interleaf 14, the space between the protective cardboard 22 and the interleaf 14, and the interleaf 1
4 shows the relationship between the deviation of the lithographic printing plate 4 from the lithographic printing plate and the damage of the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10.

[0064]

[Table 2]

The “glossy surface” in Table 2 means the slip sheet 1
4 is a surface having a relatively large Beck smoothness, and the “rough surface” is a surface having a relatively small Beck smoothness.

In the case 1 and case 2 shown in Table 2, LDPE having a thickness of 60 μm as a moisture-proof layer 28 is laminated on a cardboard body of a commonly used protective cardboard. Sticking paper 30 of the same configuration is stuck. In this case, in the case 1, the glossy surface of the adhesive sheet 30 is positioned as the slip sheet contact surface 22A, and in the case 2, the rough surface of the adhesive sheet 30 is positioned. In the case of the case 3, the sticking paper 3
No. 0 is used, and the moisture-proof layer 28 is used.
Is placed so as to contact the slip sheet 14 as the slip sheet contact surface 22A.

According to Table 2, the case where the protective cardboard 22 to which the sticking paper 30 is stuck is used (Case 1 and Case 2)
Then, a gap occurs between the protective cardboard 22 and the interleaf 14,
Since there is no gap between the slip sheet 14 and the planographic printing plate 10,
It can be seen that the image forming surface 10P (coating film) of the lithographic printing plate 10 is not damaged.

On the other hand, when the moisture-proof layer 28 (LDPE) is in contact with the slip sheet 14 (case 3),
Of the lithographic printing plate 10
It can be seen that the image forming surface 10P is damaged.

The slip sheet contact surface 22A of the protective cardboard 22
The case where the glossy surface of the sticking paper 30 is adopted (case 1) and the case where the rough surface is adopted (case 2) can prevent the image forming surface 10P from being damaged. Since the coefficient of static friction between the protective cardboard 22 and the interleaf 14 is relatively large as compared with the case 2, for example, even when transported under severe conditions, the load is relatively unlikely to shift. Become.

As described above, the protective thick paper 22 to which the sticking paper 30 is stuck is used, and the static friction coefficient Y between the protective thick paper 22 and the slip sheet 14 is determined by the static friction coefficient Y between the slip sheet 14 and the planographic printing plate 10. By making it smaller than X, the lithographic printing plate 10
Deviation can be reliably prevented. Therefore, the planographic printing plate packaging structure 18 shown in FIG. 4 or the packaging box 1 shown in FIG.
When the lithographic printing plate 10 is transported by the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 111 using the
Even when a surface force acts on the lithographic printing plate 10, the image forming surface 10 </ b> P of the lithographic printing plate 10 is securely protected without being damaged by the rubbing of the interleaving paper 14 even when a force in the surface direction is applied to the Is done.

In order to make the static friction coefficient Y between the protective cardboard 22 and the interleaf 14 smaller than the static friction coefficient X between the interleaf 14 and the planographic printing plate 10, the protective cardboard 22 has The present invention is not limited to the one on which the sticking paper 30 is stuck. For example, the sticking paper 30 may not be paper having the same configuration as the interleaf paper 14, or may be processed to reduce the Beck smoothness on the interleaf paper contact surface of the protective cardboard 22 so that The adhesiveness is reduced, and the coefficient of static friction Y
May be smaller than the coefficient of static friction X between the lithographic printing plate 10 and the lithographic printing plate 10. As shown in FIG. 9, when the paper having the same configuration as the slip sheet 14 is used as the sticking paper 30, the slip sheet 14 can be used also as the sticking paper 30 without separately manufacturing the sticking paper 30.
It becomes possible to obtain the protective cardboard 22 of the present invention at low cost. In this case, of the glossy surface and the rough surface of the sticking paper 30, the protective thick paper contact surface 14 </ b> B of the interleaf 14 (generally a rough surface, but may be a shiny surface in some cases). It is preferable that the surface having the lower coefficient of static friction is attached to the cardboard main body 26 with the surface having the lower coefficient of static friction facing outward (that is, as the interleaf paper contact surface 22A) because the coefficient of static friction Y can be reduced.

Also, instead of the protective cardboard 22,
By appropriately setting the surface properties of the lithographic printing plate 1, the static friction coefficient Y between the protective cardboard 22 and the interleaf 14 is adjusted.
It may be made smaller than the static friction coefficient X with zero. In short, in general, the coefficient of static friction is a unique value depending on the contacting member. Therefore, even if the surface property of the protective cardboard 22 is appropriately set, or the surface property of the interleaf paper 14 is set appropriately, As a result, the protective cardboard 22 and the insert 14
Is smaller than the static friction coefficient X between the slip sheet 14 and the planographic printing plate 10.

The specific value of the static friction coefficient Y between the protective cardboard 22 and the interleaf 14 is not limited as long as it is smaller than the static friction coefficient X between the interleaf 14 and the planographic printing plate 10, but as described below. By setting it to a certain value or more, the protective cardboard 2
It is also possible to prevent the slippage of the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 18 at the time of transportation or the like, thereby preventing the slippage between the sheet 2 and the slip sheet 14.

Table 3 shows the static friction coefficient Y between the protective cardboard 22 and the interleaf 14, the static friction coefficient X between the interleaf 14 and the lithographic printing plate 10, the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 18 or the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 111. Of the image forming surface 10P and the damage of the image forming surface 10P.

[0075]

[Table 3]

As can be seen from Table 3, the static friction coefficients Y and X
When both are 0.37 or more (case 4 and case 5), the collapse of the load is prevented and the image forming surface 10
P damage is also prevented.

On the other hand, when the static friction coefficient Y is smaller than 0.37 (case 6), damage to the image forming surface 10P is prevented, but load collapse occurs. In addition, even when the static friction coefficient X is smaller than 0.37 (case 7), load collapse has occurred. Further, in this case, since the static friction coefficient Y is larger than the static friction coefficient X, the image forming surface 10P is damaged.

Therefore, in order to prevent the collapse of the load and the damage of the image forming surface 10P, the static friction coefficients X, Y
May be 0.37 or more.

By the way, among the lithographic printing plates 10, photosensitive printing plates have high photosensitivity, and the photosensitive layer needs to be shielded from light because the photosensitive layer changes even when exposed to light in a slight visible light wavelength band. Also, the heat-sensitive printing plate is preferably subjected to appropriate light shielding because the heat-sensitive layer may be degraded by the heat energy of the applied light or the sensitivity may change due to the progress of the reaction. Further, if a sudden change in humidity or temperature is applied, any of the printing plates is disadvantageous in that the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer is deteriorated due to dew condensation, so that it is necessary to prevent moisture.

For this reason, the interior paper 16 is made of a single rectangular unbleached kraft paper having a predetermined size and a light transmittance of 57% or less for light having a wavelength of 910 nm or less. It is preferred to use. That is, from the time when the lithographic printing plate 10 is manufactured to the time when the lithographic printing plate 10 is loaded into an automatic plate making machine or the like, the lithographic printing plate 1 is
0 is packed. For this reason, the interior paper 16 and the exterior material 18
In combination with (corrugated cardboard box), the planographic printing plate can be shielded from light and moisture-proof.

Table 4 shows the relationship between the light transmittance for each light wavelength and the light coverage of the lithographic printing plate for paper that may be used as interior paper. In addition, the “light covering” shown in this table indicates that the laminated bundle 12 having already been covered is further added to the exterior material 1.
8 (cardboard box), each was left in a distribution warehouse for 4 months, and then developed to evaluate the presence or absence of so-called "light cover".

[0082]

[Table 4]

FIG. 10 is a graph showing the relationship between the wavelength and the light transmittance for these papers.

As can be seen from Table 4 and FIG. 10, in case 8, the light transmittance is 57% at a wavelength of 910 nm, and the light transmittance is 57% at a shorter wavelength.
Is smaller than. In case 9, the wavelength 910n
At m, the light transmittance is 35%, and at shorter wavelengths, the light transmittance is smaller than 35%. Also,
In case 10, the light transmittance is greater than 57% in the entire wavelength range of approximately 500 to 910 nm.

As can be seen from Table 4, the wavelength 91
When using the interior paper 16 (cases 8 and 9) having a light transmittance of 57% or less for light of 0 nm or less, no fogging occurs. On the other hand, a wavelength of 910 nm
When unbleached kraft paper having a light transmittance of more than 57% with respect to the light is used as the interior paper (case 10),
Light covering has occurred. Therefore, as the interior paper 16, it is preferable to use one having a light transmittance of 57% or less for light having a wavelength of 910 nm or less.

In particular, photosensitive printing plates generally have a thickness of 550 nm.
It has sensitivity to light in the following wavelength ranges. Taking this into consideration, as can be seen from the graph of FIG.
0% or less, whereas in Case 10, 30%
It is a larger value. That is, it can be seen that the interior paper 16 of the case 8 and the case 9 of the present invention can surely prevent the photosensitive printing plate from being covered with light.

The heat-sensitive printing plate is generally 700 to 9
It has sensitivity to light in the wavelength range of about 00 nm. In view of this, as can be seen from the graph of FIG. 10, the light transmittance in both cases 8 and 9 is 57% or less in this wavelength range, whereas in case 10, the light transmittance is less than 80%. Is also a large value. That is, in the interior paper 16 of the case 8 and the case 9 of the present invention,
It can be seen that light fogging of the heat-sensitive printing plate can be reliably prevented.

The interior paper is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the above-mentioned light transmittance conditions and does not adversely affect the quality of the lithographic printing plate 10. An aluminum kraft paper on which an aluminum foil of about 6 μm is adhered by melting and coating a high density polyethylene, or a low density polyethylene of about 10 μm to 70 μm laminated on an aluminum foil of this aluminum kraft paper. 70μ in polyethylene
It is possible to use a material with improved light-shielding properties and moisture-proof properties by laminating a black polyethylene film of about m, but these aluminum kraft papers cannot be recovered when discarded.
Since disposal such as landfill and incineration is required as industrial waste, high costs may be required for disposal.

On the other hand, if the interior paper 16 made of unbleached kraft paper is used, it can be recovered as waste paper. That is, it is preferable because disposal such as landfill or incineration is not required and can be easily disposed of.

The above numerical values (57% or less for light having a wavelength of 910 nm or less) cited as the light transmittance of the interior paper 16 are also:
This is merely an example, and depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate 10, even if the light transmittance is higher than this,
In some cases, light can be prevented.

The condition of the light transmittance is as follows.
Does not need to be satisfied in one state. That is, even if the light transmittance is equal to or more than this value, if the interior paper 16 is superimposed on a plurality of pieces and enclosed so as to surround the lithographic printing plate 10, the light transmission is substantially the total of the interior paper 16. Since the rate is equal to or less than a certain value, it is possible to prevent light transmission and prevent deterioration of the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer. When the interior papers 16 are superposed in this manner, the number of the interior papers 16 to be superimposed is not particularly limited, but it is possible to perform the interior with a small number of the interior papers 216 and to facilitate the interior work and unpacking work. From the viewpoint of the above, it is preferable to overlap about 2 to 4 layers.

Further, with the lithographic printing plate 10 packaged,
It is only necessary to be able to finally shield light, and from such a viewpoint, a necessary light shielding property may be obtained by devising the structure of the exterior material. FIG. 11 shows an example in which the lithographic printing plate 10 can be surely shielded from light by an exterior material (packing box 62) having a structure different from that of the exterior material 18 described above.

The basic structure of the packaging box 62 is substantially the same as the packaging box 110 shown in FIGS. That is, as can be seen from the developed view shown in FIG. 12, the bottom laminate plate 76 and the top laminate plate 78 are provided adjacent to the short side of the bottom plate 72 and the short side of the top plate 74. Bottom laminate 7
A plurality of bending lines 80 are formed on the upper surface laminated plate 6 and the upper surface laminated plate 78.
As shown in FIG. 11, in the assembled state, the spiral laminated portion 8 is formed.
2, 84 are constituted. Even if a large force acts on the packaging box 70 from the outside, the planographic printing plate 10 constituting the stacked bundle 12 can be reliably protected to such an extent that at least scratches or deformations that cause quality problems do not occur. Have been.

Further, the packaging box 110 shown in FIGS.
Unlike the first embodiment, each of the upper plates 74 has an extended portion 86 extending in the width direction in FIG. As can be seen from FIG. 11, in a state where the packaging box 62 is assembled, the extension portion 86 becomes the overlap portion 88 that overlaps on the top surface 12 </ b> U of the stacked bundle 12. In addition, the stacking portions 82 and 84 also serve as a stacking portion 90 that overlaps on the outside of the side surface 12S of the stacking bundle 12.

Therefore, as can be seen from FIG. 11, in the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 60 constituted by the packaging box 62, the wrapping material (packaging) is wrapped around the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10 (or the laminated stack with the interior). The cardboard constituting the box 62 is arranged. Then, since all of the overlapping sections 88 and 90 are sealed over the entire outside of the stacked bundle 12 (lithographic printing plate 10), the stacked bundle 12 is completely isolated from the outside. For this reason, external light does not reach the stacked bundle 12 of the packaged lithographic printing plates 10, and the lithographic printing plates 10 are reliably shielded from light, so that so-called light covering does not occur. Note that an adhesive means such as an adhesive or an adhesive tape can be used for sealing the overlapping portions 88 and 90.

FIG. 11 shows an arrangement in which the entire thickness of the overlapping portion 88 is made equal to the thickness of the cardboard constituting the packaging box 62 so that the overlapping portion 88 does not protrude outward. . Accordingly, when the lithographic printing plate packaging structures 60 are stacked in the thickness direction, the contact area between the lithographic printing plate packaging structures 60 is increased, and the lithographic printing plate packaging structures 60 can be stably handled. In order to prevent the overlapping portion 88 from protruding outward, a corrugated cardboard in which the thickness of the extension portion 86 is made smaller (preferably about half) than the thickness of the other portions is used. can do. Alternatively, a corrugated cardboard having a uniform thickness is used.
May be reduced in thickness.

Also, the configuration of the overlapping sections 88 and 90 is not limited to those shown in FIGS. For example, in the packaging box 92 shown in FIG. 13 and FIG.
4 only, an extension 86 is formed. That is,
Even in such a configuration, as can be seen from FIG. 13, the overlapping portion 88 is configured by a part of the upper surface plate 74 and the extension portion 86.
In order to prevent the overlapping portion 88 from protruding outside, a cardboard in which the thickness of a part of the upper surface plate 74 (the portion to be the overlapping portion 88) and the extension portion 86 is reduced in advance may be used. After forming the overlapping portion 88, it may be compressed in the thickness direction.

In the packaging box 102 shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the extension 104 is formed not only from the upper surface plate 74 but also from the upper surface laminated plate 78. Therefore, as can be seen from FIG. 16, the upper laminated portion 84 is further formed in a spiral shape in a state where two cardboards are overlapped. In this configuration, the height of the central portion (the portion corresponding to the extended portion 104) of the laminated portion 84 is increased, and there is a possibility that the laminated portion 84 protrudes above the upper surface plate 74. Therefore, it is particularly preferable that the thickness of the extension portion 104 is reduced in advance, or the height is reduced by compressing the laminated portion 82 after forming the laminated portion 82 so as not to protrude upward.

Further, in the packaging box 102, after the extension portions 86 are overlapped to form the overlapping portion 88 as described above, the overlapping portion 88 may be formed into a spiral shape. The portions 86 may be spirally formed and then superposed to form the overlapping portion 88 (and may be compressed vertically if necessary).

Of course, not only the packaging box 102 shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 but also the packaging box 62 shown in FIGS.
Alternatively, also in the packaging box 92 shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the overlapping portion 90 (that is, the stacked portions 82 and 84 may be compressed in the vertical direction.

In place of (or in combination with) the outer packaging materials (packaging boxes 110, 62) described above, FIG.
It may be packed (exterior) in the packing structure 130 shown in FIGS.

The packing structure 130 includes a stacking member 132 on which the stacked bundles 12 are stacked, and the stacked bundles 12 (or the internal stacked bundles 15 described later) stacked on the stacking members 132.
8) Square contact plate 134 and surface contact plate 13 applied to
6, and a fixing belt 138 (not shown in FIG. 18; see FIGS. 17 and 19) for fixing the square abutment plate 134 and the surface abutment plate 136 to the loading member 132 from outside. .

The loading member 132 is a substantially rectangular upper plate 14.
The base plate 146 is formed by connecting the lower plate 142 and the lower plate 142 with a plurality of block-shaped legs 144. Leg 1
44, an insertion portion 148 is formed.
The loading member 132 can be lifted by inserting a fork of a forklift or a handlift into 8. 17 and 18, the leg 144 is formed in a long shape along the depth direction (the direction of arrow D) of the base 146, and the insertion portion 148 is also configured along the depth direction of the base 146. However, as shown in FIG. 20, for example, each leg 144 has a shape divided in the depth direction, and the insertion portion 148 is configured not only in the depth direction but also in the width direction (the direction of the arrow W). The fork may be inserted from any direction.

On the upper surface of the upper plate 140 of the base 146, a loading base 150 having a substantially wedge-like end surface is fixed. As can be seen from FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper surface of the loading table 150 is inclined with respect to the upper plate 140, and serves as a loading surface 152 on which the stacked bundle 12 is loaded.

A flat support plate 154 is provided upright from the lower end of the loading surface 152. The surface of the support plate 154 on the loading surface 152 side is perpendicular to the loading surface 152, and when the stacked bundle 12 is loaded on the loading surface 152, the stacked bundle 1
The supporting surface 156 supports a part of the second load.

A plurality (for example, 3 to 100 bundles) of stacked bundles 12 are integrally mounted on the stacking surface 152 by the interior paper 16 while being stacked.

The interior paper 16 may have substantially the same configuration as that described above, or an appropriate paper may be selected and used according to the type of the lithographic printing plate 10. For example, a metal thin film of a predetermined thickness is stuck to one rectangular kraft paper having a predetermined size, and in some cases, a resin layer of a predetermined thickness is further stuck on the metal thin film. The structured one can be mentioned. When such a material is employed as the interior paper 16, the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer of the planographic printing plate 10 is prevented from being deteriorated because it has a certain light-shielding property and moisture-proof property, and the planographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a certain quality. You.
In the packing structure 130 shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, as an example of the interior paper 16, the plurality of stacked bundles 12
Used is kraft paper having a size sufficient to integrally package kraft paper and 6-7 μm aluminum foil adhered thereto. In addition, this aluminum foil is 10-7
A low-density polyethylene layer having a thickness of 0 μm may be attached thereto, or a black polyethylene film having a thickness of about 70 μm may be attached to the low-density polyethylene layer to improve light-shielding properties and moisture-proof properties. Further, if the interior paper 16 can exhibit a certain light-shielding property and moisture-proof property, it is not always necessary to adhere the low-density polyethylene layer and the black polyethylene film.

A plurality of stacked bundles 12 are integrally provided by the interior paper 16, and the end of the interior paper 16 is fixed to the loading table 150 by a fixing means such as an adhesive tape 160.
And a laminated bundle 158 that is fixed to the support plate 154 and is
Is configured.

The square backing plate 134 has a substantially L-shaped end face having a wide portion 162 and a narrow portion 164, and is formed to be long as a whole. Then, the wide portion 16 is provided on the front surface 158F of the laminated stack 158 loaded on the loading surface 152.
2 are in surface contact, and the narrow portion 164 is in surface contact with the side surface 158S. In addition, the length of the square backing plate 134 is approximately equal to or longer than the height of the laminated stack 158 having been provided. In the present embodiment, as an example of the square backing plate 134,
Thickness 15mm, length 1100mm, width 1 of wide part 162
A wooden board having a width of 00 mm and a width of the narrow portion 164 of 50 mm is used.

The surface contact plate 136 is formed to be approximately the same as or wider than the wide portion 162 of the square contact plate 134, and to be longer than the wide portion 162.
It is applied to the approximate center in the width direction of 8F. In the present embodiment, as an example of the surface contact plate 136, a thickness of 15 mm and a width of 100 m
m, a 1100 mm long wooden board is used.

[0111] The fixing belt 138 is the
In a state in which the corner applying plate 134 and the surface applying plate 136 are applied to 58, the length is sufficient to be wound around the laminated stack 158, the square applying plate 134, the surface applying plate 136, and the support plate 154. . When the buckle 166 is operated while the fixing belt 138 is wound, the fixing belt 138 is gradually tightened, and
8. Square plate 134, surface plate 136 and support plate 154
Is applied to the inside, so that the installed laminated bundle 158, the square contact plate 134, and the surface contact plate 136 can be easily fixed to the support plate 154. FIG.
In the example shown in FIG. 1, a lashing belt having a predetermined strength is used as an example of the fixing belt 138.

In the packing structure 130 having such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 17, the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is such that the lithographic printing plate 10 is vertically (with a component in the vertical direction)
And the loading surface 15 so as to be parallel to the support surface 156.
2, the height of the packing structure 130 in the loaded state is substantially constant regardless of the number of the lithographic printing plates 10. For this reason, for example, when the packing structure 130 is stored in a storage place such as a warehouse, by appropriately determining the height of the storage place, it is possible to prevent a useless space from being generated above the stacked bundles 12 and to improve the efficiency. Can be stored.

The lithographic printing plate 10 is stacked with its lower side aligned along the stacking surface 152 by its own weight. For this reason, for example, when loading the plate making machine using an automatic feeder or the like, the plate can be loaded at an accurate loading position. In addition, since the lithographic printing plate 10 is easy to hold when it is lifted, the work of transportation and movement is facilitated.

Further, the stacking surface 152 is inclined with respect to the upper plate 140, and the stacked bundle 12 is also stacked with a fixed inclination angle. A part of the load of the stacked bundle 12 is supported by the support surface 156. Since the load of the stacked bundle 12 is dispersed and supported on two surfaces (two directions) in this manner,
As described later, the laminated bundle 12 and the planographic printing plate 10 do not fall down or slip down carelessly in a state where the package is unpacked.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the packaged state, a square contact plate 134 is applied to the side between the front face 158F and the side face 158S of the built-in laminated bundle 158, and these two faces are in surface contact. . For this reason, even if an object hits from outside during transportation or storage, the corners of the lithographic printing plate 10 constituting the stacked bundle 12 are protected, and no damage or deformation occurs. Further, even if the fastening force from the fixing belt 138 is applied, the fastening force is dispersed in the height direction by the squaring plate 134, and the corners of the lithographic printing plate 10 (particularly, when the fixing belt 138 is positioned. (In the vicinity of the portion where the lithographic printing plate 10 is located), the corners of the lithographic printing plate 10 are not deformed. Generally lithographic printing plate 10
Is a thin plate, and if there are scratches or deformations at the corners and sides, there is a risk of problems such as blurred images when developed, and uneven ink when printed. However, when the lithographic printing plate 10 packed by the packing structure 130 of the present embodiment is used after being transported or stored, an image is not generated at the time of development because the corners are not scratched or deformed as described above. There is no problem such as blurring or non-uniformity of ink at the time of printing, and a clear image can always be obtained.

When the fastening force from the fixing belt 138 is large, a part of the fastening force is directed inward along the surface of the lithographic printing plate 10 (toward the center in the width direction, as indicated by an arrow F in FIG. 19). ), The lithographic printing plate 10 tends to curve convexly outwardly of the interior stack 158 as shown by the two-dot chain line. However, in the present embodiment, the surface contact plate 36 is located substantially at the center of the front face 158F of the laminated stack 158.
Is arranged, and a part of the fastening force from the fixing belt 138 acts as a pressing force for pressing the substantially center of the lithographic printing plate 10 toward the inside of the laminated stack 158 (in the direction toward the support plate 154). I do. For this reason, the lithographic printing plate 10 is not curved but is maintained in a planar shape.

The wide portion 162 of the square contact plate 134 is in surface contact with the front surface 158F of the laminated bundle 158, and a part of the fastening force of the fixing belt 138 is reduced by the wide portion 162 of the square contact plate 134. Laminated bundle 158 through
Act on the front surface 158F. Because of this, more effectively
The curvature of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be prevented. In particular,
In the present embodiment, the wide portion 162 having a relatively larger contact area than the narrow portion 164 is brought into contact with the front surface of the stacked bundle 158, so that, for example, the narrow portion 164 has a front surface 158F of the stacked bundle 158. The lithographic printing plate 10 is more effectively compared with the case where the lithographic printing plate 10
Can be prevented.

In this packing structure 130, the square contact plate 134 and the surface contact plate 136 for preventing the lithographic printing plate 10 from being scratched or deformed (including a curve) are provided in the laminated bundle 1 having the interior.
58, it contacts only a part of the front surface 158F. As compared with a configuration using an end plate that is in contact with the entire front surface of the stacked bundle, unnecessary portions of the end plate are substantially removed and the size is reduced.
Since each of the 36 is lightweight, the packing operation is facilitated. Further, even when unpacking, after opening the fixing belt 138, it is only necessary to remove the square abutment plate 134 and the surface abutment plate 136, so that the unpacking operation becomes easy. further,
The collection operation is also facilitated when the square abutment plate 134 and the surface abutment plate 136 are collected after use.

Further, a large amount of the lithographic printing plate 10
Are integrated, so that the number of times of handling the cargo is reduced and the handling is excellent.

FIG. 20 shows a packaging structure 1 in which the loading direction of the lithographic printing plate 10 is different from that described above.
70 is shown. In this example, FIGS.
The same components and members as those shown in FIG. 9 are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

In this packing structure 170, the loading member 1 in which the upper plate 140 and the lower plate 142 are connected by the legs 144
72, the upper plate 140 of the loading member 172.
Meanwhile, a member corresponding to the loading table 150 in FIG. 17 is not fixed. Then, the stacked bundles 12 are arranged such that the lithographic printing plate 10 is parallel to the upper plate 140 (that is, substantially horizontally).
(See FIG. 17) are directly loaded on the upper plate 140.

In this example, the corner applying plate 134 is applied to the corner between the upper surface 158U (substantially the same as the front surface 158F shown in FIG. 17) and the side surface 158S of the laminated stack 158. Therefore, these two surfaces are in surface contact. The surface contact plate 136 is disposed substantially at the center of the upper surface 158U so as to be parallel to the square contact plate 134, and is in surface contact with the upper surface 158U. Then, with the fixing belt 138, the laminated stack 158, the square plate 134, and the surface plate 13
6 is fixed to the upper plate 140.

In the packing structure 170 having such a structure, similarly to the packing structure 130 shown in FIG. 17, the corner plate 134 prevents the corners of the planographic printing plate 10 from being scratched or deformed, The plate 136 and the wide portion 162 of the square plate 134 prevent the planographic printing plate 10 from being curved. In addition, the wide portion 162 of the squaring plate 134 prevents the lithographic printing plate 10 from being bent more effectively.

Then, the square contact plate 134 and the surface contact plate 13
6 is in surface contact with only a part of the upper surface 158U of the built-in laminated bundle 158, and is smaller and lighter than the conventionally used end plate, so that packing, unpacking and collection operations are easy. Become.

The overall structure of the packing structures 130 and 170 described above and the specific structures of the square contact plate 134, the surface contact plate 136, and the fixing belt 138 are merely examples.
In addition to these, for example, various configurations shown in FIGS.

For example, as shown in FIG.
A reinforcing member 182 having a predetermined rigidity may be provided outside the surface 34 and the surface contact plate 136. Since the reinforcement plate 182 reinforces the square contact plate 134 or the surface contact plate 136, deformation (local constriction or overall deformation) generated in the square contact plate 134 or the surface contact plate 136 by the fastening force from the fixing belt 138. Curving, etc.) can be prevented. For this reason, when the square abutment plate 134 and the surface abutment plate 136 are collected and reused, they can be reused without any trouble.

The size of the reinforcing member 182 is
It is not particularly limited as long as it can reinforce the surface 4 and the surface contact plate 136. However, if the required strength can be secured, it is preferable to reduce the size from the viewpoint of weight reduction. For example, when the size of the lithographic printing plate 10, the square plate 134, and the surface plate 136 shown in FIG.
In order to prevent local constriction of the angle plate 134 and the surface contact plate 136, a thickness of 2.3 mm, a surface width of 15 mm, and a length of 1
An L-shaped iron plate having an end surface of about 00 mm is preferable, and in order to prevent the entire curve, the thickness is 2.3 mm and the surface width is 5 m.
m, an iron plate having an L-shaped end face having a length of about 1000 mm is preferable. In addition, a reinforcing member for preventing constriction and a reinforcing member for preventing bending may be used in combination, or one reinforcing member may be used in common to reduce the number of components constituting the packing structures 130 and 170.

Further, as shown in FIG.
4 and between the surface applying plate 136 and the laminated stack 158
A cushioning member 184 made of a deformable member may be provided. The cushioning material 184 can reduce the load concentration of the tightening force of the fixing belt 138 acting via the square contact plate 134 and the surface contact plate 136, and can prevent the lithographic printing plate 10 from being deformed. As a specific example of the cushioning material 184,
A rubber plate, foam material, corrugated cardboard, cardboard, paper with a honeycomb structure, etc. can be used. In particular, the thickness is about 1 mm to 5 m, and the hardness in a spring hardness test specified in JIS K6301 is 10 degrees. A rubber plate of about 98 degrees is preferable. In addition, the cushioning material 184 is used for the square contact plate 134 and the surface contact plate 1.
Although it may be configured as a separate pair from the
4 and the surface contact plate 136 to be integrated.

The size of the square backing plate 134 is not limited to the above, and at least
May be applied as long as it does not shift or fall off this side due to the fastening force from the fixing belt 138. From the viewpoint of preventing such displacement and dropping, it is preferable that the size of the square contact plate 134 is large, and conversely, from the viewpoint of reducing the weight, the size is preferably small. In order to make these both compatible, for example, the width of a portion that contacts the side surface 158S of the already-integrated laminated bundle 158 is 10 mm.
20 mm to 100 m
m, more preferably 40 mm to 60 mm. Further, the width of the portion that comes into contact with the front surface 158F of the laminated bundle 158 having an interior is, for example, 10 mm to 40 mm.
The distance may be about 0 mm, preferably 20 mm to 200 mm, more preferably 50 mm to 150 mm. The thickness of the square plate 134 is not particularly limited, but if it is thin, it tends to be deformed (especially curved), and if it is thick, it becomes bulky at the time of collection and the like, and increases its weight. In addition, the degree of bending differs depending on the type and presence or absence of the reinforcing member 182. In consideration of these, the thickness of the square backing plate 134 may be, for example, about 1 mm to 50 mm in the case of wooden, but is preferably 20 mm to 200 mm,
More preferably, it is set to 50 mm to 150 mm.

Similarly, the size of the surface-applying plate 136 is not limited to the above-mentioned size, and the center of the front surface 158F of the laminated stack 158 is pressed by receiving the fastening force of the fixing belt 138, and the planographic printing is performed. What is necessary is just to be able to prevent the plate 10 from bending. As the width of the surface applying plate 136 increases, the lithographic printing plate 10 becomes wider.
Can be more effectively prevented, but the larger size increases the weight and makes it difficult to handle. Further, when the width is reduced, the handling is excellent, but the surface-applying plate 136 itself is easily deformed, so that the lithographic printing plate 10 may be deformed. In consideration of these, the width of the surface contact plate 136 can be set to 10 mm to 400 mm, and 20 m
m to 200 mm, preferably 50 mm to 15 mm.
More preferably, it is 0 mm. In addition, surface contact plate 13
The thickness of the lithographic printing plate 10 may be the same as the thickness of the square contact plate 134 (particularly, the thickness of the portion in contact with the front surface 158F of the laminated stack 158). While it can be more effectively prevented, the weight increases. Therefore, from the viewpoint of achieving both of them, it is preferable that the thickness is about 10 mm thicker than the thickness of the square backing plate 134.

Further, depending on the relationship with the size of the lithographic printing plate 10, etc., it is also possible to prevent the lithographic printing plate 10 from being curved by the wide portion 162 of the squaring plate 134. In such a case, The surface contact plate 136 may be omitted.

The length of the square contact plate 134 and the surface contact plate 136 may be at least a length that can be arranged at the portion where the fixing belt 138 is applied. For example, it is sufficient that the length is longer than the height of the built-in stacked bundle 158. There is a packing structure 13
From the viewpoint of reducing the overall height of 0, it is preferable that the height is substantially equal to the height of the laminated stack 158.

In addition, the square contact plate 134 and the surface contact plate 136
Need not necessarily be continuous in the height direction as long as the fixing belt 138 is arranged at least in such a portion. That is, as shown in FIG. 23, as long as an area capable of dispersing the tightening force of the fixing belt 138 to such an extent that the lithographic printing plate 10 is not deformed is secured as the contact area with the built-in laminated bundle 158. , Fixing belt 1
Other than the vicinity of the portion indicated by 38 (in the example shown in FIG. 23, substantially the center portion in the height direction), the weight may be further reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG.
It is also possible to use an integrated patch plate 186 that is configured to divide the plate 34 and the surface patch plate 136 in the height direction and to be integrally continuous in the width direction. As shown in FIG. 17, in the case where the square contact plate 134 and the surface contact plate 136 are formed in a shape divided in the width direction of the laminated stack 158, even if the size of the planographic printing plate 10 is different, Correspondingly, it is possible to apply the laminated bundle 158 to the interior, so that the versatility is improved and this is preferable.

A packing structure 1110 shown in FIG. 25 may be used. In this packing structure 1110, a required number of lithographic printing plates 10 with a built-in stacked bundle 158 are placed on an end plate 1113 that is erected with respect to the bottom plate 1112, and then another end plate 1115 is mounted. Then, the end plate 1113 and the end plate 1115 are put on the bolt 11
17 so as to fix the laminated bundle 158 that has been installed. As can be seen from FIG.
Reference numeral 15 is larger in size than the lithographic printing plate 10 and protects the lithographic printing plate 10 so that no corners or sides of the lithographic printing plate 10 are damaged or deformed.

The material of the square contact plate 134, the surface contact plate 136, the reinforcing member 182, and the end plate 1115 is not particularly limited as long as it has the strength required for these members.
It may be wood, metal, resin, corrugated cardboard, cardboard, honeycomb material or the like. Further, the shapes of these members are not limited to those described above. For example, members having an L-shaped cross section, H-shaped members, and solid or hollow rods (even if they have a columnar shape, have a prismatic shape). May be present) and the square backing plate 1
34, surface contact plate 136, reinforcing member 182, and end plate 111
5 may be configured. When a plurality of members are combined as described above, each member may be fixed or not fixed.

The material and the number of the fixing belt 138 are not particularly limited as long as the laminated stack 158, the square contact plate 134, and the surface contact plate 136 can be securely fixed to the loading member 132 from the surroundings. For example, one may be arranged at an arbitrary position. Fixing belt 13
Specific examples of No. 8 include a lashing belt and a band (resin band). In the packing structure 1110 shown in FIG. 25, a fixing belt 138 (for example, a lashing belt or a resin band) may be used instead of the bolt 1117.

As described above, in the planographic printing plate packaging structure of the present embodiment, the planographic printing plate packaging material (interleaf paper, Packaging using protective cardboard, interior materials, exterior materials, pallets, etc.) can maintain desired printability. Depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate 10, the lithographic printing plate 10 can be more effectively protected by using lithographic printing plate packaging materials having various configurations. Hereinafter, such a lithographic printing plate packaging material and a lithographic printing plate packaging structure will be described.

(Various Aspects of Interleaf 14) First, various aspects of the interleaf 14 according to the present invention will be described.

In the above description, the Beck smoothness of the contact surface of the packaging material, that is, the surface (contact surface) that contacts the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10, is defined, so that the lithographic printing plate 10
Although the example in which the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10 is surely protected and the releasability from the lithographic printing plate 10 is enhanced is shown, a surface which does not contact the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 (non-contact surface)
It is also possible to regulate the Bekk smoothness of the lithographic printing plate 10 so as to achieve both protection of the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10 and releasability from the lithographic printing plate 10. That is, for example, if the so-called one-sided lithographic printing plate 10 and the interleaf paper 14 constitute the laminated bundle 12, the non-contact surface comes into contact with the non-image forming surface 10Q of the lithographic printing plate 10, so that the non-image forming surface 10Q By improving the releasability of the interleaf 14, it is possible to prevent poor conveyance and poor interleaf removal.

Table 5 shows the relationship between the Beck smoothness of the non-contact surface of the packaging material and the releasability from the non-image forming surface 10Q of the lithographic printing plate 10. The term “peelability” refers to the non-interleaving of the slip sheet 14 when the lithographic printing plate 10 is supplied to an automatic plate making machine having an automatic plate feeding function or a so-called plate setter and the lithographic printing plate 10 is supplied to the automatic plate making machine. "O" indicates that the interleaf 14 is peeled off from the non-image forming surface without any problem. "X" indicates that the interleaf 14 is peeled off from the non-image forming surface. This indicates that the lithographic printing plate 10 and the interleaf 14 may be fed together as a single plate.

[0142]

[Table 5]

Note that "Examples of use" in Table 5 is merely an example similarly to Table 1. For example, a packaging material having a Beck smoothness of 3 seconds or more and 11 seconds or less may be used as the interleaf paper 14, or a Beck smoothness may be used. May be used as the protective cardboard 32 described later.

From Table 1, it can be seen that, for a packaging material having a Beck smoothness of the non-contact surface of 3 seconds or more and 55 seconds or less, the laminated bundle 12 is set on an automatic plate making machine having an automatic plate feeding function, a plate setter, or the like. When feeding the printing plate 10 to an automatic plate making machine,
It can be seen that the packaging material is reliably peeled from the non-image forming surface. Therefore, for example, if a non-contact surface having a Beck smoothness of 3 seconds or more and 55 seconds or less is used as the interleaf 14 of the present invention, the interleaf 1 is formed on the non-image forming surface of the lithographic printing plate 10.
The lithographic printing plate 10 and the interleaf 14 are not supplied to the automatic plate making machine or the like in a united state, and the plate feeding operation is not stopped.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting the Beck smoothness of the non-contact surface of the slip sheet 14 to 3 seconds or more and 55 seconds or less, the slip sheet 14 can be reliably moved from the non-image forming surface in the automatic plate feeding mechanism. In addition to being able to be peeled, it is possible to prevent the quality of the image forming surface from deteriorating.

Of course, as shown in FIG.
Is used, and only the lithographic printing plate 10 is laminated so that the coating film faces in the same direction (downward in FIG. 3).
Also, in the automatic plate feeding mechanism, the non-contact surface (the surface in contact with the non-image forming surface, the lower surface in FIG. 3) of the protective cardboard 32 has a Beck smoothness of 3 seconds or more and 55 seconds or less. The slip sheet 14 is surely peeled off from the non-image forming surface.

In addition, as long as the packaging material satisfies the conditions for the Beck smoothness of the non-contact surface, physical properties other than the material and the Beck smoothness are not particularly limited. Therefore, by selecting a material having a low material cost, the packaging material can be manufactured at low cost. For example, as the interleaf paper 14, paper using 100% of wood pulp, paper using synthetic pulp without using 100% of wood pulp, paper having a low-density polyethylene layer on the surface of such paper, or the like is used. Can be used. Particularly, in the case of paper that does not use synthetic pulp, the material cost is low, so that the interleaf paper 14 can be manufactured at low cost. More specifically, basis weight 30-60 g / m ² , density 0.7-
0.85 g / cm ³ , moisture 4.0 to 8.0%, PH 4 to
6, but of course is not limited to this. Further, as the material of the protective cardboard 32, natural fibers such as wood pulp and hemp, synthetic pulp obtained from a linear polymer such as polyolefin, and regenerated cellulose can be used alone or in combination. In particular, by selecting low-cost materials such as wood pulp and natural fiber, the protective cardboard 32 can be manufactured at low cost. More specifically, for example, raw material waste paper is beaten, and a sizing agent is added to a stock material diluted to a concentration of 4% so that the sizing agent becomes 0.1% of the cardboard weight and the paper strength agent becomes 0.2% of the cardboard weight. In addition, the density was 0.72 g / cm ³ , and the basis weight was 640 g / g, obtained by making paper using a stock to which aluminum sulfate was further added until the pH became 5.0.
The protective cardboard 32 of m ² can be cited, but is not limited to this.

In the lithographic printing plate 10, as a high-sensitivity light-sensitive photosensitive printing plate, a compound containing an addition-polymerizable ethylenic double bond and a photopolymerizable compound are coated on a support made of aluminum, an aluminum alloy, or the like. A photopolymerizable composition comprising an initiator, an organic polymer compound, and a thermal polymerization inhibitor is formed as a photosensitive layer, and a water-soluble polymer layer is laminated on the photosensitive layer as a water-soluble oxygen blocking layer. For such a lithographic printing plate 10, various kinds of sizing agents used for sizing (preventing bleeding) of the paper may be added as an interleaf 14, or the sizing agent may be applied to a contact portion with the lithographic printing plate. Paper 14 whose peelability is adjusted from the lithographic printing plate 10
It is preferred to use

That is, even in such a lithographic printing plate 10, as described above, the stacked bundle 12 is set on an automatic plate making machine having an automatic plate feeding function or a so-called plate setter, and the plate making process is started. May be supplied (plate feeding). In this case, it is necessary to peel the interleaf 14 and the protective cardboard 22 from the lithographic printing plate 10 and supply the plate. However, the releasability of the lithographic printing plate 10 from the water-soluble oxygen barrier layer is affected by various factors. In this case, if the releasability of the interleaf 14 from the lithographic printing plate 10 is deteriorated, when the automatic plate feeding mechanism performs automatic plate feeding, for example, the interleaf 14 is attached to the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10. When the interleaf paper 14 is sucked up by a suction cup or the like in a state where it is in contact, the interleaf paper 14 and the lithographic printing plate 1
In some cases, such a problem may occur that the 0 is lifted and supplied while being integrated. In addition, lithographic printing plate 1
Even when the non-image forming surface 10Q of 0 is sucked and lifted, the lithographic printing plate 10 may be supplied while the interleaf 14 is in close contact with the image forming surface 10P. Further, the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10
Or the non-image forming surface 10Q (the slip sheet 14 is not in contact)
When the paper is sucked and lifted, the slip sheet 14 and the lithographic printing plate 10 may be lifted and supplied in a state of being in close contact with the lower side thereof.

On the other hand, if the interleaf paper 14 to which the sizing agent is added or applied is used, the releasability between the interleaf paper 14 and the lithographic printing plate 10 can be easily adjusted, and the releasability can be stabilized. In particular, the interleaf paper 1 in which a sizing agent is added or applied to the lithographic printing plate 10 provided with the water-soluble oxygen barrier layer described above.
By using No. 4, the releasability between the interleaf paper 14 and the water-soluble oxygen blocking layer of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be easily adjusted, and the releasability can be prevented from changing over time.

As a specific configuration of the interleaf paper 14 to which the sizing agent has been added or applied, a paper obtained by adding (internally adding) a sizing agent to a bleached kraft pulp slurry and drying the resulting paper is given. Thereby, the releasability of the interleaf 14 from the water-soluble polymer layer covering the image forming surface of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be easily adjusted, and the releasability can be prevented from changing over time. Of the lithographic printing plate 10 from the water-soluble polymer layer can be easily adjusted so as to be appropriate. For example, the interleaf paper 14 stuck to the lithographic printing plate 10 by electrostatic adhesion in the manufacturing process can be used during storage. And the separation of the lithographic printing plate 10 from the lithographic printing plate 10 without trouble by the automatic plate feeding mechanism at the start of plate making.
4 can be peeled off.

Here, a rosin-based sizing agent and a synthetic sizing agent can be used as the internally added sizing agent.
By internally adding a rosin-based sizing agent such as a solution type (reinforced rosin) or an emulsion type, the lithographic printing plate 1
0 has good releasability from the water-soluble polymer layer.

Even if a surface sizing agent is applied to the surface of kraft paper obtained by papermaking and drying the bleached kraft pulp slurry, the releasability from the image forming surface (water-soluble polymer layer) of the interleaf paper 14 and the lithographic printing plate 10 can be obtained. Can be adjusted, thereby improving the releasability of the interleaving paper 14 from the lithographic printing plate 10. Here, as the surface sizing agent, for example, known surface sizing agents such as acrylic, styrene / acrylic copolymer, styrene / maleic anhydride copolymer, and the like can be used.

Further, the interleaf paper 14 to which the size material has been added or applied can be applied to a lithographic printing plate having no water-soluble oxygen barrier layer. In this case, a lithographic printing plate provided with a water-soluble oxygen-blocking layer is unlikely to cause a phenomenon in which the adhesion to the protective interleaf becomes extremely high in a lithographic printing plate having no water-soluble oxygen-blocking layer. Compared to the case of using No. 10, the effect is small, but the lithographic printing plate and
4 and good releasability.

Wood pulp can be used as a main raw material of the interleaf paper 14. In addition, a mixture of wood pulp and synthetic pulp or a synthetic pulp as a main raw material can be used as a sizing agent for the lithographic printing plate 10 and the interleaf paper. 14 can be adjusted.

Table 6 shows a specific configuration of the interleaf paper 14 to which the sizing agent has been added and the interleaf paper to which no sizing agent has been added or applied. Also, in Table 7, the results of three types of evaluation tests on the releasability performed on these slip sheets are shown as Cases 11 to 13.

[0157]

[Table 6]

[0158]

[Table 7]

[0159] The interleaf paper of each case shown in Table 6 was adhered to the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 provided with the water-soluble polymer layer by electrostatic adhesion, respectively. Each of the stacked bundles 12 was loaded into an automatic plate feeding mechanism, and three types of evaluation tests A to C relating to the releasability of the slip sheet as described below were performed on the cases 11 to 13.

(Evaluation Test A) The lithographic printing plate 10 attracts and lifts the image forming surface 10P or the non-image forming surface 10Q by the suction member of the automatic plate feeding mechanism.
Whether or not the lithographic printing plate 10 is peeled off from the slip sheet that is in close contact with the surface opposite to the suction surface 0.

(Evaluation Test B) The non-image forming surface 10Q of the lithographic printing plate 10 is sucked and lifted by the suction member of the automatic plate feeding mechanism, and the image forming surface is formed by friction contact with a rubber roller for slipping paper separation or air blowing. Whether or not the slip sheet peels from 10P.

(Evaluation Test C) The slip sheet adhered to the image forming surface 10P of the planographic printing plate 10 is sucked and lifted by the suction member of the automatic plate feeding mechanism. In this state, the planographic printing plate 10 is peeled from the slip sheet. Or not.

The meanings of the evaluation symbols shown in the “test results” in Table 7 above will be described. “◎” indicates that the releasability between the slip sheet and the lithographic printing plate 10 has no problem.
“〇” indicates that the release property between the slip sheet and the lithographic printing plate 10 is slightly inferior to that of “◎”, but that there is no problem in practical use.
Indicates the slip sheet and lithographic printing plate 1 during automatic plate feeding by the automatic plate feeding mechanism.
0 indicates that the lithographic printing plate 10 may not be peeled off, and the lithographic printing plate 10 may be integrated with the interleaf paper or another lithographic printing plate 10 to supply the plate in the plate making process.

As is clear from Table 7, the lithographic printing plate 1 of the interleaving paper 14 (case 11) to which the rosin-based sizing agent was internally added.
In addition, the peelability from the lithographic printing plate 10 of the interleaving paper 14 (case 12) in which the synthetic sizing agent is internally added does not practically cause a problem, but the sizing agent is internally added. When the slip sheet is not inserted (case 13), the releasability from the lithographic printing plate 10 becomes unstable, and one lithographic printing plate 10 is separated from the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 by an automatic plate feeding mechanism. In some cases, the slip sheet cannot be removed from the lithographic printing plate.

As described above, by using the interleaf paper 14 to which the sizing agent has been added or applied, the interleaf paper 14 and the lithographic printing plate 10 can be used.
Can easily be adjusted with respect to the water-soluble oxygen-blocking layer, and change in the releasability with time can be suppressed.

It is to be noted that the type of the sizing agent is more appropriately selected, and the amount of the sizing agent added or applied is appropriately adjusted, so that the printing surface of the printed matter using the lithographic printing plate 10 can be further improved. It becomes possible.

That is, in order to use the lithographic printing plate 10, at the time of exposure, the interleaving paper provided on the surface is peeled off and removed.
The original film is developed after being brought into close contact with the photosensitive layer. As a result, an ink-philic image portion and an ink-phobic non-image portion are formed on the surface of the photosensitive layer. Then, the interleaving paper that has been brought into close contact with the photosensitive layer before exposure may be brought into close contact again to protect the printing surface (photosensitive layer) until printing after development. However, by reusing the slip sheet, the ink-phobicity of the non-image part becomes slightly ink-philic, and the ink may adhere to the non-image part and the printed matter may be stained. Has a strong ink affinity, and color unevenness may occur in printed matter.

In order to prevent such stains and color unevenness from occurring in the printed matter, the interleaf paper 14 may be a sheet in which a sizing agent is not added or applied at all or a sizing agent other than a rosin-based sizing agent is added. Should be used. In any case, these interleaf papers 14 have no added or applied fatty acids and fatty acid salts.

Here, the rosin sizing agent includes a solution sizing agent, an emulsion sizing agent and the like, and three types of raw material rosin are gum rosin, tall oil rosin and wood rosin.

Examples of the fatty acid include lauric acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, petenic acid, oleic acid, and the like.
Alkaline earth metal salts and the like.

As a sizing agent (a sizing agent other than a rosin sizing agent) that can be added to or applied to the lithographic printing plate 10, a synthetic sizing agent is preferable. That is, the slip sheet 14 of the present invention
Is characterized by being added or coated with a synthetic sizing agent.

Examples of the synthetic sizing agent include a synthetic sizing agent,
There are petroleum resin sizing agents, neutral sizing agents and the like.

The amount of the synthetic sizing agent added or applied is 0.1%.
It is preferably from 1 to 5% by weight, more preferably from 0.2 to 3% by weight, most preferably from 0.3 to 1% by weight. If the amount added or applied is less than 0.1% by weight, the size effect does not appear,
If the amount added or applied exceeds 5% by weight, the sizing effect is saturated and, on the contrary, components that do not contribute to the sizing effect adhere to the paper machine and cause paper staining.

As a method of adding the synthetic sizing agent, there is a method of mixing with the stock in the chest.

The method of applying the synthetic sizing agent is performed using a gravure roll, a coating bar, a size press, or the like.

The stock used for the slip sheet 14 of the present invention includes
Wood pulp, natural fibers such as hemp, synthetic pulp obtained from a linear polymer such as polyolefin, synthetic fibers, regenerated cellulose, and the like can be used.

Further, conventionally used additives can be used, for example, fillers such as viscosity, talc, titanium white and the like, wet strength improvers such as melamine resin, polyamide and polyamine epichlorohydrin resin, starch, polyacrylamide And a fixing agent such as a water-soluble polyvalent metal salt such as aluminum sulfate, cationic starch and a cationic polymer.

The interleaf paper 14 of the present invention is used for stacking a large number of the lithographic printing plates 10 and one lithographic printing plate 10
May be used only to protect the surface (image forming surface 10P) of the photosensitive printing plate material which is not coated with a photosensitive layer and is used for an unprinted page portion such as newspaper printing. Is also good.

Hereinafter, the presence / absence, type, and amount of the sizing agent of the interleaf paper 14 and stains and color unevenness of the printed matter will be described with reference to specific substance names (material names) and numerical values.

(Case 14) A synthetic sizing agent was added to the stock obtained by beaten bleached kraft pulp and diluted to a concentration of 4% so that the sizing degree was 4 seconds, and aluminum sulfate was added until the pH reached 5.0. added. Paper is made using this stock, and 3
5 g / m ² of interleaf paper 14 was produced.

(Case 15) A slip sheet was prepared in the same manner as in Case 14, except that no sizing agent was added.

(Case 16) A slip sheet was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that a rosin-based sizing agent was used instead of the synthetic sizing agent.

(Case 17) Same as Example 1 except that 75% by weight of bleached kraft pulp and 25% by weight of synthetic pulp were used after mixing and beaten pulp.

(Case 18) Same as Example 2 except that 75% by weight of bleached kraft pulp was mixed with 25% by weight of synthetic pulp and beaten paper was used (no sizing agent added).

(Case 19) Same as Conventional Example 1 except that 75% by weight of bleached kraft pulp and 25% by weight of synthetic pulp were mixed and beaten, and a rosin-based sizing agent was added.

(Printability test) A planographic printing plate 10 of 50
A commercially available planographic printing plate 10 in which a diazo resin was applied to an aluminum plate of 0 mm × 400 mm was used. This planographic printing plate 10
The sheet was cut into a sheet by bringing the sheet into close contact with the sheet, the sheet was peeled off to form an image, and the original film was exposed to light and developed.
To protect the image formed on the surface of the lithographic printing plate 10, the peeled interleaving paper is placed on the lithographic printing plate 10 again before exposure, left for two days, and then the protective interleaving paper is peeled off from the lithographic printing plate 10.
The printed matter was attached to a printing press and stains and color unevenness were observed. Table 1 shows the results.

[0187]

[Table 8]

As can be seen from Table 8, Case 14,
In the case of the case 15, the case 17, and the case 18, neither the stain nor the color unevenness of the printed matter occurs, and there is no practical problem. However, in the case of the case 16 and the case 19, the stain of the printed matter is not. In addition, color unevenness occurs, and there is a problem in practical use.

Next, in relation to the lithographic printing plate 10,
The slip sheet 14 having a defined static friction coefficient will be described.

That is, in the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10, the protection of the lithographic printing plates 10 and the prevention of misalignment between the lithographic printing plates 10 and the interleaf paper 14 can prevent the lithographic printing plates 10 from being damaged. It is preferable from the viewpoint of prevention. For this purpose, the coefficient of static friction between the slip sheet 14 and the planographic printing plate 10 may be specified. In this case, as can be seen from Table 3 described above and Table 9 described below, the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 is used.
The coefficient of static friction between the paper and the slip sheet 14 is preferably 0.37 or more, more preferably 0.40 or more.
Further, the non-image forming surface 10Q of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the
Is preferably 0.37 or more, more preferably 0.64 or more.

Coefficient of static friction between the image forming surface 10P and the contact surface of the slip sheet 14 with the image forming surface 10P and the coefficient of static friction between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the contact surface of the slip sheet 14 with the non-image forming surface 10Q. The adjustment of the coefficient of static friction can be performed, for example, by forming a mat layer, adjusting the surface roughness, selecting an additive to the coating film or adjusting the amount of the additive alone or in an appropriate combination. .

When the static friction coefficient is adjusted by forming the mat layer, the static friction coefficient is largely influenced by the diameter, height and density of the projections formed on the mat layer. In the present invention, the projections of the mat layer formed on the coating film (image forming surface 10P) of the lithographic printing plate 10 preferably have an average diameter of 200 μm or less, more preferably 60 μm or less. The average diameter of the projections is 20
When the thickness exceeds 0 μm, when the lithographic printing plates 10 are stored in an overlapping manner, the contact area between the coating film and the slip sheet 14 increases, the friction coefficient increases, and the slip of the slip sheet 14 on the coating film decreases. When the papers 14 are overlapped, wrinkles are more easily formed on the interleaf paper 14.

The average height of the protrusions of the mat layer is 2 to 2.
It is preferably 10 μm, more preferably 2 to 8 μm. When the average height of the projections is less than 2 μm, the vacuum adhesion is insufficient and burning occurs. In addition, the average height of the projections is 10
If it exceeds μm, fine lines are hardly formed, highlight dots are reduced, and tone reproduction is not preferable.

The density of the projections of the mat layer was 100 / cm.
^The number is preferably ² or more, more preferably 700 / cm ² or more. When the density of the projections is less than 100 / cm ² , the friction is reduced and the slip becomes easy. Further, by forming the projections having an average height of 2 μm or more at 100 protrusions / cm ² or more, the static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P and the interleaf 14 is reduced to 0.3.
Or more.

The average roughness of the non-image forming surface 10Q is preferably set to 0.15 or more, more preferably 0.25 or more. By setting the average roughness of the non-image forming surface 10Q to 0.15 or more, the coefficient of static friction with the slip sheet 14 can be 0.3 or more.

The mat layer also has the effect of shortening the evacuation time during close contact exposure using a vacuum printing frame and preventing burning.

A method for providing a mat layer is disclosed in
No. 0-125805, JP-B-57-6582, JP-B-61-28986, a method of providing a mat layer, and solid powder as described in JP-B-62-62337. And a method of thermally fusing them.

FIG. 26 shows a mat coating apparatus 100 for forming the mat layer. In FIG. 26, 1
01 is a temperature control chamber, 102 is a wetting device, 103 is an electrostatic coating device, 104 is a wetting device, 105 is a drying room, and rollers 107 constituting a traveling path are arranged so that the aluminum web 106 can pass these sequentially. Have been.

As the support that can be used for the lithographic printing plate 10 of the present invention, a support made of a metal (aluminum, steel, galvanized steel, tinplate, stainless steel, etc.), plastic, paper alone or a composite is preferable.

In the lithographic printing plate 10 having the mat layer formed thereon, an aluminum plate serving as a support of the lithographic printing plate 10 is a pure aluminum plate, an alloy plate containing aluminum as a main component and containing a trace amount of a different element, and aluminum. Alternatively, it is selected from a deposited plastic film. The foreign elements contained in this aluminum alloy include silicon, iron, manganese, copper, magnesium, chromium, zinc, bismuth, nickel, titanium and the like. The content of the foreign element in the alloy is 10% by weight or less. The preferred aluminum is pure aluminum, but completely pure aluminum may contain slightly foreign elements because it is difficult to produce due to refining technology. The composition of the aluminum plate used for the lithographic printing plate 10 is not specified, and is conventionally known and used, for example, JIS.
A 1050, JIS A 1100, JIS A 310
3. JIS A 3005 can be used as appropriate. The thickness of the aluminum plate used in the present invention is 0.1 mm.
It is preferably about 1 mm to 0.6 mm.

The aluminum plate is grained to obtain the lithographic printing plate 10. The graining method includes an electrochemical graining method of electrochemically graining in a hydrochloric acid or nitric acid electrolyte, and an aluminum graining method. There are mechanical graining methods such as wire brush graining, which uses a metal wire to scratch the surface, ball graining, which uses an abrasive ball and an abrasive to grain the aluminum surface, and brush graining, which uses a nylon brush and an abrasive to grain the surface. Yes, these can be used alone or in combination.

The grained aluminum plate is chemically etched with an acid or an alkali. When an acid is used as an etching agent, it takes time to destroy a fine structure, which is disadvantageous in industrially applying the present invention. However, it can be improved by using an alkali as an etching agent.

The alkali agent preferably used is caustic soda, sodium carbonate, sodium aluminate, sodium metasilicate, sodium phosphate, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide or the like. The preferred ranges of concentration and temperature are 1 to 50, respectively.
%, 20 to 100 ° C., and the amount of aluminum dissolved is 5%.
It is preferable that the condition be ２０20 g / m ³ .

After the etching, pickling is performed to remove dirt (smut) remaining on the surface. As the acid, nitric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, chromic acid, hydrofluoric acid, borofluoric acid and the like are used. In particular, the smut removal treatment after the electrochemical graining treatment is performed at a temperature of 50 to 90 ° C. as described in JP-A-53-12739.
Contacting with 65% by weight of sulfuric acid, Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-2
It is preferable to use the alkali etching method described in JP-A-8123.

The aluminum plate treated as described above can be used as a support for a lithographic printing plate. If necessary, the aluminum plate may be further subjected to a treatment such as an anodizing treatment or a chemical conversion treatment.

The anodizing treatment can be performed by a method conventionally used in this field. Specifically, when direct current or alternating current is applied to aluminum in an aqueous solution or a non-aqueous solution by using sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, chromic acid, oxalic acid, sulfamic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, or a combination of two or more thereof, the surface of the aluminum support is An anodic oxide film can be formed on the substrate.

The conditions of the anodic oxidation treatment vary depending on the electrolytic solution to be used, and thus cannot be unconditionally determined. In general, the concentration of the electrolytic solution is 1 to 80%, the liquid temperature is 5 to 70 ° C., and the current density is 0.5-60 amps / dm ² , voltage 1-100
V, the electrolysis time is suitably in the range of 10 to 100 seconds.

Among these anodic oxide film treatments, in particular, the method of anodizing at a high current density in sulfuric acid used in the invention described in British Patent No. 1,412,768, US Pat. The method of anodizing phosphoric acid as an electrolytic bath described in Japanese Patent No. 3,511,661 is preferable.

After the anodic oxidation treatment, the surface of the aluminum plate is subjected to a hydrophilic treatment as required. As the hydrophilic treatment, US Pat. Nos. 2,714,066 and 3,18
Nos. 1,461, 3,280,734 and 3,90
There is an alkali metal silicate (for example, sodium silicate aqueous solution) method as disclosed in US Pat. No. 2,734. In this method, the support is immersed or electrolytically treated in an aqueous solution of sodium silicate.

In addition, potassium fluoride zirconate disclosed in JP-B-36-22063 and US Pat. Nos. 3,276,868, 4,153,461 and 4,689,272. For example, a method of treating with polyvinyl phosphonic acid as disclosed in this document is used.

[0211] It is also preferable to perform a sealing treatment after graining treatment and anodic oxidation. Such a sealing treatment is performed by immersion in hot water and a hot aqueous solution containing an inorganic salt or an organic salt, a steam bath, or the like.

[0212] The aluminum plate is provided with an organic undercoat layer if necessary before applying the coating film. Examples of the organic compound used in the organic undercoat layer include carboxymethyl cellulose, dextrin, gum arabic,
Phosphonic acids having an amino group such as aminoethylphosphonic acid, and organic phosphones such as phenylphosphonic acid, naphthylphosphonic acid, alkylphosphonic acid, glycerophosphonic acid, methylenediphosphonic acid and ethylenediphosphonic acid which may have a substituent Acids, organic phosphoric acids such as phenylphosphoric acid, naphthylphosphoric acid, alkylphosphoric acid, and glycerophosphoric acid which may have a substituent, phenylphosphinic acid, naphthylphosphinic acid, alkylphosphinic acid, and glycerophosphoric acid which may have a substituent Organic phosphinic acid such as phosphinic acid, amino acids such as glycine and β-alanine, and selected from hydrochlorides of amines having a hydroxyl group such as triethanolamine hydrochloride,
You may mix and use 2 or more types.

[0213] Such an organic undercoat layer can be provided by the following method. That is, water or methanol,
A method in which a solution obtained by dissolving the above organic compound in an organic solvent such as ethanol or methyl ethyl ketone or a mixed solvent thereof is applied to an aluminum plate, dried, and provided.
Water or an organic solvent such as methanol, ethanol, methyl ethyl ketone or a mixed solvent thereof is immersed in a solution in which the above organic compound is dissolved, and the aluminum plate is immersed in the solution to absorb the organic compound. And an organic undercoat layer. In the former method, 0.000 of the above organic compound is used.
Solutions having a concentration of 5 to 10% by weight can be applied in various ways. For example, as a coating method, Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-4589
JP-A-59-123568, etc., using a coating rod,
For example, a method using an extrusion type coater described in Japanese Patent No. 44265 or the like, a method using a slide bead coater described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 1-57629, Japanese Patent Application No. 8-288656, or the like can be used. it can. Note that a coating method described in a method for applying a photosensitive composition described below can be used.

In the latter method, the concentration of the solution is set to 0.1.
01 to 20% by weight, preferably 0.05 to 5% by weight, and the immersion temperature is 20 to 90 ° C, preferably 25 to 50 ° C.
The immersion time is 0.1 second to 20 minutes, preferably 2 seconds to 1 minute.

The pH of the solution used was adjusted with a basic substance such as ammonia, triethylamine and potassium hydroxide, and an acidic substance such as hydrochloric acid and phosphoric acid.
It can also be used in the range of ~ 12. Further, a yellow dye may be added for improving the tone reproducibility of the lithographic printing plate 10.

The coating amount of the organic undercoat layer after drying is from 2 to 20.
0 mg / m ² is preferable, and more preferably 5 to 100 m
g / m ² . If the coating amount is less than 2 mg / m ² , sufficient printing durability cannot be obtained. The same is true even if it is larger than 200 mg / m ² .

A lithographic printing plate 10 is obtained by providing a coating film of a known photosensitive composition on the thus obtained aluminum plate (support) having a hydrophilic surface.

As the photosensitive composition used for the coating film, a positive composition containing an o-quinonediazide compound as a main component, a diazonium salt, an alkali-soluble diazonium salt, and a monomer containing an unsaturated double bond as a main component are used. Negative type photosensitive materials using a photopolymerizable compound and a photocrosslinkable compound containing a cinnamic acid or a dimethylmaleimide group are used.

Also, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 37-17172 and 38
-6961, JP-A-56-107246, and 6
No. 0-254142, Japanese Patent Publication No. 59-36259,
JP-A-59-25217, JP-A-56-146145.
Nos. 62-194257 and 57-147656
And the electrophotographic coating films described in JP-A-58-100862 and JP-A-57-161863 can also be used.

Examples of the photopolymerizable compound having the unsaturated double bond-containing monomer as a main component in the above photosensitive material include, for example,
U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,760,863 and 3,060,0
A composition comprising an addition-polymerizable unsaturated compound having two or more terminal ethylene groups and a photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A No. 23 and JP-A-59-53836 can be used.

Examples of negative photosensitive materials containing a photocrosslinkable compound containing a dimethylmaleimide group include, for example, JP-A-52-988, EP-A-0410654, and
And the photosensitive materials described in JP-A-2888853 and JP-A-4-25845.

O used as a positive photosensitive composition
-As a naphthoquinonediazide compound, JP-B-43-
An ester of 1,2-diazonaphthoquinonesulfonic acid and a pyrogallol-acetone resin described in Japanese Patent No. 28403 is preferred. Other suitable orthoquinonediazide compounds include, for example, US Pat. No. 3,046,1.
JP-A-2-96163 and JP-A-2-96163 disclose esters of 1,2-diazonaphthoquinone-5-sulfonic acid and phenol-formaldehyde resin described in JP-A Nos. 20 and 3,188,210. 2-9616
No. 5, JP-A-2-96661, and esters of 1,2-diazonaphthoquinone-1-sulfonic acid with a phenol-formaldehyde resin. Other useful o-naphthoquinonediazide compounds include those known in numerous patents and the like. For example, JP-A-47-5303 and JP-A-48-63802.
Nos. 48-63803, 48-96575, 49-38001, 48-13854, JP-B-37-18015, 41-11222, and 45.
Nos. 9610, 49-17481, U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,797,213, 3,453,400, 3,544,323, 3,573,917, and Nos. 3,674,495, 3,785,825, British Patent Nos. 1,227,602, 1,251,345, 1,267,005, and 1,329,888. No. 1,330,932, German Patent No. 854,890, and the like.

The particularly preferred o-naphthoquinonediazide compound is a compound obtained by reacting a polyhydroxy compound having a molecular weight of 1,000 or less with 1,2-diazonaphthoquinonesulfonic acid. Specific examples of such compounds are described in JP-A-51-139402 and JP-A-58-15094.
No. 8, No. 58-203434, No. 59-165053
No., No. 60-112445, No. 60-134235
No., No. 60-163443, No. 61-118744
Nos. 62-10645, 62-10646, 62-153950, 62-178562, and 6
4-76047; U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,102,809; 3,126,281; 3,130,047; 3,148,983; and 3,184,310. And Nos. 3,188,210 and 4,639,406 and the like.

In synthesizing these o-naphthoquinonediazide compounds, it is preferable to react 0.2-1.2 equivalents of 1,2-diazonaphthoquinonesulfonic acid chloride with respect to the hydroxyl group of the polyhydroxy compound.
More preferably, the reaction is performed in an amount of 0.3 to 1.0 equivalent.
As the 1,2-diazonaphthoquinonesulfonic acid chloride, 1,2-diazonaphthoquinone-5-sulfonic acid chloride or 1,2-diazonaphthoquinone-4-sulfonic acid chloride can be used.

The obtained o-naphthoquinonediazide compound is a mixture of various 1,2-diazonaphthoquinonesulfonic acid ester groups having different positions and introduced amounts, and all of the hydroxyl groups are 1,2-diazonaphthoquinonesulphonate compounds. The proportion of the acid esterified compound in the mixture (content of the completely esterified compound) is preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 20 to 99 mol%.

The amount of these positive-acting photosensitive compounds (including the above combinations) in the photosensitive composition is preferably from 10 to 50% by weight, more preferably from 15 to 50% by weight.
４０40% by weight.

Although the o-quinonediazide compound alone can form a coating film, it is preferable to use a resin soluble in alkaline water as a binder. Such resins soluble in alkaline water include novolak resins such as phenol formaldehyde resins, o-, m- and p-cresol formaldehyde resins, m / p-mixed cresol formaldehyde resins, and phenol / cresol. (O-, m-, p-, m
/ P- and o / m-mixtures).

Further, a phenol-modified xylene resin, polyhydroxystyrene, polyhalogenated hydroxystyrene, and an acrylic resin containing a phenolic hydroxyl group as disclosed in JP-A-51-34711 can also be used.

Other suitable binders include the following
Normally, the monomer represented by any one of (1) to (13) is used as a constituent unit.
Copolymers having a molecular weight of 10,000 to 200,000 can be mentioned.

(1) Acrylamides, methacrylamides, acrylates, methacrylates and hydroxystyrenes having an aromatic hydroxyl group, such as N- (4-hydroxyphenyl) acrylamide or N- (4-hydroxyphenyl) ) Methacrylamide, o-, m- and p-hydroxystyrene, o-,
m- and p-hydroxyphenyl acrylates or methacrylates, (2) acrylates and methacrylates having an aliphatic hydroxyl group, for example,
2-hydroxyethyl acrylate or 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, (3) unsaturated carboxylic acid such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, maleic anhydride, methaconic acid, (4) methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate, acrylic Butyl acrylate, amyl acrylate, hexyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate,
Octyl acrylate, phenyl acrylate, benzyl acrylate, 2-chloroethyl acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate, glycidyl acrylate, N-
(Substituted) acrylates such as dimethylaminoethyl acrylate, (5) methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, propyl methacrylate, butyl methacrylate, amyl methacrylate, hexyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl methacrylate, octyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid (Substituted) methacrylates such as phenyl, benzyl methacrylate, 2-chloroethyl methacrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl methacrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, N-dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, (6) acrylamide, methacrylamide, N-
Methylol acrylamide, N-methylol methacrylamide, N-ethyl acrylamide, N-ethyl methacrylamide, N-hexyl acrylamide, N-hexyl methacrylamide, N-cyclohexyl acrylamide, N-cyclohexyl methacrylamide, N-hydroxyethyl acrylamide, N- Hydroxyethylacrylamide, N-phenylacrylamide, N-phenylmethacrylamide, N-benzylacrylamide, N
-Benzyl methacrylamide, N-nitrophenyl acrylamide, N-nitrophenyl methacrylamide, N
Acrylamide or methacrylamide such as -ethyl-N-phenylacrylamide and N-ethyl-N-phenylmethacrylamide, (7) ethyl vinyl ether, 2-chloroethyl vinyl ether, hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, propyl vinyl ether, butyl vinyl ether, octyl vinyl ether, phenyl Vinyl ethers such as vinyl ether; (8) vinyl esters such as vinyl acetate, vinyl chloroacetate, vinyl butyrate and vinyl benzoate; (9) styrenes such as styrene, methyl styrene and chloromethyl styrene; (10) methyl vinyl Vinyl ketones such as ketone, ethyl vinyl ketone, propyl vinyl ketone, phenyl vinyl ketone, (11) ethylene, propylene, isobutylene, butadiene Olefins such as isoprene, (12) N-vinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylcarbazole, 4-vinylpyridine, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, (13) N- (o-aminosulfonylphenyl) acrylamide, N- (m- Aminosulfonylphenyl) acrylamide, N- (p-
Aminosulfonylphenyl) acrylamide, N- [1
-(3-aminosulfonyl) naphthyl] acrylamide, acrylamides such as N- (2-aminosulfonylethyl) acrylamide, N- (o-aminosulfonylphenyl) methacrylamide, N- (m-aminosulfonylphenyl) methacrylamide, N- (p-aminosulfonylphenyl) methacrylamide, N- [1-
Methacrylamides such as (3-aminosulfonyl) naphthyl] methacrylamide and N- (2-aminosulfonylethyl) methacrylamide, and o-aminosulfonylphenyl acrylate, m-aminosulfonylphenyl acrylate, and p-aminosulfonylphenyl acrylate , Unsaturated sulfonamides such as acrylates such as 1- (3-aminosulfonylphenylnaphthyl) acrylate, o-aminosulfonylphenyl methacrylate, m-aminosulfonylphenyl methacrylate, p-ahnosulfonylphenyl methacrylate, 1- ( Copolymerization of unsaturated sulfonamides such as methacrylates such as (3-aminosulfonylphenylnaphthyl) methacrylate, and a monomer copolymerizable with the above monomers It may be. In addition, a copolymer obtained by copolymerization of the above-mentioned monomers modified with, for example, glycidyl acrylate or glycidyl methacrylate is also included, but is not limited thereto.

The above copolymer preferably contains the unsaturated carboxylic acid described in (3), and the copolymer has a preferable acid value of 0 to 10 meq / g, more preferably 0.2 to 10 meq / g.
５5.0 meq / g.

The preferred molecular weight of the above copolymer is 10,000 to 1
100,000.

If necessary, a polyvinyl butyral resin, a polyurethane resin, a polyamide resin and an epoxy resin may be added to the above copolymer.

Such alkali-soluble polymer compounds can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
It is used in an amount of 80% by weight or less of the entire photosensitive composition.

Further, as described in US Pat. No. 4,123,279, a phenol having an alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms as a substituent, such as t-butylphenol formaldehyde resin and octylphenol formaldehyde resin, is used. It is preferable to use a condensate of aldehyde and formaldehyde in combination in order to improve the oil sensitivity of the image.

It is preferable to add cyclic acid anhydrides, phenols and organic acids to the photosensitive composition in order to increase the sensitivity.

As the cyclic acid anhydride, US Pat. No. 4,11
No. 5,128, phthalic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, hexahydrophthalic anhydride,
3,6-Endoxy-Δ4-tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, tetrachlorophthalic anhydride, maleic anhydride, chloromaleic anhydride, α-phenylmaleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride and the like can be used.

As phenols, bisphenol A, p-nitrophenol, p-ethoxyphenol,
2,4,4'-trihydroxybenzophenone, 2,
3,4-trihydroxybenzophenone, 4-hydroxybenzophenone, 4,4 ', 4 "-trihydroxy-triphenylmethane, 4,4', 3", 4 "-tetrahydroxy-3,5,3 ', 5 '-Tetramethyltriphenylmethane and the like.

Further, examples of the organic acids include those disclosed in
And sulfonic acids, sulfinic acids, alkyl sulfates, phosphonic acids, phosphoric esters, and carboxylic acids described in JP-A-88942, JP-A-2-96755 and the like. Sulfonic acid, dodecylbenzenesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfinic acid, ethyl sulfate, phenylphosphonic acid, phenylphosphinic acid, phenyl phosphate, diphenyl phosphate,
Benzoic acid, isophthalic acid, adipic acid, p-toluic acid, 3,4-dimethoxybenzoic acid, phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, 1,4-cyclohexene-2,2-dicarboxylic acid, erucic acid, lauric acid, n-undecane Acids, ascorbic acid and the like.

The proportion of the above-mentioned cyclic acid anhydrides, phenols and organic acids in the photosensitive composition is 0.05%.
-15% by weight, more preferably 0.1-5% by weight.

In order to broaden the stability of processing under development conditions (so-called development latitude), a nonionic surfactant as described in JP-A-62-251740 may be used in the photosensitive composition. JP-A-59-1210
No. 44 and JP-A-4-13149 can be added.

Specific examples of the nonionic surfactant include sorbitan tristearate, sorbitan monopalmitate, sorbitan triolate, monoglyceride stearate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, polyoxyethylene nonyl phenyl ether and the like. .

Specific examples of the amphoteric surfactant include alkyldi (aminoethyl) glycine, alkylpolyaminoethylglycine hydrochloride, 2-alkyl-N-carboxyethyl-N-hydroxyethylimidazolinium betaine and N-tetradecyl-N , N-betaine type (for example, trade name Amogen K, manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) and alkyl imidazoline type (for example, trade name Levon 15, Sanyo Chemical Co., Ltd.)
Co., Ltd.).

The proportion of the above nonionic surfactant and amphoteric surfactant in the photosensitive composition is 0.05 to 15%.
% By weight, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by weight.

A printing-out agent for obtaining a visible image immediately after exposure, and a dye or pigment as an image coloring agent can be added to the photosensitive composition.

Representative examples of the printing-out agent include a combination of a compound that releases an acid upon exposure (photoacid releasing agent) and an organic dye that can form a salt. In particular,
Combinations of o-naphthoquinonediazide-4-sulfonic acid halogenide and salt-forming organic dyes described in JP-A-50-36209 and JP-A-53-8128, and JP-A-53-36223, 54-74728, 6
No. 0-3626, No. 61-143748, No. 61-1
Combinations of trihalomethyl compounds and salt-forming organic dyes described in JP-A-51644 and JP-A-63-58440 can be exemplified. Such trihalomethyl compounds include oxazole-based compounds and triazine-based compounds, both of which have excellent stability over time and give clear print-out images.

As the colorant for the image, other dyes can be used in addition to the above-mentioned salt-forming organic dyes. Suitable dyes, including salt-forming organic dyes, include oil-soluble dyes and basic dyes. Specifically, Oil Yellow # 101, Oil Yellow # 103, Oil Pink # 312, Oil Green BG, Oil Blue BOS,
Oil Blue # 603, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS, Oil Black T-505 (all manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Victoria Pure Blue, Crystal Violet (CI42555), Methyl Violet (CI42535), Ethyl Violet, Rhodamine B (CI145170B), malachite green (CI42000), methylene blue (CI5201)
5) and the like. Also, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.
The dyes described in JP 93247 A are particularly preferred.

The photosensitive composition is dissolved in a solvent capable of dissolving the above-mentioned components, applied on an aluminum plate as a support, and dried.

As the method of applying the photosensitive composition, a method using a coating rod described in JP-B-58-4589, JP-A-59-123568, etc., and JP-A-4-244265, etc. A method using an extrusion type coater described above, a method using a slide bead coater described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 1-57629, Japanese Patent Application No. 8-288656 or the like can be used.

A coating method using a coating rod will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 27, reference numeral 211 denotes a wire bar or a grooving bar which is rotated in the same direction or in the opposite direction to the web 212 which is continuously running. A bar support member 213 is provided over the entire length of the bar 211, and has a function as a liquid supply device that prevents the bar 211 from bending and supplies the coating liquid 214 to the bar 211. That is, the coating liquid 214 is supplied from the liquid supply port 215 provided in the bar support member 213 to the dam member 216.
Is supplied into the liquid supply guide groove 217 formed between the web 21 and the web 21.
2, the web 212 and the bar 211
The coating liquid 214 is measured at the contact portion with the coating liquid, and only a desired amount of the coating liquid is applied to the web 212, and the remaining liquid flows down and the liquid pool 21 together with the newly supplied coating liquid 214.
8 are formed.

In this method, the amount of application is controlled by the size of the groove on the surface of the coating bar, that is, the size of the wire in a wire bar in which a wire is wound around a rod. The control range of the coating amount is not clearly defined,
Usually 3 to 100 cc / m ² is used.

The diameter of the coating bar is not particularly limited, but a diameter of 3 to 20 mm is usually used. The rotation of the coating bar may be in the same direction as the web or in the opposite direction, and the coating speed can be used in the range of 10 to 150 m / min. The viscosity of the liquid is 0.7 to 0.7.
500 cp is preferred, and more preferably 0.7-100.
The cp and the surface tension are preferably 20 to 70 dyne / cm, more preferably 25 to 50 dyne / cm, and the specific gravity is 0.8 to 1.5.

As another coating method, a coating liquid is discharged from an extrusion type liquid injector, and a coating liquid bridge is formed on an aluminum web running while being wound around a backup roller. Can be used by applying a reduced pressure or by applying a pressure to the front part.

FIG. 28 shows an example of the extrusion type liquid injector. In this figure, 221 is an extrusion coater, 222
Is a decompression chamber, 223 is an exhaust pipe, 224 is an aluminum web, 225 is a backup roller, and 226 is a coating liquid.

In this method, although it depends on the clearance between the aluminum web and the tip of the liquid injector, 10 to 500 cc / m
^{About 2} coating amount of liquid can be applied.

As the conditions of the coating solution, the viscosity is 0.7 to 10
00 cp, more preferably 0.7 to 100 cp, and the surface tension is 20 to 70 dyne / cm, more preferably 25 to 70 dyne / cm.
A region with 50 dyne / cm and a specific gravity of 0.8 to 1.5 is preferable.

The clearance between the aluminum web and the liquid injector is usually about 0.1 to 0.5 mm.

Next, the drying method and conditions will be described.

The drying method is described in Japanese Patent Application No. Hei.
A pass roll is placed in a drying device described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 0, and an arch-type dryer system in which the web is wrapped and transported by the roll, and air is supplied from the upper and lower surfaces of the web by nozzles to dry the web while floating. There are a method in which heating is performed by using various media at a high temperature without using hot air and drying is performed by radiant heat, and a method in which a roll is heated using various media and dried by conducting heat transfer by contact between the roll and the web.

A drying method using hot air will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 29, an aluminum web 232 continuously guided and guided by a guide roll 231 is
A coating liquid containing a solvent is applied by 33 and introduced into the first step drying zone 234. The first step drying zone 234 has an air supply port 235 and an exhaust port 236. 40-130 ° C from air inlet 235, dew point -5
The hot air supplied at 15 ° C. is rectified by the rectifying plate 237 and comes into contact with the surface of the coating film formed by the coating on the aluminum web 232 at a wind speed of 0.5 to 4 m / s to dry the coating film. It is discharged from the exhaust port 236. The coating film of the aluminum web 232 reaching the vicinity of the outlet of the first step drying zone 234 has a soft film state. The long aluminum web 232 continuously guided and guided by the guide rolls 231 is introduced into the second step drying zone 238. In the second step drying zone 238, the air supply port 23 is provided.
9 and an exhaust port 240 are provided. The hot air having a dew point of 5 to 20 ° C. supplied from the air supply port 239 is blown out from the slit type nozzle 241 and has a wind speed of 5 to 15 m /.
s, and violently comes into contact with the coating film surface of the aluminum web 232. As a result, the solvent of the coating film evaporates, and the coating film hardens. The gas after contact with the coating film is
Emitted from 0.

The slit type nozzle is generally used under the conditions that the tip nozzle clearance is 0.2 to 8 mm, the pitch is 30 to 300 mm, and the distance between the nozzle and the web is 5 to 200 mm.

The solvent used herein is described in
Organic solvents such as those described in JP-A-2-251739 may be used alone or in combination.

The photosensitive composition is dissolved and dispersed at a solid content of 2 to 50% by weight, coated on a support and dried.

The coating amount of the coating film to be coated on the support varies depending on the application, but is generally preferably from 0.3 to 4.0 g / m ^{2 in} terms of the weight after drying. As the amount of coating decreases, the amount of exposure for obtaining an image may be small, but the film strength is reduced. As the coating amount increases, the exposure amount is required, but the photosensitive film becomes strong. For example, when used as a printing plate, a printing plate having a high printable number (high printing durability) can be obtained.

In the photosensitive composition, a surfactant for improving the coated surface quality, for example, JP-A-62-170950
A fluorine-based surfactant such as that described in JP-A No. 5-2,028 can be added. A preferable addition amount is 0.001 to 1.0% by weight, more preferably 0.005 to 0.5% by weight of the whole photosensitive composition.

Examples of the photosensitive composition of the negative type lithographic printing plate 10 include those having a coating film containing a photosensitive diazo compound, a photopolymerizable coating film, and a photocrosslinkable coating film. Of these, the photocurable photosensitive copying material comprising a photosensitive diazo compound will be described in detail with reference to examples.

As the photosensitive diazo compound, a diazo resin obtained by condensing an aromatic diazonium salt with a reactive carbonyl group-containing organic condensing agent, particularly an aldehyde such as formaldehyde or acetaldehyde or an acetal in an acidic medium is preferably used. . The most typical one is P-
There are condensates of diazodiphenylamine and formaldehyde. Methods for synthesizing these diazo resins are described, for example, in US Pat. Nos. 2,678,498 and 3,050,502.
Nos. 3,311,605 and 3,277,
No. 074.

Further, as the photosensitive diazo compound, a co-condensed diazo compound of an aromatic diazonium salt and a substituted aromatic compound containing no diazonium group described in JP-B-49-48001 is preferably used. Is preferably a co-condensed diazo compound with an aromatic compound substituted with an alkali-soluble group such as a hydroxyl group. Further, JP-A-4-18559 and JP-A-4-1903
No. 61 and JP-A-4-172353, photosensitive diazo compounds obtained by condensing an aromatic diazonium salt with a reactive carbonyl compound having an alkali-soluble group are also preferably used.

As a counter anion of these diazonium salts, there is a diazo resin using a mineral acid such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid and phosphoric acid or an inorganic anion such as a double salt with zinc chloride. Insoluble and organic solvent-soluble diazo resins are particularly preferred. Such preferred diazo resins are disclosed in JP-B-47-1167, U.S. Pat.
No. 0,309.

Further, halogenated Lewis acids such as tetrafluoroboric acid and hexafluorophosphoric acid, and perchloric acid and periodic acid described in JP-A-54-98613 and JP-A-56-121031. A diazo resin using a perhalogen acid as a counter anion is preferably used.

Also, JP-A-58-209733, 6
A diazo resin having a long chain alkyl group-containing sulfonic acid as a counter anion described in JP-A Nos. 2-175731 and 63-262463 is also preferably used.

The photosensitive diazo compound is contained in the coating film in an amount of 5 to 50.
%, Preferably in the range of 8 to 20% by weight.

The photosensitive diazo compound is preferably used in combination with a lipophilic polymer compound which is soluble or swellable in alkaline water as a binder. As such a lipophilic polymer compound, the same monomers as those used in the above-mentioned positive photosensitive composition (1) to (13) are usually used in an amount of 10,000 to 20 as a structural unit. Copolymers having a molecular weight of 10,000 can be mentioned, and further (14)
A polymer compound obtained by copolymerizing the monomer shown in (15) as a constitutional unit can also be used.

(14) Maleimide, N-acryloylacrylamide, N-acetylacrylamide, N-propionylacrylamide, N- (p-chlorobenzoyl)
Acrylamide, N-acetylacrylamide, N-acryloylmethacrylamide, N-acetylmethacrylamide, N-propionylmethacrylamide, N- (p
Unsaturated imides such as -chlorobenzoyl) methacrylamide, (15) N- [2- (acryloyloxy) -ethyl] -2,3-dimethylmaleimide, N- [6- (methacryloyloxy) -hexyl] -2, Unsaturated monomers having a crosslinkable group in the side chain, such as 3-dimethylmaleimide and vinyl cinnamate.

Further, a monomer copolymerizable with the above monomer may be copolymerized. In addition, a copolymer obtained by copolymerization of the above-mentioned monomers modified with, for example, glycidyl acrylate or glycidyl methacrylate is also included, but is not limited thereto.

The above copolymer preferably contains the unsaturated carboxylic acid listed in (3), and the copolymer preferably has an acid value of 0 to 10 meq / g, more preferably 0.2 to 10 meq / g.
５5.0 meq / g.

The preferred molecular weight of the copolymer is 10,000 to 1
100,000.

If necessary, a polyvinyl butyral resin, a polyurethane resin, a polyamide resin and an epoxy resin may be added to the above copolymer. Novolak-type resins, phenol-modified xylene resins, polyhydroxystyrenes, polyhalogenated hydroxystyrenes, and alkali-soluble resins containing phenolic hydroxyl groups as disclosed in JP-A-51-43711 can also be used. it can.

These alkali-soluble polymer compounds can be used alone or in combination of two or more, and usually 40 to 95% by weight of the total solid content of the photosensitive composition.
In the range of

In the photosensitive composition, a sensitizing agent (for example, a half-ester of alcohol of a styrene-maleic anhydride copolymer described in JP-A-55-527) for improving the oil sensitivity of an image is used. Compound, novolak resin, p-
A 50% fatty acid ester of hydroxystyrene).

Furthermore, a plasticizer for imparting flexibility and abrasion resistance to the coating film is added. For example, butylphthalyl, polyethylene glycol, tributyl citrate, diethyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, dihexyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, tributyl phosphate, trioctyl phosphate, tetrahydrofurfuryl oleate, acrylic acid or methacrylic acid And tricresyl phosphate is particularly preferred.

Further, in the photosensitive composition, for example, phosphoric acid, phosphorous acid, citric acid,
Oxalic acid, dipicolinic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, naphthalenesulfonic acid, sulfosalicylic acid, 4-methoxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone-5-sulfonic acid, tartaric acid and the like are added.

In the photosensitive composition, a printing-out agent for obtaining a visible image immediately after exposure, and a dye such as a dye or a pigment as an image coloring agent can be added.

As such a dye, a dye which changes color by reacting with a free radical or an acid is preferably used. For example, Victoria Pure Blue BOH (made by Hodogaya Chemical), Oil Yellow # 101, Oil Yellow #
103, oil pink # 312, oil red, oil green BG, oil blue BOS, oil blue # 6
03, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS, Oil Black T-505
Co., Ltd.), Patent Pure Blue (manufactured by Sumitomo Sangoku Chemical), Crystal Violet (CI42555), Methyl Violet (CI42535), Ethyl Violet, Rhodamine B (CI145170B), Malachite Green (CI42000), Methylene Blue (CI5
2015), brilliant blue, methyl green, erythricin B, basic fuchsin, m-cresol purple, auramine, triphenylmethane series represented by 4-p-diethylaminophenyliminaphthoquinone, cyano-p-diethylaminophenylacetanilide, diphenylmethane series , Oxazine, xanthene, iminonaphthoquinone, azomethine or anthraquinone dyes change from colored to colorless or different colored tones.

On the other hand, examples of the color changing agent which changes from colorless to colored include leuco dyes and, for example, triphenylamine, diphenylamine, o-chloroaniline, 1,2,2
3-triphenylguanidine, naphthylamine, diaminodiphenylmethane, p, p'-bis-dimethylaminodiphenylamine, 1,2-dianilinoethylene, p,
p ', p "-tris-dimethylaminotriphenylmethane, p, p'-bis-dimethylaminodiphenylmethylimine, p, p', p" -triamino-o-methyltriphenylmethane, p, p'-bis Primary or secondary arylamine dyes represented by -dimethylaminodiphenyl-4-anilinonaphthylmethane, p, p ', p "-triaminotriphenylmethane.

Particularly preferred are triphenylmethane and diphenylmethane dyes, more preferred are triphenylmethane dyes, and particularly Victoria Pure Blue BOH.

The above dyes are usually used in the photosensitive composition in an amount of about 0.1 to 0.3.
The content is 5 to 10% by weight, more preferably about 1 to 5% by weight.

In the photosensitive composition, cyclic acid anhydrides, phenols, organic acids and higher alcohols can be added to enhance the developability.

The photosensitive composition is dissolved in a solvent capable of dissolving each of the above components and applied on an aluminum plate as a support.
The solvent used herein is described in JP-A-62-2517.
An organic solvent as described in JP-A-39 is used alone or as a mixture.

The photosensitive composition is dissolved and dispersed at a solid content of 2 to 50% by weight, and coated and dried on a support in the same manner as the light-positive photosensitive composition.

The coating amount of the coating film applied on the support varies depending on the application, but is generally preferably from 0.3 to 4.0 g / m ^{2 in} terms of the weight after drying. As the amount of coating decreases, the amount of exposure for obtaining an image may be small, but the film strength is reduced. As the coating amount increases, the exposure amount is required, but the photosensitive film becomes strong. For example, when used as a printing plate, a printing plate having a high printable number (high printing durability) can be obtained.

A surfactant for improving the coated surface quality can be added to the photosensitive composition as in the case of the positive photosensitive composition described above.

On the surface of the lithographic printing plate 10 of the present invention opposite to the coating film, a coating layer made of an organic polymer compound (hereinafter referred to as a back coating layer) in order to prevent the coating films from being damaged when they are overlaid. It can be provided as needed.

The main component of the back coat layer is at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a saturated copolymerized polyester resin, a phenoxy resin, a polyvinyl acetate resin and a vinylidene chloride copolymerized resin having a glass transition point of 20 ° C. or higher. Used.

The saturated copolyester resin comprises a dicarboxylic acid unit and a diol unit. As the dicarboxylic acid unit of the polyester, phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, tetrabromophthalic acid, aromatic dicarboxylic acids such as tetrachlorophthalic acid, adipic acid, azelaic acid, succinic acid, oxalic acid, suberic acid, sebacic acid, Saturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids such as malonic acid and 1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid are exemplified.

In the back coat layer, a dye or pigment for coloring, a silane coupling agent for improving adhesion to an aluminum support, a diazo resin composed of a diazonium salt, an organic phosphonic acid, an organic phosphoric acid and a cationic Wax, which is usually used as a slip agent, such as a polymer,
Higher fatty acids, higher fatty acid amides, silicone compounds composed of dimethylsiloxane, modified dimethylsiloxane, polyethylene powder and the like are appropriately added.

The thickness of the back coat layer is basically sufficient if it does not damage the coating film even without the slip sheet 14, and is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 8 μm. Thickness 0.01
When the thickness is less than μm, it is not possible to prevent abrasion of the coating film when the lithographic printing plates 10 are handled in an overlapping manner. If the thickness exceeds 8 μm, during printing, the back coat layer swells due to chemicals used around the printing plate, causing the thickness to fluctuate, changing the printing pressure and deteriorating printing characteristics.

Various methods can be applied to cover the back surface of the aluminum plate with the back coat layer. For example, a method of applying a solution in an appropriate solvent, or an emulsified dispersion, and drying it, for example, a method of forming a film in advance and bonding it to an aluminum plate with an adhesive or heat, a method of forming a molten film with a melt extruder. Although a method of forming and bonding it to an aluminum plate may be mentioned, the most preferable method for securing the above-mentioned coating amount is a method of coating and drying the solution. As the solvent used here, JP-A-62-25
An organic solvent as described in JP-A-1739 is used alone or as a mixture.

In the production of the lithographic printing plate 10, either the back coat layer or the coating film may be applied on the aluminum plate first, or both may be applied simultaneously.

Hereinafter, the lithographic printing plate 1 having the mat layer formed thereon will be described.
Specific substance name (Material name) for the gap between 0 and slip sheet 14
This will be described with reference to numerical values and the like.

(Case 20) <Lithographic printing plate 10> Using a 0.24 mm-thick JIS A 1050 aluminum plate, a suspension of water and pumistone was supplied to the surface of the aluminum plate while the hair diameter was 0.57 to 0.55 mm. A brush graining process was performed by changing the pressure of a 0.72 mm nylon brush.

After brush graining and washing with water well, 25% at 60 ° C. in a 10% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution.
Dipped for 2 seconds, etched, washed with running water,
Washing with neutralization and water was carried out with a 10% nitric acid. Using a sinusoidal alternating waveform current, these were immersed in a 1% aqueous nitric acid solution for 100 to 600
The electrolytic surface-roughening treatment was performed with an amount of electricity at the anode of Coulomb / dm ² . Subsequently, 40% in 1% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution
Immersion in 30% sulfuric acid aqueous solution
After desmutting at 0 ° C. for 40 seconds, the substrate was anodized by direct current in a 20% sulfuric acid aqueous solution at a current density of 5 A / dm ² so as to have an oxide film weight of 1.6 g / m ² .

An undercoat liquid (viscosity: 1.1 mPa, surface tension: 45 μN / cm) having the following composition was applied to the surface of the substrate thus prepared by a bar coater in an amount of 9.
The coating was performed at 5 cm ³ / m ² at 50 m / min and dried at 80 ° C. for 30 seconds. The coating amount after drying was 30 mg / m ² .

(Undercoating solution) As an undercoating solution, 0.10 g of aminoethylphosphonic acid and 0.1% of phenylphosphonic acid were used.
5 g, β-alanine 0.10 g, methanol 40 g, and pure water 60 g were used.

A photosensitive liquid having the following composition (viscosity 2.3 mPa, surface tension 3
6 μN / cm) using a bar coater to apply a wet coating amount of 25 c.
Coating was performed at 50 m / min at m ³ / m ² and dried at 110 ° C. for 1 minute to form a coating film having a coating amount of about 2.0 g / m ² .
(Photosensitive solution) Esterified product of 1,2-diazonaphthoquinone-5-sulfonyl chloride and pyrogallol-acetone resin (described in Example 1 of U.S. Pat. No. 3,635,709); 45 g cresol-formaldehyde novolak resin (meta,
Para ratio; 6 to 4, weight average molecular weight 3,000, number average molecular weight 1,100, containing 0.7% of unreacted cresol); 1.1 g m-cresol-formaldehyde novolak resin;
(Weight-average molecular weight 1,700, number-average molecular weight 600, containing 1% of unreacted cresol); 0.3 g poly [N- (P-aminosulfonylphenyl) acrylamide-co-normalbutyl acrylate-co-diethylene glycol monomethyl ether Methacrylate]
(The molar ratio of each monomer is 40:40:20, the weight average molecular weight is 40,000, and the number average molecular weight is 20,000);
0.2 g P-normal octylphenol-formaldehyde resin (as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,123,279); 0.02 g naphthoquinone-1,2-diazide-4-sulfonic acid chloride; 0.01 g Tetrahydrophthalic anhydride; 0.1
g Benzoic acid; 0.02 g 4- [p-N, N-bis (ethoxycarbonylmethyl)
Aminophenyl] -2,6-bis (trichloromethyl)
-S-triazine; 0.01 g 4- [PN- (P-hydroxybenzoyl) aminophenyl] -2,6-bis (trichloromethyl) -S-triazine; 0.02 g 2-trichloromethyl-5- ( 4-hydroxystyryl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole; 0.01 g Dye in which the counter anion of Victoria Pure Blue BOH is changed to 1-naphthalenesulfonic acid; 0.02 g Modipa-F-200 (Nippon Oil & Fats Co., Ltd.) 0.06 g Megafac F177 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc.), fluorine surfactant, 30% by weight mixed solvent solution of methyl ethyl ketone and methyl isobutyl ketone
0.02 g of methyl ethyl ketone; 15 g of 1-methoxy-2-propanol; 10 g of the fluorine-containing surfactant, 20% by weight solution of methyl isobutyl ketone;
Based on the method described in Example 1 of JP-A-8986,
A mat layer is prepared by electrostatically spraying a copolymer aqueous solution (methyl methacrylate / ethyl acrylate / sodium acrylate = 68/20/12) having a viscosity of 4.0 mPa and a surface tension of 43 μN / cm while changing the amount of liquid to be sent. Was provided.

The protrusions of the mat layer have a density of 1000 / cm.
^{2. The} height was 4.0 μm. The surface roughness on the side opposite to the coating film was 0.25.

(Interleaf paper 14) The bleached kraft pulp was beaten, and aluminum sulfate was added to the stock diluted to a concentration of 4%.
H was added until 5.0. From this stock, a density of 0.
75 g / cm ³ , glossiness of Bekk smoothness of 60 seconds, moisture 5.
5% of 35 g / m ² slip paper 14 was made.

[0310] The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the slip sheet 14 was 0.60, and the static friction coefficient between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the slip sheet 14 was 0.64.

[0311] (Case 21) The lithographic printing plate 10, the convex portions of the mat layer, another is the density 150 / cm ² Case 2
Same as 0. The slip sheet 14 is the same as the case 20. The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the slip sheet 14 is 0.40, and the non-image forming surface 10Q and the slip sheet 14
Was 0.64.

(Case 22) The planographic printing plate 10 is the same as the case 20. The interleaf paper 14 is laminated on one side with polyethylene (the lamination method is described in
23, except that the method described in detail in JP-A-23259 was used. Lithographic printing plate 10
The coefficient of static friction between the image forming surface 10P and the slip sheet 14 is 0.7
0, the coefficient of static friction between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the slip sheet 14 was 0.64.

(Case 23) The planographic printing plate 10 is the same as the case 20 except that the density of the projections of the mat layer is 10000 / cm ² . The slip sheet 14 is the same as the case 20. The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the interleaf 14 is 0.76, and the non-image forming surface 10Q and the interleaf 1
The coefficient of static friction with No. 4 was 0.64.

(Case 24) The planographic printing plate 10 is the same as the case 20 except that the height of the projections of the mat layer is 6.0 μm. The slip sheet 14 is the same as the case 20. The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the slip sheet 14 was 0.74, and the static friction coefficient between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the slip sheet 14 was 0.64.

(Case 25) The planographic printing plate 10 is the same as the case 20. The slip sheet 14 is the same as the case 20 except that the smoothness is 10 seconds. The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P and the slip sheet 14 of the lithographic printing plate 10 was 0.65, and the static friction coefficient between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the slip sheet 14 was 0.66.

(Case 26) The planographic printing plate 10 is the same as the case 20. The slip sheet 14 is the same as the case 20 except that the smoothness is 6 seconds. The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the slip sheet 14 was 0.64, and the static friction coefficient between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the slip sheet 14 was 0.67.

(Case 27) The lithographic printing plate 10 was the same as the lithographic printing plate 10 except that the projections of the mat layer had a density of 60 / cm ^2.
Is the same as The slip sheet 14 is the same as the case 20.
The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P and the interleaf 14 of the lithographic printing plate 10 was 0.28, and the static friction coefficient between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the interleaf 14 was 0.64.

(Case 28) The planographic printing plate 10 is the same as the case 20 except that the projections of the mat layer have a density of 150 / cm ² and a height of 1.5 μm. The slip sheet 14 is the same as the case 20. Image forming surface 10P of lithographic printing plate 10
Coefficient of static friction between paper and interleaf 14 is 0.23, non-image forming surface 1
The static friction coefficient between 0Q and the slip sheet 14 was 0.64.

[0319] (Case 29) The lithographic printing plate 10, the convex portions of the mat layer, another is the density 150 / cm ² Case 2
Same as 0. Interleaf paper 14, except that the polyethylene emulsion on the surface of the gloss surface was 0.3 g / m ² coating Case 2
Same as 0. The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the slip sheet 14 is 0.26, and the non-image forming surface 10
The coefficient of static friction between Q and the slip sheet 14 was 0.64.

(Case 30) In the lithographic printing plate 10, the projections of the mat layer had a density of 150 / cm ² and a surface on the opposite side of the coating film (0.1 g / m ^{2 of the} photosensitive solution was applied). Except that the surface roughness is 0.12. Insert paper 1
4 is the same as case 20. The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P and the interleaf 14 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is 0.40, and the static friction coefficient between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the interleaf 14 is 0.28.
Met.

(Case 31) The planographic printing plate 10 is the same as the case 20. The slip sheet 14 is the same as the case 20 except that the glossy surface is coated with 0.3 g / m ² of a polyethylene emulsion. Image forming surface 10P of lithographic printing plate 10
Coefficient of static friction between the paper and the slip sheet 14 is 0.26, and the non-image forming surface 1
The static friction coefficient between 0Q and the slip sheet 14 was 0.64.

(Case 32) In the lithographic printing plate 10, the convex portion of the mat layer had a density of 150 / cm ² and a surface opposite to the coating film (the photosensitive solution was applied at 0.2 g / m ² ). It is the same as the case 20 except that the surface roughness is 0.09. Insert paper 1
4 is the same as case 20. The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the slip sheet 14 is 0.40, and the static friction coefficient between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the slip sheet 14 is 0.23.
Met.

(Case 33) The planographic printing plate 10 is the same as the case 20. The slip sheet 14 is the same as the case 20 except that the smoothness is 4. The static friction coefficient between the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the slip sheet 14 was 0.66, and the static friction coefficient between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the slip sheet 14 was 0.68. In addition, the measurement of each characteristic was performed by the method shown below.

[Back surface roughness] is measured according to JIS B 06
According to the center line average roughness Ra specified in No. 01 (unit: μm).

[Smoothness test] Inserting paper 14 was 50 mm x 50
mm sheet, and cut with a Beck smoothness tester.
The number of seconds it took for 0 ml of air to pass between the glass standard surface of the 10 cm ² optical flat finish and the paper surface was measured with a stopwatch. For the method of measuring smoothness, see J
It is described in detail in ISP 8119.

[Static friction coefficient] The lithographic printing plate 10 was 150 m long.
The sheet was cut into a sheet of mx 300 mm and fixed horizontally on a smooth plate of 200 mm x 350 mm with the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10 facing upward. Also, the interleaf paper 14 is 100 mm × 10
Cut into 0mm sheet, 90mm with gloss side outside
The interleaf 14 and the center of the weight were fixed to a smooth surface of a 200 g weight having a smooth surface of × 90 mm. The glossy surface of the slip sheet 14 fixed to the weight was placed in contact with the center of the coated surface of the photosensitive printing plate material described above. In this state, one of the short sides of the smooth plate is lifted and inclined, and the interleaf 14 fixed to the weight is lifted.
Was measured when the slippage between the glossy surface and the image forming surface 10P of the photosensitive printing plate material began to occur. The static friction coefficient μ was calculated from a relational expression of μ = tan θ.

When the static friction coefficient between the non-image forming surface 10Q and the slip sheet 14 was measured, the measurement was performed with the coating film and the glossy surface reversed.

With respect to the above Examples and Comparative Examples, a transport shift test and a 10P scratch test on the image forming surface were performed. Table 9 shows the results.

[0329]

[Table 9]

[Transport deviation test] Lithographic printing plate 10 and slip sheet 1
4 was brought into close contact with a corona discharge of -8 kv. In the case 22, the polyethylene-laminated surface was brought into close contact with the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10, and in the cases 29 and 31, the polyethylene emulsion-coated surface was brought into close contact with the coating film of the photosensitive printing plate material.

Next, the sheet was cut into sheets of 1030 mm × 800 mm, and 50 sheets of each of the interleaving paper 14 and the photosensitive printing plate material were alternately stacked, and a laminated bundle 12 in which protective cardboard 22 was placed above and below the sheet was prepared. This laminated bundle 12 is subjected to 28 ° C., 50% R
In the environment of H, it was conveyed on the conveyor of an automatic cutting machine and an automatic packaging machine, and it was visually observed whether the conveyance deviation occurred in the said bundle from the start of conveyance to the end.

[Scratch on Image Forming Surface 10P] The presence or absence of a scratch having a diameter of about 0.1 mm or more was determined by a sensory inspection with the naked eye.

From the above results, the coefficient of static friction between the image forming surface 10P and the contact surface of the slip sheet 14 was 0.3 or more, and the coefficient of static friction between the side of the anti-coating film and the contact surface of the slip sheet 14 was 0.3 or more. Then (cases 20 to 26), it can be seen that there is no conveyance displacement. The average height is 2 μm on the coating film.
It can be seen that when the number of the protrusions is 100 or more / cm ² and the average surface roughness of the non-image forming surface 10Q is 0.15 or more, no conveyance deviation occurs. Further, the image forming surface 1
It can be seen that if the smoothness of the coating film contact surface in contact with 0P is 3 seconds or more, the coating film is not damaged.

Next, a description will be given of an interleaf 14 whose air permeability is within a certain range. In other words, the sensitivity of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be stabilized in a short time by using the slip sheet 14 whose air permeability is within a certain range.

Generally, when the slip sheet 14 is used for the lithographic printing plate 10 on which the water-soluble oxygen barrier layer is formed, the slip sheet is sucked by a suction cup or the like of an automatic slip sheet peeling device to be peeled off. Paper 1
4 coated with a plastic may be used (Japanese Patent Publication No. 57-23259). When the interleaf paper 14 coated with plastic is used, the interleaf paper 14 is charged by applying a high voltage, and the interleaf paper 14 is electrostatically brought into close contact with the interleaf paper 14 and peeled off at the time of use. There is a disadvantage that it takes a long time for the sensitivity of the lithographic printing plate 10 to stabilize due to the close contact of the plastic.

Such inconvenience can be solved by using the slip sheet 14 whose air permeability is within a certain range. The range of the air permeability is preferably 15 to 300 seconds in order to stabilize the sensitivity of the lithographic printing plate 10 in a short time. The air permeability is a value indicating the resistance of paper to air passage, and is represented by the time required for 100 cm ³ of air to pass through paper having an area of 645 mm ² . By using the interleaf paper 14 having the air permeability in this range, it is not necessary to use a plastic-coated interleaf paper. Therefore, the time until the sensitivity of the lithographic printing plate 10 becomes stable due to the close contact of the plastic can be reduced.

If the air permeability of the slip sheet is low, the lithographic printing plate 10 is also sucked at the same time when the suction cup or the like of the automatic slip sheet separating apparatus sucks and separates the slip sheet, and the slip sheet is also sucked. However, there is a possibility that it cannot be applied to various automatic slipping paper peeling devices. However, in this regard, it is possible to eliminate the use of the slipping paper 14 having an air permeability of 15 seconds or more. .

The air permeability of the slip sheet 14 and the lithographic printing plate 10 will be described below.
The time required for the sensitivity to stabilize will be described with reference to specific substance names (material names) and numerical values.

(Case 34) A synthetic sizing agent was added to a stock obtained by beating bleached kraft pulp and diluting it to a concentration of 4%.
4 wt% was added and aluminum sulfate was added until the pH reached 5.0. The paper stock is coated with 3.0% by weight of a paper strengthening agent containing starch as a main component, and the paper is made into a paper having a density of 0.8 g / cm.
^3. An interleaf paper 14 for a lithographic printing plate 10 having a Beck smoothness of 60 seconds and a water content of 6.0% and a weight of 38 g / m ² was prepared.

(Case 35) Interleaf paper 14 was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that 2 g / m ² of polyvinyl alcohol was applied to the surface.

(Case 36) A slip sheet was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that a paper strength agent containing starch as a main component was not applied.

(Case 37) A slip sheet was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that polyethylene was laminated on one side. The laminating method is described in JP-B-57-2325.
No. 9 discloses this in detail.

(Measurement of air permeability) The interleaving paper was 50 mm × 130.
mm sheet, and the number of seconds required for 100 cm ³ of air to pass through the area of 645 mm ² was measured with a stopwatch using a Gurley densometer. The method for measuring the air permeability is described in detail in JIS P 8117.

(Plying Paper Peeling Test by Automatic Paper Peeling Apparatus) As the lithographic printing plate 10, a 0.3 mm-thick grained and anodized aluminum support was placed on an ethylenically unsaturated plate. A photopolymerizable photosensitive composition comprising a polymerizable monomer having a group, a methacrylic polymer, a photopolymerization initiator, and the like is applied so that a dry coating amount is 1.4 g / m ² , and 10
A photosensitive layer dried at 0 ° C. for 2 minutes was formed. On this photosensitive layer, an aqueous solution of polyvinyl alcohol (a saponification degree of 98.5 mol% and a polymerization degree of 500) was applied in a dry coating amount of 2.4 g.
/ M ² and dried at 100 ° C. for 3 minutes. The lithographic printing plate 10 and the interleaving paper of the case 34, the case 35, the case 36, and the case 37 were brought into close contact with each other by a corona discharge of -8 kV. In this case, the case 37 had its poly side adhered to the water-soluble oxygen barrier layer of the photosensitive printing plate. Next, the sheet was cut into a sheet of 1030 mm × 800 mm, the slip sheet was sucked by a suction cup with an automatic slip sheet separating device in an environment of 25 ° C. and 50% RH, and it was visually observed whether only the slip sheet could be peeled. .

(Sensitivity stability test) The above lithographic printing plate 10
And case 34, case 35, case 36 and case 37
Were brought into close contact by a corona discharge of -8 kV. In this case, the case 37 had its poly side adhered to the water-soluble oxygen barrier layer of the photosensitive printing plate. Next, the sheet was cut into a sheet of 1030 mm × 800 mm and aged in an environment of 25 ° C. and 50% RH.
Immediately after cutting and after 5 and 10 days of aging, the interleaf paper of each sample was peeled off and exposed to visible light.

As the visible light, monochromatic light obtained through a Kenko optical filter BP-49 using a xenon lamp as a light source was used. Sensitivity was measured using a Fuji PS step guide (a step tablet having a transmission optical density of 0.05 at the first stage and increasing by 0.15 to 15 stages sequentially, manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.). After exposure for 24 seconds at an illuminance of 0.0132 mW / cm ² on the surface of the photosensitive film,
Heat at 00 ° C for 1 minute, and add
It was immersed for 0 second and developed. At this time, a change in sensitivity was shown in the clear stage of the PS step guide. Potassium 1K silicate; 30 g of potassium _{hydroxide; 15g C 12 H 25 -C 6} H 4 -O-C 6 H 4 -SO 3 Na; 3g water; 1000 g The results are shown in Table 10.

[0347]

[Table 10]

[0348] As can be seen from Table 10, the slip sheets 14 of the cases 34 and 35 can be peeled off by the automatic slip sheet peeling device alone. On the other hand, Case 3
The slip sheet 6 has too low air permeability, so that the lithographic printing plate 10 is also sucked together with the slip sheet. Therefore, with the slip sheet in the case 35, peeling of only the slip sheet by the automatic slip sheet separating device is impossible. In the slip sheet of the case 36, since the air permeability is too large, it takes time until the sensitivity of the lithographic printing plate 10 is stabilized. Therefore, it is necessary to use the interleaving paper of the case 36 after aging for a long time until the sensitivity is stabilized.

According to the above, the air permeability of the slip sheet is set to 15 seconds to 300
When it is set to seconds, even when the lithographic printing plate 10 is in contact with the lithographic printing plate 10 on which the water-soluble oxygen barrier layer is formed, it is not necessary to allow a long time to elapse until the sensitivity of the lithographic printing plate 10 is stabilized. It can be seen that the application of the above is possible.

By using a slip sheet having a specific volume resistivity within a certain range, it is possible to prevent peeling and charging.

In other words, when the interleaf paper coated with plastic is used as described above, the interleaf paper is charged by corona discharge to adhere the interleaf electrostatically and peeled off at the time of use, but the static electricity remains on the stacked interleaf paper. This is disadvantageous in that sparks are generated when the interleaving paper is peeled off during use after stacking, and fogging occurs when a highly sensitive photosensitive printing plate material is used. Further, since the plastic surface and the lithographic printing plate 10 are strongly adhered to each other by electrostatic interaction, the shear stress and the peeling stress between the interleaf paper and the lithographic printing plate 10 are large, and are very strong when the interleaving paper is peeled off. For example, when the lithographic printing plate 10 is to be peeled while being forcibly shifted, the lithographic printing plate 10 may be damaged or broken.

[0352] Such inconvenience is caused by the fact that the volume resistivity is one.
This can be solved by using the slip sheet within the fixed range. You
In other words, the slip-sheet itself without the plastic that is the coating material
In addition, paper strength agents such as starch and inorganic materials such as sodium chloride
Applying or adding a wetting agent such as electrolyte or glycerin
Conductivity of cationic polymer electrolytes and conductive zinc oxide
By applying or adding an electrical agent, the volume resistivity of the slip paper
Is 1.5 × 10^Ten~ 1.2 × 10¹²Ω · cm. This
As shown in FIG. ^TenΩ
cm or more, the water-soluble oxygen barrier layer
Separation of the slip sheet due to adhesion with the printing plate 10 can be prevented.
Further, the volume specific resistance value is set to 1.2 × 10¹²Ωcm or less
By doing so, charging under low humidity conditions is unlikely to remain, and various
It is possible to cope with an automatic slip sheet peeling device. In particular, automatically
Lithographic printing plate 10 to a device equipped with a
When set, the volume resistivity is 1.5 × 10^Ten
By using the interleaf paper of Ωcm or more,
Can be eliminated. Lithographic printing applied in this case
As the plate 10, the above water-soluble oxygen barrier layer was formed.
Such a water-soluble oxygen barrier layer is not limited to lithographic printing plates.
General type lithographic printing plates that are not formed,
Ip, heat-sensitive type, type without coating film, etc.
Can be.

The relationship between the volume resistivity of the slip sheet and the shear stress and the presence or absence of slipping of the slip sheet will be described with reference to specific material names (material names) and numerical values.

(Case 38) Beat the bleached kraft and
% Was added to the stock diluted to a concentration of 0.4% by weight, and aluminum sulfate was added until the pH became 5.0%. The paper stock was coated with 5.0% by weight of a paper-strengthening agent containing starch as a main component, and the paper was made.
An m ² photosensitive printing plate insert was prepared.

(Case 39) A slip sheet was prepared in the same manner as in Case 38 except that the amount of the paper strength agent applied was 0.5% by weight.

(Case 40) A slip sheet was prepared in the same manner as in Case 38 except that the paper strength agent was not applied.

(Case 41) An interleaf was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that polyethylene was laminated on one side of the case 40. The laminating method is described in detail in Japanese Patent Publication No. 57-23259.

(Case 42) A slip sheet was prepared in the same manner as in Case 38, except that the cationic polymer electrolyte was further applied at 5.0% by weight.

(Measurement of Volume Specific Resistance Value)
The sheet is cut into a mx 150 mm sheet,
After leaving for 3 hours or more under the environment of 0 ° C and 65% humidity,
Under the same environment, high sensitivity vibration capacitance type universal electrometer (MMA2-17 and PMA
-601), the volume resistance was measured. The interleaf paper thickness was divided from the product of the volume resistance value and the electrode area of the measuring instrument to obtain a volume specific resistance value.

(Interleaf paper / photosensitive printing plate material shear test)
The plate 10 is grained with a thickness of 0.3 mm and anodized.
Has an ethylenically unsaturated group on the treated aluminum support
Polymerizable monomer, methacrylic polymer, photopolymerization start
The dry coating amount of the photopolymerizable photosensitive composition comprising an agent and the like is 1.
4g / m ^TwoAnd dried at 100 ° C for 2 minutes
The photosensitive layer thus formed was formed. On top of this photosensitive layer,
Nyl alcohol (degree of saponification 98.5 mol%, degree of polymerization 50
0) The aqueous coating solution is dried at a coating amount of 2.4 g / m.^TwoTo be
And dried at 100 ° C for 3 minutes.
Was. This lithographic printing plate 10 and the above cases 38 and 3
9, the case 40, the case 41, and the case 42
By corona discharge of -8KV under the environment of 5 ° C and 40% RH
Closely attached. Among them, the case 41 is a photosensitive mark on the poly side.
The printing plate was brought into close contact with the water-soluble oxygen barrier layer. Next, 500m
mx 400mm sheet, 25 ° C 40% RH
Do not immediately shift the slip sheet in parallel with the lithographic printing plate 10 in the environment.
Peeling was performed, and the force applied at that time was measured with a spring balance.

(Interleaf Peeling Test) The above lithographic printing plate 10
And the case 38, the interleaving paper of the case 39, and the planographic printing plate 10
And the interleaving paper of the case 39, the case 40, and the case 41 were brought into close contact with each other by corona discharge, conveyed by a belt conveyor, and the presence or absence of peeling of the interleaving paper was observed. Table 11 shows the results.

[0362]

[Table 11]

As can be seen from Table 11, in the slip sheet 14 of the case 38 and the case 39, the shear stress is small and no peeling occurs. On the other hand, the interleaf paper of the case 40 does not peel off, but has a large residual stress due to the remaining charge. Further, the slip sheet of the case 41 has a very large shear stress because the volume resistivity value is too large. Therefore, in the slip sheet of Comparative Example 2, the slip sheet or the planographic printing plate 10 may be damaged when the slip sheet is peeled off. The interleaf of the case 43 was peeled off because the volume resistivity was too small.

Thus, the volume resistivity of the slip sheet is set to 1.
When it is 5 × 10 ¹⁰ or more, it can be seen that separation of the interleaving paper can be prevented by adhesion to the photosensitive printing plate material on which the water-soluble oxygen barrier layer is formed. Further, the volume resistivity value is set to 1.2 × 10 ¹²
When it is Ω · cm or less, it can be seen that the charge under low humidity conditions hardly remains, and it is possible to cope with various automatic slipping paper peeling devices.

(Various Aspects of Protective Cardboard 22) Next, various aspects of the protective cardboard 22 according to the present embodiment will be described.

The protective cardboard 22 need not necessarily be the same size as the planographic printing plate 10 in plan view.
For example, by making the size smaller than the lithographic printing plate 10 within a certain range in plan view, it is also possible to make the lithographic printing plate 10 and the protective cardboard 22 easier to collect.

That is, when forming the laminated bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10, a lithographic printing plate stacking device is often used. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the stacking device includes a plurality of stoppers 52 and 54, and an inner region surrounded by the stoppers 52 and 54 is a stacking unit 56. The lithographic printing plates 10 conveyed in the direction of arrow S by a conveying device (not shown) are fed into the stacking unit 56 one by one, and fall by their own weight in the stacking unit 56 to be stacked. Stopper 52 on the downstream side in the transport direction
Are biased toward the center of the stacking unit 56 by a spring (not shown), and the edges of the lithographic printing plates 10 conveyed one by one to the stacking unit 56 are aligned to prevent displacement. Further, the stoppers 54 on both sides in the transport direction are fixed, and guide the lithographic printing plate 10 so as not to shift in the width direction when the lithographic printing plate 10 is sent into the stacking unit 56. When placing protective cardboard, for each predetermined number of lithographic printing plates,
The protective cardboard 22 is sent to the stacking unit 56 in place of the lithographic printing plate 10.

However, when the protective cardboard 22 is made of the lithographic printing plate 1
0 and the same size in plan view, when the protective cardboard 22 is transported in a state of being slightly shifted in a direction perpendicular to the transport direction, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. In some cases, the sheet may be stuck on the stopper 54 or run on the stopper 54 to cause an accumulation failure. Further, even when the paper is sent to the collecting section 56, the edge of the protective cardboard 22 is strongly contacted with the stopper 54 and the frictional force is increased. there were.

As shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 31, if the protective cardboard 22 is slightly displaced in the transport direction, the protective cardboard 22 protrudes from the accumulated planographic printing plates 10 so that the stopper Reference numeral 52 is pushed outward by the protruding portion of the protective cardboard 22 and retracts from its original position (the retracted stopper is indicated by a dashed line). For this reason, the subsequent accumulation position of the lithographic printing plate 10 becomes the position of the retracted stopper 52, and the accumulation position may vary.

On the other hand, FIG. 32 shows the planographic printing plate 10.
Length L1 and short side length W1, and the protective cardboard 2
2 shows the relationship between the corresponding long side length L2 and the short side length W2. As can be seen from this figure, when the protective cardboard 22 that is formed smaller than the lithographic printing plate 10 in plan view is used, the protective cardboard 22 faces the lithographic printing plate 10 in the surface direction (image formation). Even in the direction along the plane), if the amount of deviation is within a certain range,
It does not protrude from the lithographic printing plate 10.

Accordingly, the stack 1
When the protective cardboard 22 is formed smaller than the lithographic printing plate 10 in a plan view when configuring the printing plate 2, as shown in FIG. Even if the sheet is conveyed to the stacking section 56 in a state in which the protective thick paper 22 is transported to the stacking section 56 within a certain range, it is possible to reliably prevent the protective thick paper 22 from being caught by the stopper 54 or riding on the stopper 54. For this reason, an integration failure does not occur and the integration operation of the integration device 50 does not stop. In addition, when the lithographic printing plate 10 is sent to the stacking unit 56, its edge does not strongly contact the stopper 54, so that the frictional force is reduced. Therefore, the protective cardboard 22 falls smoothly in the stacking section 56, and the occurrence of stacking failure is prevented.

As shown in FIG. 34, even when the protective cardboard 22 is displaced in the transport direction, if the amount of the deviation is within a certain range, the protective cardboard 22 is stored in the planographic printing plate It does not run out of 10. Therefore, the movement of the stopper 52 (movement in the direction opposite to the arrow S) due to the urging force of the urging means is not hindered, and the stopper 52 always advances to a predetermined position. Therefore, the lithographic printing plate 10 is always aligned at the same position on the edges.

The value L3 of the dimensional difference between the length L1 of the long side of the planographic printing plate 10 and the length L2 of the long side of the protective cardboard 22 is shown.
(L3 = L1−L2) and the value W3 (W3 = W1−W2) of the dimensional difference between the short side length W1 of the planographic printing plate 10 and the short side length W2 of the protective cardboard 22 are not particularly limited. In order to achieve the above-described effects, it is preferable that the thickness is large. However, if it is too large (that is, if the protection cardboard 22 is extremely small with respect to the lithographic printing plate 10), the protection cardboard 22 rotates in the surface direction during stacking. There is a risk of doing it. Also,
In places where the protective cardboard 22 is disposed between the lithographic printing plates 10, the protective cardboard 22 is placed near the edges of the lithographic printing plate 10.
Therefore, there is a possibility that the planographic printing plates 10 are curved in a direction approaching each other, and the planographic printing plates 10 are bent. Therefore, in order to eliminate these inconveniences, the above-mentioned dimensional difference values L3 and W3 are preferably set to 20 mm or less, more preferably 10 mm or less. In particular, if the thickness is set to 3.5 mm or less, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be more effectively prevented.

The lower limits of L3 and W3 are not particularly limited. Even if the protective cardboard 22 is formed slightly smaller than the lithographic printing plate 10, the effects of the present invention can be obtained. Considering that the protective cardboard 22 is stretched due to the temperature change, the thickness is preferably 0.5 mm or more. That is, when the lower limit value is set to 0.5 mm in this manner, the protection cardboard 22 may change due to a change in ambient humidity or the like.
, It is possible to maintain a smaller state in plan view than the planographic printing plate 10.

As described above, the protective cardboard 22 may be provided with a moisture-proof layer (for example, a low-density layer) if necessary to prevent the moisture contained in the protective cardboard 22 from deteriorating the coating film. A protective cardboard 22 provided with a layer of polyethylene (LDPE) may be used, but such a moisture-proof layer is not adhered to the cardboard body of the protective cardboard, but is formed separately (moistureproof). This makes it easy to discard the protective cardboard 22 and recover resources, and it is not necessary to use a specially processed cardboard. Furthermore, when the lithographic printing plate packaging structure of the present invention is constructed, it can be constructed at a low cost, and a non-stretched polypropylene film or the like can be used as the moisture-proof sheet material.

Further, when the moisture-proof material thus separated is disposed between the slip sheet 14 and the protective cardboard 22, it can be compared with the protective cardboard 22 in which low-density polyethylene is directly laminated on the cardboard main body. Thus, warping due to moisture absorption and release of the cardboard can be prevented.

The moisture permeability of the moisture-proof layer was 10 (g / m ²
· 24h) is set to lower than or equal to, water will not penetrate into the interleaf paper, since the coated layer of the lithographic printing plate is not affected even when stored for a long period of time, preferably, from this point of view, 5 (g / m ²
-24h) If it is less than or equal to the above, even if it is a lithographic printing plate of a type that is particularly susceptible to moisture, it is possible to suppress a decrease in quality, which is more preferable. In particular, in the case of a moisture-proof layer that satisfies the condition of moisture permeability, moisture hardly permeates. Therefore, even when this moisture-proof layer is applied to the thick paper interleaf paper side, warpage of the thick paper can be suppressed. In addition, the moisture barrier is a concept including an aluminum foil and a resin film. Further, the moisture-proof layer may be a moisture-proof agent adhered to the interleaf paper 14 side of the cardboard main body or melt-fixed with a resin or the like.

Of course, a moisture-proof layer may be provided on both sides of the cardboard main body, whereby warpage due to moisture absorption and release can be more reliably prevented.

Next, the specific structure of the moisture-proof sheet material will be described in more detail.

FIG. 35 shows a laminated bundle 12 of lithographic printing plates 10 constituted by using a moisture-proof sheet 30 as an example of the above-mentioned moisture-proof layer. This moisture-proof sheet 30 is made of a 30 μm-thick unstretched polypropylene film.

Also, the protective cardboard 22 used here was used.
Has a density of 0.7 g / cm ³ or more, and the density is adjusted by adjusting the blending amount of the raw paper and pulp, adjusting the freeness, adjusting the pressing pressure, adjusting the calender pressure, and the like. As the stock used for the protective cardboard 22, wood pulp, natural fibers such as hemp, synthetic pulp obtained from a linear polymer such as polyolefin, and regenerated cellulose are used alone or in combination.

On the other hand, the interleaf paper 14 was made from a 100% bleached hardwood kraft pulp, and had a basis weight of 30%.
g / m ² , a density of 0.8 g / cm ³ , a water content of 4.5%, a Beck smoothness of about 500 seconds, and a pH of 5.5.

The method of measuring the water vapor transmission rate is JISZ0
According to 208, the moisture permeability refers to the amount of water vapor that passes through a unit area of the membrane material in a certain time, and in this test,
At a temperature of 25 ° C., the moisture-proof sheet 30 was used as a boundary surface, the air on one side was kept at 90% relative humidity, and the air on the other side was kept dry.

[0384]

[Table 12]

In Table 12, “○” means that no problem or inconvenience occurred, and “△” means that there is a little effect than “○” but that there is no problem in practical use. Indicates that practical problems may cause some problems.

As can be seen from Table 12, the moisture-proof sheet 30
Is used, as shown in case 43 of Table 12,
The mass per 1 m ^{2 of} the water vapor passing through the interface at the time was 10 (moisture permeability: g / m ² · 24 h). Moisture permeability 1
0 g / m ² · 24 h did not affect the image forming surface of the lithographic printing plate 10, and the protective cardboard 22 was not warped, and no problem was found.

Further, a sheet obtained by laminating a moisture-proof sheet 30 (a non-stretched polypropylene film having a thickness of 30 μm) with a LDPE 32 having a thickness of 13 μm on the side of the interleaf paper 14 of the protective cardboard 22 was used (see FIG. 36). This result is shown in Table 1.
As shown in Case 44 of No. ² , the water vapor transmission rate is 9 g / m ² · 2
4h, there is no effect on the image forming surface of the lithographic printing plate 10,
Although the protective cardboard 22 was slightly warped, there was no practical problem.

Also, a thickness of 7 μm
Of aluminum foil 34, 13μm thick LDPE3
2 was used (see FIG. 37). As shown in the case 45 in Table 12, the results show that the moisture permeability was 0.1 g / m ² · 24 h, the image forming surface of the lithographic printing plate 10 was not affected, and the protective cardboard 22 was slightly warped. Although it occurred, there was no problem in practical use.

Although the aluminum foil 34 is configured to be adhered with vinyl acetate-based glue, LDP is used instead of this glue.
A configuration in which an aluminum foil is laminated by E32, or another general paste or adhesive may be used instead of the laminate.

Further, the protective cardboard for the case 45 described above.
The outer surface of 22 (the side opposite to the image forming surface 10P) has a thickness of 13
What was laminated with μm LDPE32 was used
(See FIG. 38). This result is shown in case 46 of Table 1.
As shown, the moisture permeability is 0.1 g / m ^Two・ Lithographic printing in 24h
There is no effect on the image forming surface of plate 10. Also, protective cardboard
By laminating on both sides, moisture absorption and release
The protection cardboard 22 was prevented from warping.

In Table 12, the case 47 using the protective cardboard 22 provided with no moisture-proof layer was used.
The case 49 which was laminated with 0 μm LDPE was used.
What uses what laminated | stacked with LDPE of 0 micrometer is described.

As is clear from Table 12, in case 47, the moisture permeability was infinite and greatly affected the image forming surface, but no warping occurred. In case 48, the moisture permeability is 13 g / m ² · 24 h, and the lithographic printing plate 10
Had a significant effect on the image forming surface. In addition, Case 4
In No. 9, the moisture permeability was 13 g / m ² · 24 h, which greatly affected the image forming surface of the lithographic printing plate 10, but no warpage occurred.

As described above, when the moisture permeability is 10 g / m ² · 24
By providing a moisture-proof layer of h or less, the quality of the image forming surface 10P can be maintained even when the lithographic printing plate 10 is stored for a long period of time.

Further, the use of the protective cardboard 22 having a pH of 7.0 or less can prevent the lithographic printing plate 10 from deteriorating the so-called printing property. The print-out property refers to a contrast (ΔD) between an exposed portion and an unexposed portion of the lithographic printing plate 10.
In the case of using a paper made of waste paper as the lithographic printing plate 2, even if the lithographic printing plate 10 has good printing properties, the lithographic printing plate which is located near the protective cardboard 22 when packed and stored for several months is used. The printing property of the printing plate 10 may be deteriorated.

Since the deterioration of the print-out property is considered to be caused by the ammonia gas, the use of the protective cardboard 22 having a pH of 7.0 or less suppresses the generation of the ammonia gas and reduces the print-out property. Degradation can be prevented. That is,
Generally, paperboard made from waste paper has a pH of 8.0 or more, and since the used paper contains polyacrylamide used as a paper-strengthening material, a drainage material, etc., paperboard made from waste paper is used. Also contains polyacrylamide. Since this polyacrylamide is decomposed under alkali to generate ammonia gas, the ammonia gas neutralizes the acid generated from the coating film (photosensitive layer or heat-sensitive layer) of the lithographic printing plate at the time of exposure. In addition, acid required for dye fading is consumed, so that baking out may occur. Therefore, by setting the pH to 7.0 or less, even if polyacrylamide is present in the protective cardboard 22, no ammonia gas is generated from the polyacrylamide, and the generation of ammonia gas is prevented and the baking property is reduced. Deterioration can also be prevented. The protective cardboard 22 preferably has a PH of 6.0 or less, more preferably 5.0 or less. In particular, the temperature in summer is high (30 ° C
As described above, the pH is preferably adjusted to 5.0 or less, since the generation of ammonia gas of polyacrylamide increases in a high temperature region such as a tropical region or the like.

In order to adjust the pH of the protective cardboard 22 to 7.0 or less, there are a method of adding an acid or sulfuric acid band in a paper making process, a method of applying an acid to the surface of the protective cardboard 22 and the like.

[0397] The used paper used as the raw material of the protective cardboard 22 is not particularly limited, and newspapers, magazines, advertising papers, ground certificates, cardboards and the like can be used.

Hereinafter, the relationship between the PH of the protective cardboard 22 and the printability of the lithographic printing plate 10 will be described with reference to specific substance names (material names) and numerical values.

(Cases 50 to 54) Lithographic printing plate 10 (Fuji Photo Film positive plate FPQ-
The laminated bundle 12 of J) was constructed, and the interior was covered with the interior material 16 to constitute a planographic printing plate packaging structure. Specifically, the slip sheet 14
Is composed of wood pulp and synthetic pulp. Thirty lithographic printing plates 10 are stacked via the interleaving paper 14, protective cardboards 22 are arranged on both end surfaces thereof, and a liner paper, a polyethylene film and aluminum The interior was decorated with interior paper 16 made of foil.

[0400] As the protective cardboard for the cases 50 to 53, those shown in Table 13 were used. In Cases 1 and 2, the pH was adjusted to 7.0 or less by adjusting the amount of the sulfuric acid band in the papermaking process.

The packaging structure of the lithographic printing plate 10 is set at 45 ° C. /
After being placed in a 75% thermostat for 2 weeks, a printing test of the first lithographic printing plate 10 immediately below the protective cardboard was performed. Table 13 shows the results.

[0402]

[Table 13]

The details of the test were as follows.

PH measurement method: 1 g of a sample was cut into small pieces, placed in 70 g of distilled water, stirred for 3 hours, and then stirred at a glass electrode.
Measure the pH at ° C.

Print-out test: <Exposure conditions> Exposure machine: Metal halide lamp idle fin 3000 (manufactured by Eye Graphic Service Co., Ltd.) Distance: 90 cm Exposure: 42 counts <Density measurement> Densitometer: Macbeth RD918 visual color filter Use <Visual evaluation> ：: The image after exposure is good X: The image after exposure is not visible (Case 55 to Case 57) As a protective cardboard, a 20% aqueous solution of acid is applied to the front and back of a cardboard made from waste paper and naturally dried. What was used was used. Details of the acid are shown in Table 14.
Other configurations are the same as those of the case 50 described above. Table 2 shows the results.

[0406]

[Table 14]

PH measurement method: The same as in Table 13 above. Bakeout test: Same as in Table 13 above.

As can be seen from Tables 13 and 14, PH
Is approximately 7.0 or less (case 50, case 51, case 54, case 55, and case 56), the printing property is good, but if PH is less than 7.0 (case 52, In the case 53 and the case 57), the print-out property is deteriorated.

Also, as the protective cardboard 22, a density of 0.7
The use of the lithographic printing plate 10 of 0 g / cm ³ or more makes it possible to prevent the lithographic printing plate 10 from being bent.

That is, as shown in FIG. 40, when the lithographic printing plate 10 is manufactured, a lithographic printing plate having a size larger than a specified size is prepared, and the lithographic printing plate and
A stack of lithographic printing plates 10 is formed by laminating about two sheets, and protective cardboard 22 is disposed on the upper and lower end surfaces of the stack 12. Then, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 40, three stacked bundles 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 are superposed,
In a method as disclosed in, for example, US Pat.
The four sides of the three bundles of the lithographic printing plate 10 are cut so as to have prescribed dimensions (for example, 650 × 550 mm) as shown by solid lines in FIG. That is, from the upper end surface, the protective cardboard 22, the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10, the protective cardboard 22,
Protective cardboard 22, laminated stack 12 of lithographic printing plate 10, protective cardboard 22, protective cardboard 22, laminated bundle 1 of lithographic printing plate 10
2. The layer structure is made of the protective cardboard 22. In this state, the cutting blade 6 is pressed from above to cut the sheet.

[0411] However, when the lithographic printing plate 10 is cut by the method described above, as shown by the solid line in FIG.
The side edge A of the planographic printing plate 10 located on the upper surface of the protective cardboard 22 where the cutting blade 6 abuts may be bent downward. And the appearance was spoiled by this broken part. It is considered that this is because the planographic printing plate 10 is also bent following the bending of the protective cardboard 22 at the time of cutting. The density of the protective cardboard 22 is 0.70 g / cm.
^{When the number is 3} or more, the lithographic printing plate 10 is within an allowable range. Note that the density of the protective cardboard 22 is preferably 0.72 g / cm ³ or more, and more preferably 0.1 kg / cm ³ or more.
It is 75 g / cm ³ or more.

[0412] The density of the protective cardboard 22 is adjusted by adjusting the blending amounts of the raw waste paper and pulp, adjusting the freeness, adjusting the press pressure, the calender pressure, and the like.

In this case, as the stock used for the protective cardboard 22, natural fibers such as wood pulp and hemp, synthetic pulp obtained from a linear polymer such as polyolefin, and regenerated cellulose are used alone or in combination. be able to. Also,
The protective cardboard 22 may be formed of a single cardboard or may be formed by bonding two or more sheets of paper.

[0414] Various additives used in papermaking can be added to the protective cardboard 22. Such additives include, for example, fillers such as clay, talc, titanium white, etc., melamine resins, polyamide resins, wet strength improvers such as polyamine chlorohydrin resin, starch, and dry strength improvers such as polyacrylamide. There are agents.

As a means for cutting the lithographic printing plate 10 sandwiched between the protective cardboards 22 of the present invention, there are a method by pushing one blade, a method by pushing the upper blade with both upper and lower blades, and the like.

As the support for the lithographic printing plate 10, there are copper, steel, zinc, magnesium and the like in addition to aluminum as described above. The protective cardboard 22 is provided so as to sandwich the stacked body between the upper and lower end surfaces of the stacked planographic printing plates 10, and an interleaving paper for protecting the image forming surface 10 </ b> P between the planographic printing plates 10. 14 may be arranged.

Hereinafter, the relationship between the density of the protective cardboard 22 and the amount of breakage of the lithographic printing plate 10 will be described with reference to specific substance names (material names) and numerical values.

(Case 58) The raw waste paper was beaten and 4%
0.1% of the weight of the cardboard,
Add paper strength agent to 0.2% of cardboard weight,
Aluminum sulfate was added until pH 5.0. this
Papermaking using paper stock, density 0.72g / cm ^Three, Basis weight 6
40g / m^TwoWas prepared.

(Case 59) Protective cardboard 2 for case 58
2. Liner paper is stuck on the front and back surfaces of No. 2, and the basis weight is 1020 g /
Example 2 is the same as Example 1 except that m ² and the density are set to 0.80 g / cm ³ .

(Case 60) A density of 0.64 g / c
The case is the same as the case 58 except that m ³ and the basis weight are 620 g / m ² .

(Case 61) A density of 0.67 g / c
The case is the same as the case 59 except that m ³ and the basis weight are 1040 g / m ² .

(Cutability Test) The lithographic printing plate 10 is a commercially available lithographic printing plate 10 obtained by applying a diazo resin to an aluminum plate having a thickness of 0.3 mm and a size of 750 mm × 650 mm.
Was used. The lithographic printing plate 10 and the interleaf 14 are alternately arranged for 5
0 sheets are stacked to form a stacked bundle 12 of lithographic printing plates 10,
Protective cardboard 22 was superposed on the upper and lower end surfaces of the stacked bundle 12 to form one bundle.

[0423] These are stacked in three bundles, and 750 mm x 650
From the original size of 4 mm, four sides were cut by a cutting machine with ear loss of 50 mm on each side to prepare a sample of 650 mm × 550 mm.

Then, in this sample, the amount of bending of the peripheral portion of the lithographic printing plate 10 immediately above the protective cardboard 22 was measured. As shown in FIG. 41, the amount of breakage of the lithographic printing plate 1
0 is the length 1 from the lower surface a to the peripheral portion b. Table 15 shows the results.

[0425]

[Table 15]

As can be seen from Table 15, in case 58 and case 59, the lithographic printing plate has a small amount of breakage,
Substantially within the allowable range. On the other hand, in the case 60 and the case 61, the bent amount of the lithographic printing plate is relatively large, and may exceed the allowable range.

(Various Aspects of Interior Structure Using Interior Paper 16) Next, various aspects of the interior structure using interior paper 16 according to the present embodiment will be described.

As described above, since the protective cardboard 22 itself contains moisture, the moisture may deteriorate the coating film depending on the characteristics of the coating film forming the image forming surface. is there. Therefore, if necessary, a protective cardboard having a moisture-proof layer formed by laminating a resin having low moisture permeability such as low density polyethylene (LDPE) on the protective cardboard is used. However, when the resin is laminated on the protective cardboard as described above, disposal or recycling is difficult or impossible, or the cost is increased.

On the other hand, by employing the interior structure 31 shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be solved.

As shown in FIG. 42, in this packaging structure 31, for example, the stacked bundle 1 having the same configuration as that described above is provided.
42, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), is covered with an interior paper 16 having a light-shielding property and a moisture-proof property. Thereby, the laminated bundle 12 is installed so as to be completely shielded from the outside, and the laminated bundle 12 can be surely shielded from light and moisture-proof. In this example, the material of the interior paper 16 is thus
There is no particular limitation as long as it is possible to completely shield the package 2 from the outside, but for example, it can be made of a single rectangular unbleached kraft paper having a predetermined size.

The shape and interior structure (how to fold the interior paper) of the interior paper 16 are not particularly limited as long as the laminated bundle 12 can be moisture-proof and light-shielded. For example, in the example shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 42A, the length of the long side 16L is such that the bundle 12 is placed substantially at the center of the interior paper 16 so that the long side 12L of the bundle 12 and the short side 16S of the interior paper 16 are parallel to each other. As shown in FIG. 42 (B), the interior paper 16 is folded along the long side 12L of the bundle 12 from both sides.
6 has a predetermined length such that the vicinity of the short side 16S partially overlaps. At this time, since the interior paper 16 has a flat tubular shape, the interior paper 16 projects in a tubular shape from each of the short sides 12S of the stacked bundle 12. Hereinafter, this portion is referred to as an overhang portion 16H.

Also, the length of the short side 16S of the interior paper 16 is
In a state where the vicinity of the short side 16S partially overlaps (see FIG. 42B), when the protective cardboard 22 is arranged from above and the overhang portion 16H is folded, the protective cardboard 22 and the protective cardboard 22 are extended. The predetermined length is set so that the portion 16H partially overlaps (see FIG. 42C). In this way, the bundle 12 is covered with the interior paper 16 by covering the entire surface of the bundle 12 with the interior paper 16.

In the example shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the protective cardboard 22 is formed to have a size substantially equal to the upper surface (or the lower surface) of the stacked bundle 12, and the lithographic printing plate 10 constituting the stacked bundle 12 is curved. In addition, deformation and damage due to external force are prevented.

As the protection cardboard 22, one having substantially the same configuration as that described above can be employed. That is, wood pulp,
Natural fiber such as hemp, synthetic pulp obtained from linear polymer such as polyolefin, regenerated cellulose, etc. used alone or as a mixture, basis weight 200 to 1500 g
/ M ² , density 0.7-0.85 g / cm ³ , moisture 4-6
%, A Beck smoothness of 3 to 20 seconds, and a pH of 4 to 6 can be used, but the present invention is not limited to this. In particular, by selecting low-cost materials such as wood pulp and natural fiber, the protective cardboard 22 can be manufactured at low cost. More specifically, for example, raw material waste paper is beaten, and a sizing agent is added to a stock material diluted to a concentration of 4% so that the sizing agent becomes 0.1% of the cardboard weight and the paper strength agent becomes 0.2% of the cardboard weight. In addition, a density of 0.72 g / g was obtained by making paper using a stock to which aluminum sulfate was further added until the pH became 5.0.
The protective cardboard 32 having a cm ³ and a basis weight of 640 g / m ² can be exemplified, but is not limited thereto.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), before folding the overhanging portion 16H of the interior paper 16, the stacked bundle 12
42 (that is, on a portion near the short side 16S of the interior paper 16), and as shown in FIG. 42 (C), the protective cardboard 22 is covered from above, Fold out part 16H.

[0436] Finally, the overhanging portion 1 is
6H and the protective cardboard 22 are attached at predetermined positions. As a result, the interior paper 16 is fixed so as not to be inadvertently spread or fall off, and the protective cardboard 22 is fixed to the interior paper 16 to form the planographic printing plate packaging structure 18 of the present invention.

Since the lithographic printing plate 10 has a thin plate shape, if the corners or sides are scratched or deformed, an image is blurred when developed or the ink becomes uneven when printed. Etc. may occur. In the present embodiment, the protective cardboard 22 is arranged to face the lithographic printing plate 10 and
, The lithographic printing plate 10 is protected, and the occurrence of scratches and deformation during handling is reliably prevented.

[0438] Further, the interior paper 1 having a light-shielding property and a moisture-proof property is provided.
6, the laminated bundle 12 is completely covered and shielded from the outside, so that the lithographic printing plate 10 constituting the laminated bundle 12 is reliably shielded from light and protected from moisture.

As can be seen from FIGS. 43 and 44, a protective cardboard 22 is disposed outside the interior paper 16 that completely covers the stacked bundle 12, and the protective cardboard 22 is formed of the lithographic printing plate 10. Not in direct contact with the coating film. For this reason, the moisture of the protective cardboard 22 has no direct or indirect effect on the coating film of the planographic printing plate 10.
In addition, moisture in the air does not affect the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10 at all. Therefore, deterioration of the coating film is reliably prevented, and the lithographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a constant quality.

Further, in order to prevent the moisture of the protective cardboard 22 from affecting the coating film, there is no need to laminate a moisture-proof resin (such as low-density polyethylene) on the protective cardboard 22. Therefore, the protection cardboard 22 can be easily discarded. In addition, the protection cardboard 22 can be collected and recycled as a resource. In addition, the protective cardboard 22 is inexpensive, and the planographic printing plate 10 can be installed at low cost.

If there is no possibility that the protective cardboard 22 and the interior paper 16 are displaced from each other, the protective cardboard 22 is not necessarily fixed by an adhesive tape 24 or the like.
Although it is not necessary to fix the lithographic printing plate 6 to the lithographic printing plate 10, the protective cardboard 22 is held at a fixed position with respect to the stacked bundle 12 by fixing. Further, since the interior paper 16 is held at a fixed position with respect to the protective cardboard 22, the interior paper 16 is maintained in a state capable of exhibiting a moisture-proof effect.

In place of the interior structure shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, an interior structure 33 shown in FIGS. 45 to 47 may be used.
In the example shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, each member has the same configuration as that shown in FIGS. 42 to 44.
2 is different.

In other words, in the interior structure 32 shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, the overhanging portion 16H of the interior paper 16 is folded without placing the protection cardboard 22 above the stacked bundle 12, and the protection cardboard 22 is It is arranged below the stacked bundle 12 (more strictly, further below the interior paper 16 positioned below the stacked bundle 12). Then, in addition to the location of the first embodiment, the adhesive tape 22 is attached at a predetermined location on the long side 12L side of the laminated bundle 12 (one location may be used, but a plurality of locations are preferable to increase the fixing strength). The protective cardboard 22 is fixed to the interior paper 16.

In the interior structure having such a configuration, similarly to the interior structure shown in FIGS.
Since the protective cardboard 22 is disposed outside the interior paper 16 that completely covers the lithographic printing plate 2,
The moisture of the protective cardboard 22 has no direct or indirect effect, and the moisture in the air has no effect on the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10. Therefore, deterioration of the coating film is reliably prevented, and the lithographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a constant quality.

Moreover, since it is not necessary to laminate a moisture-proof resin on the protective cardboard 22 unlike the conventional case, the protective cardboard 22 can be easily disposed of, and can be collected and recycled as a resource. In addition, the protective cardboard 22 is inexpensive, and the planographic printing plate 10 can be installed at low cost.

[0446] The interior structure 35 shown in Fig. 48 may be employed. In the interior structure 35 of FIG. 48, FIGS.
And the members shown in FIGS. 45 to 47 have the same configuration, but use two protective cardboards 22.

That is, in the interior structure 35 shown in FIG. 48, similar to the interior structure shown in FIGS.
The overhanging portion 16H of FIG.
Similar to the interior structure shown in FIG. 7, another protective cardboard 22 is disposed below the stacked bundle 12. Then, the adhesive tape 22 is adhered at a predetermined location (one location may be used, but a plurality of locations are preferable to increase the fixing strength) on the long side 12L side of the laminated bundle 12, and the two protective cardboards 22 are provided inside. Paper 1
It is fixed to 6.

In the interior structure 35 having such a structure, the interior structure 31 shown in FIGS.
47, since the protective cardboard 22 is disposed outside the interior paper 16 that completely covers the stacked bundle 12, the protective cardboard 22 is applied to the coating film of the planographic printing plate 10.
Does not have any effect directly or indirectly, and the moisture in the air has no effect on the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10. Therefore, deterioration of the coating film is reliably prevented, and the lithographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a constant quality.

In addition, the interior structure shown in FIGS.
5 compared with the interior structure of FIG.
Since the two are arranged, it is possible to more reliably prevent the lithographic printing plate 10 from being deformed or damaged.

Moreover, since it is not necessary to laminate a moisture-proof resin on the protective cardboard 22 unlike the conventional case, the protective cardboard 22 can be easily disposed of, and can be collected and recycled as a resource. In addition, the protective cardboard 22 is inexpensive, and the planographic printing plate packaging structure 18 can be configured at low cost.

Further, an interior structure 39 shown in FIG. 49 may be used. In the interior structure 39 of FIG. 49, similar to the interior structure 35 shown in FIG. 48, two protective cardboards 22 are used.
The arrangement of the upper protective cardboard 22 is different.

In other words, in the interior structure 39 of FIG. 49, after the overhang 16H of the interior paper 16 is folded, the overhang 16H
From above, the upper protective cardboard 22 is arranged. Then, like the interior structure 35 of FIG. 48, the two protective cardboards 22 are fixed to the interior paper 16 by the adhesive tape 24.

As described above, even in the interior structure 39 of FIG. 49 in which the protective cardboard 22 is disposed further outside the overhang 16H, the same effect as the interior structure 35 of FIG. 48 can be obtained.

[0454] The interior structure 3 shown in Figs.
In 1, similarly to the interior structure 39 shown in FIG. 49, the protective cardboard 22 may be arranged from above the overhang 16H. In short, if the protective cardboard 22 is arranged outside the interior paper 16, it is possible to prevent the moisture of the protective cardboard 22 from affecting the coating film of the planographic printing plate 10.

Also, the position of the adhesive tape 24 for fixing the protective cardboard 22 to the interior paper 16 is not limited to the above. For example, the interior structure 3 shown in FIGS.
3, as shown in FIG.
The adhesive tape 24 may be attached and fixed at a position on the 2S side (see FIG. 42A). In short, the interior structures 31, 3
In any of 3, 35, and 39, the protective cardboard 22 may be fixed to the interior paper 16.

In addition, as long as the protective thick paper 22 can be fixed to the interior paper 16 without being limited to the adhesive tape 24, it can be applied as a fixing means. Examples of such fixing means include bonding means such as hot melt and glue. Further, a belt, a band, or the like that is integrally wound around the protective cardboard 22 and the interior paper 16 from the outside can be applied. When the adhesive tape 24 is used as in each of the above-described embodiments, it is easy to fix and release the protection cardboard 22 to the interior paper 16.

The planographic printing plate packaging structure (interior high-rise) 18, 20,
30 and 39 may be further exteriorized by a packaging box or loaded on a pallet or skid. These packaging boxes, pallets and skits may be made of cardboard, wooden or metal, and the material is not particularly limited.

Table 16 shows the respective lithographic printing plate packaging structures (interior structures) 18, 20, and 3 shown in FIGS.
0, the influence of the moisture of the protective cardboard 22 on the coating film, the disposability of the protective cardboard 22, and the degree of deformation of the planographic printing plate in the conventional interior structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) are shown. I have.

[0459]

[Table 16]

Cases 62 to 64 in Table 16
Correspond to the interior structure 31 shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the interior structure 33 shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, and the interior structure 35 shown in FIG. 48, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 51, the case 65 in Table 16 has the protective bundled paper 22 arranged above and below the laminated bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10, and the interior paper 16 The interior structure includes the cardboard 22. Case 6
52, as shown in FIG. 52, has substantially the same configuration as that of Comparative Example 1, except that the protective cardboard 22 is made of low-density polyethylene 26.
Are laminated so as to form a moisture-proof layer, and are arranged so that the moisture-proof layer is located on the lithographic printing plate 10 side, and the interior is structured with interior paper 16. As shown in FIG. 53, the case 67 has an internal structure in which the protective paperboard 22 is not disposed above and below the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the internal paper 16 is used. In the table, "plate" stands for the lithographic printing plate 10, "thick paper" stands for the protective cardboard 22, and "polyamide cardboard" stands for the protective cardboard laminated with low-density polyethylene.

In the table, “○” means that there is no problem or influence, “僅 か” means that there is a slight problem or effect, but there is no problem in practical use. Although there are slight problems or effects depending on the types of the ten, there is no problem in practical use, and "x" indicates that a problem occurs.

As can be seen from Table 16, in the interior structure 31 (case 62) shown in FIGS. 42 to 44 and the interior structure 33 (case 63) shown in FIGS. The coating film of the printing plate 10 is not affected. Further, since the protective cardboard 22 is not laminated with a moisture-proof resin such as low-density polyethylene, there is no problem regarding the disposability, and recycling is easy. Although the lithographic printing plate 10 may be slightly deformed, there is no problem in practice.

When the workability (easiness of packing) of the packaging operation is compared between the case 62 and the case 63, the case 6
In the interior structure 33 of FIG. 3, after the laminated bundle 12 is wrapped with the interior paper 16, the protective cardboard 22 must be disposed below the interior bundle 16. However, in the interior structure 31 of the case 62, the laminated bundle 12 Since it is only necessary to put the protective cardboard 22 on the top, the packaging operation is easier. FIG.
As can be seen from (C), the protective cardboard 22 is applied to the interior paper 16.
In many cases, the amount (length and fixing location) of the adhesive tape 24 for fixing the adhesive tape 24 to the interior structure 31 of the case 62 may be smaller, and in this respect also, the packaging operation is easier. On the other hand, comparing the operability (easiness of opening) of the opening operation, the interior structure 31 of the case 62 needs to remove the protective cardboard 22 during the opening operation to remove the internal planographic printing plate 10.
Can not be taken out, but the interior structure 3 of the case 63
3, the interior paper 1 is removed without removing the protective cardboard 22.
It is possible to take out the internal planographic printing plate 10 only by opening the opening 6, and in this respect, the opening operation is easier.

In the case 64, there is no influence of moisture of the protective cardboard 22 on the coating film of the planographic printing plate 10, and
There is no problem with the disposability of the waste. In addition, since the two protective cardboards 22 are arranged one above the other, no deformation of the lithographic printing plate 10 occurs.

On the other hand, in the interior structure of the case 65,
Although there is no problem with respect to the disposability of the protective cardboard 22 and the deformation of the lithographic printing plate 10, since the protective cardboard 22 is arranged inside the interior paper 16, the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10 is It can be seen that the sample was affected by the moisture of 22.

In the interior structure of the case 66, the protective cardboard 2
2 is laminated with low-density polyethylene, so that there is no direct influence of the moisture of the protective cardboard 22, but the protective cardboard 22 of Comparative Example 1 is disposed inside the interior paper 16. Since it is the same as the lithographic printing plate packaging structure, the inside of the interior paper 16 is indirectly affected by the moisture of the protective cardboard 22. For this reason, the quality of the coating film of the lithographic printing plate 10 is slightly changed although there is no practical problem. In addition, the lamination of low-density polyethylene makes it difficult to discard the protective cardboard 22 and also makes it difficult to recycle it. In addition, since low-density polyethylene is laminated on the protective cardboard 22, the cost required for packaging increases.

[0468] In the interior structure of the case 67, the protective cardboard 2
2 is not used, so that the protective cardboard 22 is not affected by moisture or difficult to discard, as a matter of course, but the planographic printing plate 10 is deformed.

As described above, by arranging the protective cardboard 22 outside the interior paper 16, the lithographic printing plate 10 can be prevented from being deformed or scratched, and the protective cardboard 22 can be easily discarded. The recycle of the cardboard 22 is also possible. In addition, the cost required for packaging does not increase.

Whether or not the protective cardboard 22 is arranged outside the interior paper 16 in this way is appropriately determined according to the type of the lithographic printing plate 10. That is, the configuration in which the protective cardboard 22 is disposed outside the interior paper 16 is a configuration that is performed when the lithographic printing plate 10 that is susceptible to moisture is wrapped. Edition 1
0, or a protective cardboard 2 inside the interior paper 16.
2 is required, the protective cardboard 22
Is arranged inside the interior paper 16.

As the packaging structure of the lithographic printing plate 10, it is also possible to devise the interior structure of the interior paper 16 so as to satisfy the required light-shielding properties. FIG.
60 to 60 show an example in which a necessary light-shielding property is obtained by an interior structure different from the above-described interior structure (more specifically, how to fold the interior paper 16). In these examples, the laminated bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is packaged by using a cardboard packaging material 201.
The material and physical properties of No. 01 can be appropriately selected according to the type of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the like.

As can be seen from FIG. 54, the packaging material 201 is wound so that the bottom surface of the stacked bundle 12 placed on the packaging material 201 comes into contact with the front surface 12F and the top surface 12U, and is further wrapped around the rear surface 12B. The material 201 has a sufficient length L1 so that both ends in the longitudinal direction of the material 201 can be overlapped. In addition, in the state of being wound around the stacked bundle 12, the width W <b> 1 has a sufficient width such that the ends in the width direction overlap on the outside of the stacked bundle 12.

Therefore, when the packaging material 201 is wound around the laminated bundle 12 as shown by an arrow A in FIG. 54, the longitudinal end of the packaging material 201 is moved to the laminated bundle 1 as shown in FIG.
The overlapping portion 241 is formed by folding over the second rear surface 12B. The overlapping portion 241 is bonded with an adhesive. In addition,
In FIG. 55 (A), in the packaging material 201, the upper protruding portion is folded first, and then the lower protruding portion is folded to form the overlapping portion 22, but this vertical relationship is completely reversed. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), since both ends in the width direction of the packaging material 201 protrude outside the side surface 12S of the stacked bundle 12, this protruding portion is formed as shown in FIG. The polymerized portion 261 is formed by crushing the polymer in the vertical direction and bonding with an adhesive. As a result, the packaging material 201 is arranged on the entire outside of the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10, and all the overlapping portions 2411 and 261 are sealed (in FIGS. 56 and 57, FIG.
5 (B) is a sectional view of the same portion).

[0475] Finally, as shown in FIG. 57, the bonded overlapping portion 261 is bent and bonded along the side surface 12S of the stacked bundle 12, thereby forming a bent portion 281. Thus, the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 30 is configured. In addition,
The bonding means for bonding the packaging material 201 to form the overlapped portions 2411 and 261 is not limited to the above-described adhesive, and for example, an adhesive tape or the like may be used. When these adhesives and pressure-sensitive adhesive tapes are used, the overlapping portions 2411, 26
1 can be easily sealed, which is preferable.

In FIGS. 56 and 57, the stacked bundle 12
Of the packaging material 201 protruding from the side surface 12S, the upper protruding portion is folded toward the lower protruding portion to form the overlapping portion 261. The overlapping portion is folded upward to form the bent portion 281. However, this upper / lower relationship may be completely reversed.

As described above, in the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 30 of the present embodiment, the packaging material 201 is arranged around the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10, and the overlapping portions 2411, 26
Since all of 1 is sealed over the entire outside of the stacked bundle 12 (lithographic printing plate 10), the stacked bundle 12 is completely isolated from the outside. For this reason, external light does not reach the stacked bundle 12 of the packaged lithographic printing plates 10, and the lithographic printing plates 10 are reliably shielded from light, so that so-called light covering does not occur. In particular, in the planographic printing plate packaging structure 30, the bent portion 28
By forming 1, a linear path from the outside to the lithographic printing plate 10 is blocked. Since light has straightness,
By blocking the straight path in this way, external light is less likely to reach the lithographic printing plate 10, and the lithographic printing plate 10 is more reliably shielded from light.

Further, since the planographic printing plate packaging structure 30 itself has a certain light-shielding property, it is not necessary to use a packaging material that is difficult to dispose, such as conventional aluminum kraft paper. That is, as the packaging material 201, a material that can be easily discarded (such as paper, cardboard, or kraft paper having a honeycomb structure described later) such as the above-described cardboard can be used, and the planographic printing plate packaging structure 30 can be formed at low cost. Thus, the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be packaged. In addition, corrugated cardboard, paper having a honeycomb structure (honeycomb structure material), cardboard, kraft paper, etc. can be reused even after use if they meet the required conditions such as strength and rigidity. Can be recycled as waste paper, so that the amount of waste material can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

Also, the planographic printing plate packaging structure 3 of the present embodiment
In the case of 0, the packaging material 201 is arranged in all parts around the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10. For this reason, even if an object hits from outside during transportation or storage, this energy is absorbed by the cardboard. No external force acts on the lithographic printing plate 10, or even if it acts, the external force is weakened (absorbs energy) to such an extent that it does not substantially deform or scratch, so the lithographic printing plate 10 Neither corners, sides, or interior parts are deformed or damaged. For this reason, when the lithographic printing plate 10 packaged by the packaging structure 30 is used after transportation or storage and is developed by exposure to light or heat, an image is blurred or the ink becomes uneven when printed. Does not occur, and a clear image can always be obtained.

In the above description, the planographic printing plate packaging structure 30 in which the light-shielding property is further improved by forming the bent portion 281 has been described as an example.
If sufficient light-shielding properties, heat-insulating properties, and moisture-proof properties can be ensured by sealing the 261, the bent portion 281 may not be formed.

The specific shape of the bent portion 281 is not limited to the above. For example, FIG.
As shown in (5), it may be folded back at the center in the width direction of the overlapping portion 241 to be further polymerized. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the packaging material 2 is so formed that the width of the overlapping portion 241 is sufficiently long.
The width W1 of 01 (see FIG. 54) may be set, and the overlapping portion 241 may be further bent toward the top surface 12U of the stacked bundle 12. In addition, the bent portion 281 does not need to be formed by bending the overlapping portion 241;
As shown in FIG. 8 (C), a bent portion 28 rolled into a roll shape
It may be 1. That is, in any of the bent portions shown in FIG. 58, a linear path from the outside to the lithographic printing plate 10 is blocked between the overlapping portions 241, and the light covering of the lithographic printing plate 10 is more effectively prevented. Is prevented.

The configuration for sealing the overlapping portion 261 is not limited to the above-mentioned adhesive. That is, any material that can securely seal the overlapping portion 261 may be used. For example, the overlapping portion 261 may be fastened with a clip, or a belt may be wound around the entire packaging structure 30 and pressed from the outside to be sealed.
If an adhesive is used, the number of parts increases, or the packaging structure 3
0 is not bulky and has a simple configuration with
1 can be reliably sealed, which is preferable.

FIG. 59 shows the steps of forming a lithographic printing plate packaging structure 40 different from the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 30 in the order of (A) to (C). Hereinafter, FIG.
58, the same components, members, and the like as those shown in FIGS.

The packaging material 42 shown in FIG. 59 is obtained by placing the laminated bundle 12 at substantially the center of the packaging material 42 and winding the packaging material 42 so that both longitudinal sides of the packaging material 42 are in contact with the top surface 12U.
It has a sufficient length L2 so that both ends in the longitudinal direction (a portion near the front end) are overlapped. In addition, in the state of being wound around the stacked bundle 12 as described above, it has a sufficient width W2 so that the ends in the width direction are overlapped outside the stacked bundle 12 as shown in FIG. .

As can be seen from FIG. 59 (A), the packaging material 4
2, both ends in the longitudinal direction (portions overlapping on the top surface 12U)
The thickness T2 is a thin portion 44 which is formed in advance about half the thickness T1 of the packaging material 42 itself. Therefore, FIG.
As shown in (B) and (C), when the thin portions 44 are overlapped and bonded to form the overlapping portion 46, the thickness of the overlapping portion 46 becomes substantially equal to the thickness of the packaging material 42 itself.

The packaging material 20 shown in FIGS.
Similarly to 1, the widthwise end portions of the packaging material 42, that is, the portions protruding outside the side surface 12S of the laminated bundle 12 are polymerized so as to be crushed in the vertical direction, and adhered with an adhesive to form a polymerized portion 48. . Thereby, the lithographic printing plate 10
The packaging material 42 is arranged on the entire outside of the stacked bundle 12, and the overlapping portions 46 and 48 are all sealed.

The planographic printing plate packaging structure 4 shown in FIG.
0, the overlapping portion 48 is connected to the side surface 12S of the stacked bundle 12 as in the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 30 shown in FIGS.
58 and FIG. 58.
A bent portion 281 having a shape shown in (A) to (C) may be formed.

[0488] As described above, in the packaging material 42 shown in FIG.
The portion 6 becomes a thin portion 44 which is thinner than the packaging material 42 itself in advance. Therefore, in the planographic printing plate packaging structure 40, the overlapping portion 46 does not protrude outward. Therefore, for example, when the lithographic printing plate packaging structures 40 are stacked in the thickness direction, the contact area between the lithographic printing plate packaging structures 40 is increased, and the lithographic printing plate packaging structures 40 can be stably handled.

The thickness T2 of the thin portion 44 does not necessarily need to be about half of the thickness T1 of the packaging material 42 itself. For example, even if it is more than half, it is possible to reduce the protrusion of the overlapping portion 46. However, in order to completely eliminate the protrusion, the thickness is preferably equal to or less than half the thickness T1 of the packaging material 42 itself. Further, if the thickness T2 of the thin portion 44 is too thin, the strength of the overlapping portion 46 is reduced in the state where the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 40 is formed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of preventing such a reduction in strength, the thicker is better.
Therefore, considering all of these conditions, the thin portion 44
Is preferably about half the thickness T1 of the packaging material 42 itself.

The configuration for reducing (preferably completely eliminating) the protrusion of the overlapping portion 46 is not necessarily limited to the configuration in which the thin portion 44 is formed on the packaging material 42 in advance. That is, the thin portion 44 is used as the packaging material 42.
Is not formed, and is used to have a uniform thickness, and is compressed in the thickness direction in a state where the overlapping portion 46 is formed as shown in FIG. You may. Further, even when the packaging material 42 having the thin portion 44 is used, the thickness of the overlapping portion 46 may be further reduced by compressing the overlapping portion 46 in the thickness direction in a state where the overlapping portion 46 is formed.

The method of forming the thin portion 44 and the method of forming the thin portion 44
Although the specific configuration is not particularly limited, considering that the packaging material 42 is made of cardboard, for example, the cardboard is partially compressed at the end of the step of manufacturing the cardboard by a cardboard manufacturing apparatus such as a corrugator, and the thin-walled portion 44 can also be formed. Further, the packaging material 42 is formed by bonding a plurality of (for example, two) cardboards, and the thin portion 44 is configured to reduce the number of the cardboards (for example, one). And the thin portion 44 may be a double-faced cardboard (a part of the inner lining and the liner are omitted).

The packaging materials 201 and 42 do not necessarily have to be able to wrap the laminated bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 by one sheet, but may have a structure in which the laminated bundle 12 can be wrapped by a plurality of packaging materials. Good. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, 2
Two sheets of packaging material 321 may be used. In this case, for example, each packaging material 321 is brought into contact with the top surface 12F and the bottom surface of the laminated bundle so as to sandwich the laminated bundle 12 from above and below, and the packaging material 3 protruding from the top surface 12U and the bottom surface.
21 may be polymerized and sealed with an adhesive or the like. Thereby, the lithographic printing plate 10 is shielded from light by the packaging material 32,
Packaged in an insulated and moisture-proof state. If necessary, for example, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 (A) to 58 (C), the overlapping portion may be bent to form a bent portion to further enhance the light shielding property.

As the exterior structure of the lithographic printing plate 10, various configurations other than those described above can be adopted.

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, the work of taking out the lithographic printing plate 10 from the outer packaging material and setting it on the device by considering the orientation of the lithographic printing plate 10 inside the outer packaging material. Sex is raised.

That is, depending on the device in which the lithographic printing plate 10 is used, a lithographic printing plate (single-sided product) having only one surface as an image forming surface may be set on the device with the image forming surface 10P facing downward. is there.

However, if the lithographic printing plate 10 is stored in the packaging box so that the image forming surface 10P faces the opening of the packaging box, the user unpacks the packaging box and then removes the lithographic printing plate 10 from the packaging box. It is necessary to set the device after turning it over, which is a heavy work load. In particular, in order to prevent deformation and film peeling of the lithographic printing plate 10, the user needs to pay close attention to turning the lithographic printing plate 10 and performing operations such as loading the device and reversing the lithographic printing plate. Yes, further increasing the workload.

Therefore, by employing a planographic printing plate packaging structure as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the above-mentioned work load can be reduced (preferably eliminated).

Here, in the planographic printing plate packaging structure of the present embodiment, the shape of the planographic printing plate packaging box 1170 is substantially the same as that shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, as can be seen from FIG. However, it is housed in the lithographic printing plate packaging box 1170 without being wrapped by the wrapping paper 16 shown in FIG. Further, although the protective cardboard 22 is omitted in FIG. 61, it may or may not be provided.

In this lithographic printing plate packaging structure, as shown in FIG. 63, the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 is opposite to the opening (outlet) of the lithographic printing plate packaging box 1170, that is, the bottom plate. The stacked bundle 12 is accommodated so as to face 1172. Therefore, when the lithographic printing plate packaging box 1170 is unwrapped with the top plate 1174 facing upward, the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 faces downward. When the lithographic printing plate 10 is set on a device with the image forming surface 10P facing down, when the lithographic printing plate packaging box 1170 is opened with the top plate 1174 facing up, the image forming surface 10P faces down. The lithographic printing plate 10 can be taken out by the user, so that the user of the lithographic printing plate 10 can directly set the lithographic printing plate 10 on the device without inverting the lithographic printing plate 10 in the taken-out state, thereby reducing the work load. Further, the planographic printing plate 10 is not deformed due to a local external force due to the reversing operation, and the coating film is not peeled off, and the planographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a constant quality.

FIG. 64 shows an example of an automatic plate making machine for making a plate using the lithographic printing plate 10. As shown in FIG.

The automatic plate making machine 420 includes a lithographic printing plate supply device 422, a transport device 424, an exposure device 426, and a developing and fixing device 428. The lithographic printing plate supply device 422 is supported on a support 444 in a transport device 424. The lithographic printing plate supply device 422 is provided with the stacked bundles 12 such that the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 is relatively obliquely downward (the direction facing the support 444).
Is set.

[0502] A suction device 430 is attached to the transport device 424 so as to be able to come in contact with and separate from the stacked bundle 12 of the loaded lithographic printing plates 10 and to be movable in the transport direction (the direction of arrow A). The lithographic printing plates 10 are taken out one by one from the lithographic printing plate supply device 422 by the suction cups 430 and supplied to the exposure device 426.

Further, a sensor (not shown) is attached to the lithographic printing plate supply device 422 so that it can be determined whether the object sucked by the suction cup 430 is the lithographic printing plate 10 or the slip sheet 14. Has become. Sucker 430
Supplies only the lithographic printing plate 10 to the exposure device 426 based on the information from the sensor, and conveys the slip sheet 14 to a paper discharge section 429 provided in the lithographic printing plate supply device 422.

Further, a friction guide 432 is attached to the lithographic printing plate 10 on the downstream side in the transport direction. This friction guide 432 is used when the slip sheet 14 has adhered to the lithographic printing plate 10 sucked by the suction cup 430.
During the transportation of the lithographic printing plate 10, the lithographic printing plate 10 abuts on the slip sheet 14, and the slip sheet 14 can be peeled off from the lithographic printing plate 10 by friction.

The automatic plate making machine 420 having such a configuration
In the planographic printing plate supply device 422, the stacked bundle 12 is set so that the image forming surface 10P of the planographic printing plate 10 is relatively obliquely downward. Therefore, for example, even when the planographic printing plate packaging box 170 in which the stacked bundles 12 are stored is placed horizontally, it is only necessary to raise the stacked bundles 12 at the time of setting, and there is no need to invert the stacked bundles. Alternatively, a lithographic printing plate packaging box 1
If the stack 70 is leaned obliquely, the stacked bundles 12 contained therein are also slanted, so that the stacked bundles 12 are set in the transport device 424 as they are (without further changing or inclining the inclination angle of the stacked bundles 12). Work can be further facilitated.

In a lithographic printing plate processing line for processing (cutting or the like) the aluminum web coated with the coating film to obtain a lithographic printing plate 10 of a desired size, the image forming surface 10P generally faces upward. In this way, the lithographic printing plates 10 are often stacked to form a stacked bundle 12. In this case, for example, the stacking bundle 12 can be inverted by using an inverting device 280 shown in FIG.

In the reversing device 280, the main body 281
A rotatable shaft 282 protrudes around the center line C,
At its tip, a pair of gripping plates 286 are provided via a joint 284. The gripping plates 286 are formed in a parallel plate shape, and move in the direction of arrow Z to come into contact with and separate from each other. Therefore, the stacked bundle 12 formed by stacking the lithographic printing plates 10 so that the image forming surface 10P faces upward is gripped from above and below by the gripping plate 286, and the shaft 2
By rotating the joint portion 284 and the gripping plate 286 around 82, the plurality of planographic printing plates 10 can be inverted by one integrated operation such that the image forming surface 10P faces down. Of course, without using such a reversing device 280, the lithographic printing plates 10 may be reversed one by one and then laminated to form the laminated bundle 12.

The packaging box for constructing the lithographic printing plate packaging structure of the present invention is not necessarily limited to the lithographic printing plate packaging box 170 described above. What is necessary is just a structure provided with the take-out part which takes out the planographic printing plate 10 which comprises the laminated stack 12 accommodated. For example, a lithographic printing plate packaging box 330 having the structure shown in FIG. 66 may be used.

The lithographic printing plate packaging box 330 includes a packaging box body 332, a bottom pad 334 disposed inside the packaging box body 332, a lid plate 336 for closing the opening of the packaging box body 332, It is composed of

As can be seen from FIG. 66, the cover plate 336
Is formed by adhering a lid plate main body 336A and a lid back pad 336B. The back pad 336B is a layered bundle 12
When the lid plate 336 closes the opening of the packaging box main body 332, the lid plate 336 enters the accommodation space 358 described later. On the other hand, the outer circumference of the lid plate main body 336A has a size that matches the outer circumference of the upper surface of the assembled packaging box main body 332.

[0511] The packaging box main body 332 has a bottom plate portion 338 formed larger than the lithographic printing plate 10. Fig. 67
As shown in FIG.
0, a top plate part 342 and inner plate parts 344 and 346 are formed continuously in order. As shown in FIGS. 66 and 68,
In a state where the packaging box main body 332 is assembled, the side plate portion 340,
The top plate portion 342 and the inner plate portions 344 and 346 are sequentially bent at right angles to form a spiral shape, and the core material 348 is accommodated inside the side plate portion 340, the top plate portion 342, and the inner plate portion 344, and the reinforcing portion 350 Is configured. The reinforcing portion 350 reinforces the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330 so that it does not bend or bend carelessly.

[0512] When the packaging box main body 332 is assembled, the opposite surface of the bottom plate portion 338 is open, and this opening portion serves as a take-out portion for putting the stack of bundles 12 into and out of the packaging box main body 332. Become.

[0513] Both ends in the longitudinal direction of the top plate portion 342 are 45 °.
352, so that adjacent top plate portions 342 do not overlap with each other.

[0514] The stacked bundle 12 is accommodated in the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330 configured as described above. In the housed state, the opening of the packaging box main body 332 is closed by the lid plate 336, and the lid plate 336 is further fixed by the fixing means.
Fix to 32. Thus, the stacked bundle 12 is packaged in the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330, and the lithographic printing plate packaging structure of the present embodiment is configured. Note that the cover plate 336 is
There is no particular limitation on the fixing means for fixing to the fixing member 32. For example, an adhesive member such as an adhesive tape or an adhesive can be used. In particular, it is preferable to apply an adhesive tape over the entire circumference of the lid plate 336, because the inside of the planographic printing plate packaging box 330 can be completely shielded from the outside, so that careless exposure of the planographic printing plate 10 can be prevented, which is preferable.

Even when this planographic printing plate packaging box 330 is used, as shown in FIG.
By housing and packaging the lithographic printing plate 10 (laminated bundle 12) such that P faces the bottom plate portion 338, the lithographic printing plate packaging structure of the present invention can be configured. And planographic printing plate 1
The user of No. 0 can directly set the lithographic printing plate 10 on the device without inverting the lithographic printing plate 10 in a taken-out state, thereby reducing the work load. Further, the planographic printing plate 10 is not deformed due to a local external force due to the reversing operation, and the coating film is not peeled off, and the planographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a constant quality.

In order to allow the user of the lithographic printing plate 10 to set the lithographic printing plate 10 directly on the device without inverting the lithographic printing plate 10 in the removed state, the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 must be It is sufficient that the lithographic printing plate packaging box (exterior box) is accommodated and packaged so as to face the side opposite to the opening (take-out section). From this viewpoint, for example, the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 may be accommodated and packaged in a general cardboard box. In this case, the type of the corrugated cardboard box is not particularly limited, and a groove-cut type (code number 0200 to 0216), a telescope type (code number 0300 to 0325), and an assembled type (code number 0401 to 0435) specified in JIS Z1507. , Plug-in type (code numbers 0501 to 0511), bliss type (code numbers 0601 to 0608) and simple assembly type (code numbers 0712 to 0771). However, code numbers 0200, 0422 to 0435, 050
In the formats 1 to 0503 and 0771, since the upper surface of the cardboard box is open, from the viewpoint of protecting the accommodated stacked bundle 12 from external force and shielding and moisture-proof, the other types, that is, the bundle 12 Is preferred to be able to surround the entire surface of the.

[0517] In the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330,
A straight path from the outside to the inside between the butting sides 352 may be blocked to further enhance the light blocking property.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 69, one of the opposing edges 352 is formed with a convex portion 354 projecting in a substantially triangular shape at the end of the top plate portion 342, and the other edge is joined. The concave portion 56 corresponding to the convex portion 354 is formed in 352. As can be seen from FIG. 69 (B), the projection side 354 and the depression side 356 make the butt side 35 a.
2 is non-linear. Thereby, the butt side 3
Even if a slight gap is formed between the two, the straight path is blocked when the gap is viewed from the outside to the inside of the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330. Since the light has rectilinearity, the linear path of the gap is blocked as described above, so that direct invasion of light from the outside to the inside of the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330 is prevented. Further, light passing through the gap between the butt sides of the side plate portions 340 is also reliably blocked because the core member 348 is formed in an L-shape. Therefore, the lithographic printing plate 10 of the stacked bundle 12 accommodated in the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330 is reliably shielded from light and is prevented from being carelessly exposed.

In general, a photosensitive printing plate has a high photosensitivity, and even if exposed to light in a slight visible light wavelength band, a change occurs in the photosensitive layer. It is necessary to shield the light because it becomes uneven. Also, in the heat-sensitive printing plate, the heat-sensitive layer may deteriorate the heat-sensitive layer due to the heat energy of the light or change the sensitivity due to the progress of the reaction. Since the laminated bundle 12 is completely shielded from the outside as described above, deterioration of the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer of the lithographic printing plate 10 is prevented, and the lithographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a constant quality.

[0520] Moreover, the convex portion 354 and the concave portion 356 are formed in the top plate portion 342 (packaging box main body 332) and do not require a special member for shielding the accommodated planographic printing plate 10 from light. The lithographic printing plate packaging box 330 can be manufactured at low cost without increasing the number of components constituting the plate packaging box 330.

The configuration for blocking the light path from the outside to the inside in the non-linear portion, that is, the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330, is not limited to the above-described convex portion 354 and concave portion 356. That is, it is sufficient that the gap formed between the butted sides 352 blocks a straight path when viewed from the outside to the inside of the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330. For example,
As shown in FIG. 70A, the convex portion 354 and the concave portion 356
May be at the center of the butted side 352,
As shown in FIG. 70 (B), the position may be near the side plate portion 340. Further, a plurality of convex portions 354 and concave portions 356 may be provided, or a curved shape may be provided.

[0522] Further, as shown in Fig. 71 (A), a configuration in which a projection 354 is protruded from each of the butting sides 352 may be employed. In the case of such a configuration, the gap 36
0 when viewed from the outside to the inside of the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330, that is, in the direction of the arrow S in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 71 (B), the protruding end 35 of the convex portion 354
Since the vicinity of 4A overlaps and the straight path is blocked, direct invasion of light from the outside to the inside of the lithographic printing plate packaging box 330 is reliably prevented. In other words, it is a necessary and sufficient condition for blocking the straight path that the protrusion 354 has a sufficient protrusion length and shape enough to overlap the protrusion end 354A. In FIGS. 71 (A) and (B), the gap 360 is greatly emphasized for convenience of explanation, but the actual planographic printing plate packaging box 33 is shown.
At zero, the gap 360 is smaller. of course,
Even if a gap as large as shown in FIGS. 71 (A) and (B) is formed, the provision of the non-linear portion of the present invention allows the lithographic printing plate 10 housed and packaged in the lithographic printing plate packaging box 30 to be packaged. Light can be reliably blocked.

FIGS. 72 to 7 show a packaging box according to the present invention.
The lithographic printing plate packaging structure may be configured using the packaging box 510 shown in FIG. FIG. 72 shows the packaging box 510 in an unfolded state, and also shows a laminated bundle 600 provided with the packaging box 510. The pre-installed laminated bundle 600, like the lithographic printing plate packaging structure 18 shown in FIG. 4, alternately laminates the lithographic printing plates 10 and the slip sheets 14, and furthermore, after arranging the protective cardboard 22 on the end face in the laminating direction, It is configured by being decorated with the interior paper 16, and has a width (short side length) W, a depth (long side length) D,
It has a rectangular parallelepiped shape of height H. The photosensitive printing plate is shielded and protected from moisture by the interior paper, and is maintained at a constant quality. I have. FIG. 73 shows this packaging box 51.
FIG. 74 shows a state in which the laminated bundle 600 with the interior is being exteriorized using the reference numeral 0, and FIG.

[0524] The packaging box 510 includes a bottom plate member 512 arranged on the bottom surface 602 side of the installed laminated bundle 600 and a top plate member 51 arranged on the top surface 604 side of the installed laminated bundle 600.
4 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74). Both the bottom plate member 512 and the top plate member 514 are made of cardboard having a thickness T.

[0525] The bottom plate member 512 is
(That is, a rectangular shape in which the length D1 of the long side is substantially equal to the depth D of the laminated bundle 600 and the length W1 of the short side is substantially equal to the width W of the laminated bundle 600). And a bottom plate 516.

[0526] From each side of the bottom plate 516, side plates 18 corresponding to the respective side surfaces 606 of the stacked laminate bundle 600 are formed integrally and continuously. The shape of the side plate 18 is substantially the same as that of each of the side surfaces 606 of the laminated bundle 600 already provided, but the length L1 extending from the bottom plate 516 (in a state where the packaging box 510 is assembled as shown in FIG. 74, This extension length L
1 is the inner height of the packaging box 510) is substantially equal to the length obtained by adding the height H of the stacked laminate bundle 600 and the thickness T of the top plate member 514.

[0527] A sticking plate 520 is further formed continuously from the extended end of the side plate 518. Pasting plate 5
The length of the extension 20 from the side plate 518 is set to a predetermined value so that the extension ends of the opposing attachment plates 520 do not contact or overlap with each other when the packaging box 510 is assembled as shown in FIG. The extension length is L2.

[0528] At the both ends in the width direction of the extending end of the attaching plate 520, cutout portions 522 cut into a triangular shape are formed. In a state where the packaging box 510 is assembled, when the attaching plate 520 is made parallel to the top surface 604 of the laminated stack 600 having the interior, the cutout portions 522 are formed, so that the attaching plates 520 may overlap each other. Not to be. The angle of the notch 522 (the notch 52
The angle formed by 2 and the bending line 526) is not particularly limited as long as the bonding plates 520 do not overlap each other. For example, the angle may be different depending on each cutout 522. In the first embodiment, for example, this angle is set to approximately 45 °. Thereby, in the assembled state of the packaging box 510 (see FIG. 74), the adjacent notches 522 come into linear contact with each other.
0 can be prevented, and the strength is improved.

Bending lines 524 and 526 (indicated by dashed lines in FIG. 72) are provided at the boundary between the bottom plate 516 and the side plate 518 and the boundary between the side plate 518 and the attaching plate 520, respectively. By the bending lines 524 and 526, the boundary between the bottom plate 516 and the side plate 518 and the side plate 518
Can be easily bent. The bending lines 524 and 526 include, for example, processing such as creasing, perforation, and half cutting.
From the viewpoint of maintaining both the strength maintenance of the bottom plate member 512 and the ease of bending, creasing is preferable.

On the other hand, the top plate member 514 has substantially the same shape as the top surface 604 of the built-in laminated bundle 600 (that is, the length D2 of the long side is substantially equal to the depth D of the built-in laminated bundle 600, and the length of the short side is The width W2 is formed in a rectangular shape which is substantially equal to the width W of the laminated stack 600 having the interior. Further, the direction of the corrugated cardboard constituting the top plate member 514 is orthogonal to the direction of the corrugated cardboard of the bottom plate 516 of the top plate member 514 in a state where the packaging box 510 is assembled (see FIG. 74). It has a predetermined orientation. Accordingly, the strength of the packaging box 510 is improved.
When lifting, it is not necessary to consider the direction in which the hand is hung.

[0531] Next, a method of using the packaging box 510 to package the laminated stack 600 with the interior and the operation of the packaging box 510 will be described.

[0532] Laminated bundle 6 already packaged using packaging box 510
In order to package 00, first, as shown in FIG. 72, the bottom plate member 512 is spread in a planar shape (expanded state) so that the bottom surface 602 of the laminated stack 600 having been installed is aligned with the bottom plate 516 without shifting. Then, the laminated stack 600 with the interior is placed on the bottom plate member 512.

[0533] Next, as shown in FIG.
4 is placed on the top surface 604 of the laminated bundle 600 having the interior. Further, the bottom plate member 512 is bent along the bending line 524 so that the side plates 518 are respectively parallel to the side surfaces 606 of the laminated bundle 600 having the interior. When the shape of the laminated stack 600 is exactly the same as the shape of the bottom plate 516, the side plate 518 is in surface contact with the side surface 606, but is not necessarily required to make surface contact, and the side plate 518 is in contact with the side surface 606. May face in parallel with a slight gap.

The extension length L1 of the side plate 518 is substantially equal to the length obtained by adding the height H of the laminated stack 600 and the thickness T of the corrugated cardboard. , Or in contact with the periphery of the top plate member 514 or with a slight gap therebetween. When the top plate member 514 protrudes from the top surface 604 of the laminated stack 600 having the interior, the top plate member 514 is pushed by the side plate 518 and the top surface 604 is pressed.
Of the top plate 514, and the top plate member 514 is moved to the top surface 604.
Are exactly matched without misalignment.

[0535] The top plate member 514 is attached to the laminated bundle
Before placing the bottom plate member 512 along the folding line 524 so as to make the side plate 518 parallel to the side surface 606 of the built-in stacked bundle 600 before placing the top plate member 514 on the built-in May be placed on the top surface 604. In this case, since the vicinity of the extended end of the side plate 518 projects upward from the top surface 604 of the laminated stack 600 having the interior, the top plate member 514 is disposed inside the projected portion, so that the top plate can be easily placed. The member 514 is mounted on the laminated bundle 6
00 top surface 604.

Next, the bottom plate member 512 is bent along the bending line 526.
And the attachment plate 520 is attached to the top plate member 514.
On the upper surface substantially in parallel. Then, as shown in FIG. 74, the adhesive tape 5 extends along the extending end of the attaching plate 520.
28 is attached to the attaching plate 520 and the top plate member 514, and these are fixed. As a result, the packaging box 510 is assembled and, at the same time, the laminated stack 600 with the interior is covered by the packaging box 510, so that the packaging box 510 can be held and transported. Further, in this state, the outer surface of the installed stacked bundle 600 is in contact with the inner surface of the packaging box 510 or faces the inner surface of the packaging box 510 with a predetermined slight gap. Maintain a constant position without displacement. Furthermore, even in the case where foreign matter hits from the outside of the packaging box 510, the photosensitive printing plate constituting the stacked laminate bundle 600 is protected by the packaging box 510, and is not broken or bent.

[0537] In this example, the bent portions when assembling the packaging box 510 are bent lines 524 and 526.
Since only the bent portion is provided, the packaging box 510 can be easily assembled. Also, since there is no need to use a device for bending, the cost is reduced.

Further, the assembled packaging box 510 is
As a whole, the pasting plate 520 only overlaps with the top plate member 514, and other portions do not overlap or have a cylindrical shape. In addition, a gap is formed inside the extension end of the attachment portion 520 (the center of the top surface 604). That is, the extension length (L1 + 2) of the side plate 518 and the attaching plate 520 from each side of the bottom plate 516 is equal to that of the conventional packaging box 110,
Since it is shorter than 140, it is possible to package the laminated stack 600 with a minimum area of corrugated cardboard and to manufacture the packaging box 510 at low cost.

FIG. 75 shows a packaging box 540 different from those shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 in an expanded state.
Further, FIG. 76 shows a state in which the packaged box 540 is being used to exteriorize the laminated stack 600, and FIG.

This packaging box 540 is different from the packaging box 510 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 in the shape of the side plate 548 and the top plate member 544. Hereinafter, the same components, members, and the like as those of the packaging box 510 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

In this packaging box 540, the extension length L3 from the bottom plate 516 to the side plate 548 is substantially equal to the height H of the laminated bundle 600 with the interior. Further, the size of the top plate member 544 is set to a predetermined size so as to be substantially equal to a length obtained by adding twice the thickness T of the cardboard to the top surface 604 (width W, depth D) of the laminated bundle 600 having the interior. (Width W3, depth D3).

In the case of using the packaging box 540 to package the interior-laminated bundle 600, first, as in the case of the packaging box 510 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the bottom plate member 542 is formed into a flat shape (unfolded state). The bottom surface 10 of the unfolded and bundled laminated bundle 600
4 is aligned with the bottom plate 516 of the bottom plate member 542 so that the bottom plate 516 is aligned with the bottom plate 516 without shifting.
Place on 6.

Next, as shown in FIG.
The bottom plate member 542 is bent along 24 to make the side plates 548 parallel to the side surfaces 606 of the stacked bundle 600 having the interior. Further, the bottom plate member 542 is bent along the bending line 526, and the attachment plate 520 is attached to the top surface 6
Make it parallel to 04.

Then, the top plate member 544 is attached to the attaching plate 52.
0, and each side of the top plate member 544 is
To match the outer surface. Finally, as shown in FIG. 77, the adhesive tape 528 is attached to the side plate 518 and the top plate member 544 along the periphery of the top plate member 544, and these are fixed. As a result, the packaging box 540 is assembled, and the laminated stack 600 with the interior is covered by the packaging box 540, so that the packaging box 540 can be held and transported. Further, in this state, since the inner surface of the packaging box 540 is in contact with the inner surface of the laminated bundle 600, the interior laminated bundle 600 does not shift with respect to the packaging box 540. Furthermore, even in the case where foreign matter hits from the outside of the packaging box 540, the photosensitive printing plate constituting the built-in stacked bundle 600 is protected by the packaging box 540, and is not broken or bent.

[0545] In addition, the parts to be folded when assembling the packaging box 540 are only the bending lines 524 and 526, and the packaging box 540 can be easily assembled. Also, there is no need to use a device for bending,
Lower cost. Further, the assembled packaging box 540
Is that, as a whole, the pasting plate 520 only overlaps the top plate member 514, and the extension length (L3 + L2) of the side plate 548 and the pasting plate 520 from each side of the bottom plate 516.
However, since it is shorter than a conventional packaging box, the laminated bundle 600 already provided is covered with corrugated cardboard having a minimum area, and the packaging box 540 can be manufactured at low cost.

The top plate members 514 and 544 and the side plate 51
The position of the adhesive tape 528 when fixing the adhesive tapes 8 and 542 is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a plurality of adhesive tapes 528 cross each other at a substantially central portion or near both ends on the top plate member 514, and both ends are respectively
The adhesive tape 528 is attached to the opposing attaching plate 520 or the side plates 518, 542 (therefore, when the top plate members 514, 544 are viewed from above, the adhesive tape 528 has a “+” shape, a “well” shape, a lattice shape, or the like. In this case, each side of the top plate members 514 and 544 may be fixed by the adhesive tape 528 in at least two places (that is, a “well” shape or a lattice shape). The attachment plate 520 or the side plates 518, 5 of the top plate members 514, 544
Since the wobble to 42 is prevented, it is preferable from the point of the fixing strength. Thus, the adhesive tape 5
For example, as shown in FIG. 78, the central portion in the longitudinal direction of the adhesive tape 528 may be attached across the attaching plate 520 and the top plate member 514 over its width direction (accordingly, as shown in FIG. 78). The adhesive tape 528 substantially extends in the longitudinal direction thereof as shown in FIG. 74), and as shown in FIG.
The central portion in the longitudinal direction of 28 may be attached only to the top plate member 514.

Also, the packaging box 510 of each of the above embodiments,
At 540, the attachment plate 520 is not necessarily required. That is, even without the attaching plate 520, the outer edge portions of the top plate members 514, 544 and the vicinity of the extended ends of the side plates 518, 542 can be directly attached and fixed with the adhesive tape 528. By eliminating the need for the attaching plate 520,
Since the number of cardboards constituting the packaging box is further reduced, the cost is reduced.

In the above description, the bottom plate member 51
2, 542 and the top of the corrugated cardboard constituting the top plate members 514, 544, so that the direction of the center line is perpendicular to each other in a state where the packaging boxes 510, 540 are assembled.
Although the strength of the packaging boxes 510 and 540 has been increased, the direction of the inner lining is not limited to this. That is, the packaging boxes 510, 5
As long as 40 can maintain a predetermined strength in a state in which the laminated bundle 600 with the interior is covered, the directions of the inner linings may be parallel or may intersect.

[0549] The relationship between the direction of the laminated stack 600 having been provided and the direction of the middle of the corrugated cardboard of the bottom plate members 512 and 542 and the top plate members 514 and 544 is not particularly limited. The strength of the corrugated cardboard (corrugated cardboard constituting the bottom plate members 512 and 542) can be determined as appropriate in consideration of the strength of the corrugated cardboard (corrugated cardboard constituting the bottom plate members 512 and 542). That is, as in each of the above-described embodiments, by setting the middle of the cardboard to be parallel to the long side of the bottom surface of the laminated bundle 600 having the interior (see FIGS. 72 and 75), the strength of the bottom plate members 512 and 542 can be increased. Can be higher. On the other hand, by making the middle of the corrugated cardboard parallel to the short side of the bottom surface of the laminated stack 600 having the interior, the length (width in the corrugated cardboard manufacturing process) in the direction perpendicular to the corrugated board flow direction in the corrugating machine is reduced. As a result, the bottom plate members 512, 542 can be formed using a small corrugated machine.
Can be manufactured.

The bottom plate members 512 and 542 and the top plate member 51
4, 544 need not be made of the above-mentioned corrugated cardboard, but may be any type as long as it can protect the interior-equipped laminated bundle 600 from external impacts or the like by externally covering the interior-equipped laminated bundle 600. Conventionally used cardboard, kraft paper, paper-made honeycomb structures, and the like can also be used. From the viewpoint of protecting the installed laminated bundle 600, the outermost members of the bottom plate members 512 and 542 and the top plate members 514 and 544 are large from the outside by using a highly rigid material such as a paper hard board. Even if the energy of the impact acts, it is prevented from being deformed, so that the laminated bundle 600 already provided can be protected more effectively. Similarly,
The innermost members of the bottom plate members 512 and 542 and the top plate members 514 and 544 (members that come into contact with the interior materials constituting the interior-laminated bundle 600) are made of, for example, an elastic material such as foamed resin, thereby causing a large impact. Energy can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the elastic material, and the laminated bundle 600 already provided can be protected more effectively.

Also, by using paper such as cardboard or paper honeycomb structural material, the used packaging boxes 510, 54 can be used.
0 can be easily recycled or discarded, and the packaging boxes 510 and 540 can be manufactured at low cost.
In the case where thick paper is used, the strength of the bottom plate members 512 and 542 may be further increased by setting the direction of the eyes of the paper constituting the thick paper to be parallel to the long side of the bottom surface of the laminated stack 600 having the interior. Can be.

In order to improve the strength of the bottom plate 516 and consequently the strength of the entire packaging boxes 510 and 540, a reinforcing plate having substantially the same shape as the top plate members 514 and 544 is attached to the bottom plate 516. You may. That is, by attaching such a reinforcing plate to the bottom plate 516, the bottom plate 516 and the reinforcing plate are integrated, so that the strength is improved, and the packaging box 510,
The strength of the entire 540 is improved. In particular, when the weight of the laminated stack 600 (packaged object) is large, or when the area of the bottom surface of the laminated bundle 600 is large (the bottom plate 516).
The area of the bottom plate 516 itself is easy to bend because the area of the bottom plate 516 itself is easily bent.) However, since the bottom plate 516 integrated with the reinforcing plate by sticking has improved strength, it can be bent or deformed. Also, the packaging boxes 510 and 540 do not bend or deform.

The method for attaching the reinforcing plate to the bottom plate 516 is not particularly limited. For example, a general adhesive such as a glue, a bond, or a hot melt may be used, or a so-called double-sided tape may be used. You may. Either way,
Since the reinforcing plate is attached to the bottom plate 516, the reinforcing plate does not accidentally shift or separate from the bottom plate 516.

The specific material of the reinforcing plate is not particularly limited. For example, the bottom plate members 512 and 542 and the top plate member 5
When 14, 544 are made of cardboard, the reinforcing plate can be made of the same cardboard. In addition, for example, cardboard, kraft paper, paper-made honeycomb structural material, or the like may be used. When these paper materials are used as the reinforcing plate, the method of graining the reinforcing plate is not particularly limited, but any one of the top plate members 514, 544, the bottom plate 516, and the reinforcing plate may be used. (In the case of corrugated cardboard, the direction of the inner lining) intersects with the others, so that the strength of the entire packaging boxes 510 and 540 can be further increased. Furthermore, by making the direction of the eyes of the bottom plate 516 and the reinforcing plate intersect, the strength of the bottom plate 516 integrated with the reinforcing plate is further improved.
0 and 540 are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of overall strength.

[0555] The reinforcing plate may be attached to the upper surface of the bottom plate 516 (inside the packaging boxes 510 and 540).
16 may be attached to the lower surface (outside the packaging boxes 510 and 540). When attached to the upper surface of the bottom plate 516, the periphery of the reinforcing plate is surrounded by the side plate 518, and the entire reinforcing plate supports the load of the bundle 110 (packaged object).
It is more preferable from the point of strength. Further, the periphery of the reinforcing plate is not visible from the outside of the packaging boxes 510 and 540, so that the appearance is also preferable. On the other hand, in the case of sticking to the lower surface of the bottom plate 516, the reinforcing plate can be stuck even after the laminated stack 600 having been provided inside is packaged by the packaging boxes 510 and 540.

[0556] Bottom plate members 512 and 542 and top plate member 51
When using corrugated cardboard as 4, 544, it is preferable to satisfy the following conditions from the viewpoint of maintaining a constant strength.

First, the corrugated cardboard (flute) is named BA flute, AB flute, A flute, C flute, and B flute. Also, taking a grade table liner and the back liner cardboard preferred order, AA grade, A grade, B grade, C class, as the basis weight of the front liner and the back liner, 160 (g / m ²⁾ or more 340 (g / m ² ) or less. When the types of corrugated medium shin are listed in order of preference, reinforced medium shin, A class, B class,
It is C class, and the basis weight of the medium shin is 115 (g /
m ² ) or more and 280 (g / m ² ) or less.

As an example, kraft paper having a basis weight of 280 g / m ² is used as a front liner and a back liner, and semi-chemical pulp having a basis weight of 125 g / m ² is used as a middle layer. The bottom plate members 512 and 42 and the top plate members 514 and 44 can be constituted by the corrugated cardboard.

In the case where a honeycomb structural material is used in place of the corrugated cardboard, it is preferable to use the same front liner, back liner, and hollow as the above-mentioned corrugated cardboard.

When cardboard is used instead of cardboard, the basis weight is 600 (g / m ² ) or more and 2000 (g / m ² ).
/ M ² ) or less.

It is not necessary that one piece of protective cardboard be substantially the same size as a lithographic printing plate. That is, even if the size is smaller than the lithographic printing plate, it can be used as a lithographic printing plate with approximately the same size by attaching protective cardboard. For example, as shown in FIG. 80A, thick paper 530 of a size obtained by dividing a lithographic printing plate into two is prepared in advance, and
30 may be laminated to form a protective cardboard of a required size, or as shown in FIG. 80 (B), a cardboard 532 of a size obtained by dividing a lithographic printing plate into four parts in a “ta” shape may be used. The cardboard 532 may be prepared in advance, and the cardboard 532 may be attached to form a cardboard for protection of a required size.

The method of attaching the thick papers 530 or 532 to each other is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIGS. 80 (A), 80 (B) and 80 (C), they are attached using an adhesive tape 534. be able to. In this case, for example, the side of the side where the thick paper 530 (or the thick paper 532) is in contact is continuously bonded so that this side and the adhesive tape 534 are parallel to each other, and the vicinity of both ends of the adhesive tape 534 is the thick paper 530 (or the thick paper 532). By folding back and cutting the back surface of 532), it is possible to securely bond together with a small amount of tape.

The adhesive tape 534 is not particularly limited as long as it does not affect the quality of the lithographic printing plate. For example, a kraft adhesive tape can be used.

[0564] A protection card of the type in which one sheet of protection cardboard having approximately the same size as a lithographic printing plate and cardboard 530, 532 as illustrated in Figs. 80 (A) and 80 (B) is attached. It is possible to use any combination of cardboard for protection, cardboard for protection with a moisture-proof layer, and cardboard for normal protection without a moisture-proof layer, as necessary, in consideration of dimensions, appropriate quality, etc. is there.

[0565] The stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 may be packaged using a packaging box 700 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 81, reference numeral 701 denotes a bottom on which a stack of printing lithographic plates 702 is placed. On both sides of the bottom 701, a lid 705 is integrally formed via a bottom wall 704 defined by ruled lines 703. Is provided.

[0567] Also, on the periphery of the bottom portion 701, the side wall portion 70 is provided.
A square paper tube 706 having the same height as the width of No. 4 is provided. As shown in FIG. 82, the square paper tube 706 is made of a corrugated cardboard formed into a square tube having a hollow portion 707 therein.
8 is fixed.

In order to manufacture such a cardboard box, first, as shown in FIG. 83, a ruled line 703 is formed at a predetermined position of a rectangular cardboard to form a development body comprising a bottom 701, a side wall 704, and a lid 705. 710 is manufactured. And
A square paper tube 706 is bonded to the peripheral edge of the bottom portion 701 of the developing body 710 with a hot melt adhesive 708 to complete a cardboard box.

[0566] The stack 70 of the planographic printing plate is
To package 2, the stack 702 is placed in a square paper tube 706, bent at the ruled line 703, the cover 705 is closed, and fixed with an adhesive tape or the like.

Assuming that an external force acts on the cardboard box in which the stacks 702 of lithographic printing plates as described above are packaged, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4, only the outer peripheral wall of the square paper tube 706 is deformed by an external force, but the inner peripheral wall of the square paper tube 706 is not deformed because the force is buffered by the hollow portion 707 and the stack 702 does not break.

FIG. 85 is a perspective view of another embodiment. The embodiment shown in this figure is a square paper tube 706 having a substantially “U” shape.
Are fixed to two sides of the bottom 701 on the side orthogonal to the ruled line 703, and the center of the two sides on the ruled line 3 side is a gap 709.

FIG. 86 is also a perspective view of another embodiment. In the embodiment shown in this figure, a straight square paper tube 706 is
01 is fixed opposite to the two sides orthogonal to the ruled line 703. That is, in the embodiment of FIG.
This is the same as the one in which the square paper tube 706 fixed to the two sides on the two sides is removed.

Next, as an example of a packing structure applicable to the present invention, a packing structure different from those shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 will be described.

The packing structure 730 shown in FIG. 87 includes a loading member 732 similarly to the packing structure 30 shown in FIG. The loading member 732 has a base 746 formed by connecting a substantially rectangular upper plate 740 and a lower plate 742 with a plurality of block-shaped legs 744. An insertion portion 748 is provided between the legs 744, and a loading member 732 can be lifted by inserting a fork of a forklift or a hand lift into the insertion portion 748. In FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the leg 744 is
Although the insertion portion 748 is formed along the depth direction of the base portion 746 in the elongated shape along the depth direction (the direction of arrow D) of the insertion portion 746, for example, as shown in FIG. Each of the legs 744 has a shape divided in the depth direction, and the insertion portion 748 is formed not only in the depth direction but also in the width direction (arrow W).
Direction) so that the fork can be inserted from any direction.

A loading table 750 having a substantially wedge-shaped end face is fixed to the upper surface of the upper plate 740 of the platform 746. As can be seen from FIGS. 87 and 88, the upper surface of the loading table 750 is inclined with respect to the upper plate 740, and serves as the loading surface 52 on which the stacked bundle 12 is loaded.

[0576] A flat support plate 754 is provided upright from the lower end of the loading surface 752. The surface of the support plate 754 on the loading surface 752 side is perpendicular to the loading surface 752, and when the stacked bundle 12 is loaded on the loading surface 752, the stacked bundle 1
The support surface 56 supports a part of the second load.

[0577] Then, a plurality (for example, 3 to 100 bundles) of the stacked bundles 12 are integrally mounted by the interior paper 16 in a state of being stacked on the stacking surface 752, and the stacked
58.

As described above, the interior paper 16 is formed by attaching a metal thin film having a predetermined thickness to a single rectangular kraft paper having a predetermined size. And a resin layer having a predetermined thickness is bonded to the substrate. As described above, in general, a photosensitive printing plate has high photosensitivity, and the photosensitive layer needs to be shielded from light because a change occurs in the photosensitive layer even when exposed to light in a slight visible light wavelength band.
Also, the heat-sensitive printing plate is preferably subjected to appropriate light shielding because the heat-sensitive layer may be degraded by the heat energy of the applied light or the sensitivity may change due to the progress of the reaction. Further, if a sudden change in humidity or temperature is applied, any of the printing plates is disadvantageous in that dew condensation occurs on the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer to deteriorate the quality, or that the printing plate is adhered to the interleaf paper 14. , Need to be moisture proof. Since the interior paper 16 has a certain light-shielding property and moisture-proof property by being configured as described above, deterioration of the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer of the lithographic printing plate 10 is prevented, and the lithographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a certain quality. Is done. In the present embodiment, as an example of the interior paper 16,
6-7 kraft paper, which is large enough to integrally package the plurality of stacked bundles 12 stacked on the stacking surface 52,
The one to which a μm aluminum foil is adhered is used. A low-density polyethylene layer of 10 to 70 μm is adhered to this aluminum foil, or a black polyethylene film of about 70 μm is further adhered to this low-density polyethylene layer to improve the light-shielding property and moisture-proof property. May be used. Further, if the interior paper 16 can exhibit a certain light-shielding property and moisture-proof property, it is not always necessary to adhere the low-density polyethylene layer and the black polyethylene film.

[0579] A plurality of stacked bundles 12 are integrally provided with the interior paper 16 as described above, and the ends of the interior paper 16 are further secured to the loading table 750 and the support plate 754 by a securing means such as an adhesive tape. An embedded laminate bundle 758 is configured.

[0580] The stretch film 738 is formed of a stretchable material in the form of a thin film. When stretched within a range not exceeding the yield point, the stretch film 738 contracts with a contraction force of a certain value or more without being stretched.

[0581] The stretch film 738 is arranged so that its center in the width direction is brought into contact with the front face 758F of the laminated stack 758 and the both ends are folded as shown by the arrow L, so that the stretch film 738 goes around to the back face of the support plate 754. Has a predetermined width sufficient for In addition, the height of the stretch film 738 is such that the vicinity of the upper end is in contact with the upper surface of the laminated bundle 758 with the interior,
The predetermined height is set so that the vicinity of the lower end reaches the loading table 750 or the table section 746. Then, the stretch film 738 is pulled within a range not exceeding the yield point, and the laminated stack 758, the loading table 750, and the support plate 7
It goes around to 54. Thus, the built-in laminated bundle 758 is fixed to the stacking member 732 by the contraction force applied from the stretch film 738.

[0582] The shape of the stretch film 738 is not particularly limited as long as it has the above-mentioned predetermined width and height. In FIG. 88, the sheet-like stretch film 738 is shown for convenience of illustration, but for example, a roll-like stretch film 738
It may be rotated one or more times around the loading table 750 and the support plate 754.

In this embodiment, the stretch film 738 is made of LLDPE (linear low-density polyethylene) and is self-adhesive and has a thickness of 35 μm and a width of 750 m.
m was used at an elongation of 200%. When such a material having self-adhesiveness is used, a portion where the stretch films 738 are overlapped with each other can be maintained in a state where they are attached to each other without using an adhesive or a fastener.

In the packing structure 730 having such a configuration, as shown in FIG.
Is mounted on the loading surface 752 so that the lithographic printing plate 10 is vertically (having a component in the vertical direction) and parallel to the support surface 756, regardless of the number of lithographic printing plates 10. The height of the packing structure 730 in the loaded state is substantially constant. For this reason, for example, when the packing structure 730 is stored in a storage place such as a warehouse, by appropriately determining the height of the storage place, it is possible to prevent a useless space from being generated above the stacked bundles 12 and to improve the efficiency. Can be stored.

The lithographic printing plate 10 is stacked with its lower side aligned along the stacking surface 752 by its own weight. For this reason, for example, when loading the plate making machine using an automatic feeder or the like, the plate can be loaded at an accurate loading position. In addition, since the lithographic printing plate 10 is easy to hold when it is lifted, the work of transportation and movement is facilitated.

Further, the loading surface 752 is inclined with respect to the upper plate 740, and the stacked bundle 12 is also loaded with an inclination at a fixed inclination angle. A part of the load of the stacked bundle 12 is supported by the support surface 756. Since the load of the stacked bundle 12 is dispersed and supported on two surfaces (two directions) in this manner,
As described later, the laminated bundle 12 and the planographic printing plate 10 do not fall down or slip down carelessly in a state where the package is unpacked.

As shown in FIG. 87, the laminated bundle 75
In order to fix the stacking member 8 to the stacking member 732, the stretch film 738 is caused to rotate around the support plate 754, and the contracted force of the stretch film 738 causes the interior laminated bundle 75 to rotate.
8 is fixed to the loading member 732 so as to be pressed against the loading table 750 and the support plate 754. Since the end plate that contacts the entire front surface of the stacked bundle is not used unlike the related art, the packing operation is facilitated. In particular, when a self-adhesive film is used as in the present embodiment, if the stretched film 738 that is circulated is partially overlapped, the overlapped portions adhere to each other.
It can be maintained in a circling state without using an adhesive or a fastener.

Also, as described above, the stretch film 73
8, the stretch film 738 is wrapped around the entire surface of the loading surface 752 and the supporting surface 756 (the contact surface of the built-in stacked bundle 758). For this reason, since the contracting force of the stretch film 738 acts as a force that presses the built-in stacked bundle 758 against the loading surface 752 and the support surface 756, the built-in stacked bundle 758 can be more firmly fixed to the loading member 732. it can.

[0589] When unpacking the laminated bundle 758, the stretch film 738 may be simply removed by, for example, cutting with a cutter knife, thereby facilitating the unpacking operation.

[0590] Also, a large amount of lithographic printing plates 10
Are integrated, so that the number of times of handling the cargo is reduced and the handling is excellent.

As a packing structure using a stretch film, a packing structure 770 shown in FIG. 89 can be used. In the packing structure 770 shown in FIG. 89, the same components and members as those shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

In this packing structure 770, the loading member 772
Two substantially U-shaped legs 774 are attached to the upper plate 740, and are directly placed on the ground or the floor by these legs 774 (a member corresponding to the lower plate 742 is provided. Not done). Further, a member corresponding to the loading table 750 shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 is not fixed to the upper plate 740 of the loading member 772. Then, the built-in stacked bundle 758 is directly loaded on the upper plate 740 so that the lithographic printing plate 10 is parallel to the upper plate 740 (that is, substantially horizontally).

[0593] In the example shown in Fig. 89, the stretch film 738 is attached to the upper surface 758U of the built-in laminated bundle 758.
(Substantially the same surface as the front surface 758F shown in FIG. 87), it is folded downward and adhered to the lower surface of the upper plate 740.

As described above, the packing structure 770 shown in FIG.
In this case, unlike the related art, an end plate that contacts the entire front surface of the stacked bundle is not used, so that the packing operation and the unpacking operation are facilitated, and a large amount of the lithographic printing plates 10 are integrated in the packed state. The number of times of handling is reduced and handling is excellent.

[0595] The packing structures 730 and 770 described above are used.
Is merely an example of a packing structure using a stretchable film, and it goes without saying that a packing structure using a stretch film is not limited to these. For example, FIG.
In the packing structure 730 shown in FIGS. 7 and 88 and the packing structure 770 shown in FIG. 89, the laminated stack 758 is shown as being partially exposed without being completely covered by the stretch film 738. 758 may be completely covered by the stretch film 738, or if the laminated stack 758 is securely fixed to the loading member 732 so as not to be inadvertently displaced or dropped. Alternatively, the stretch film 58 may be wound only partially.

The stretch film 7 described above can be used as an elastic film for fixing the
It is not limited to 38. In other words, the material, elongation rate, size, and the like are limited as long as the material can exhibit a contracting force in a stretched state due to its elasticity and can fix the built-in stacked bundle 758 to the loading members 732 and 772. Not done. As the material, for example, the main raw material is polyvinyl chloride to which a plasticizer is added, a multi-layer structure of polyethylene and polyvinyl acetate, the main raw material is polyethylene, and the above-mentioned LLDPE (linear low- Density polyethylene).

Further, various members for preventing the lithographic printing plate 10 from being scratched or deformed may be provided between the laminated stack 758 and the stretch film 738.

For example, in the one shown in FIG. 90, a long surface contact plate 736 is provided substantially at the center of the laminated stack 758 in the width direction.
Is applied. When the contraction force from the stretch film 738 is large, a part of the contraction force
Acting inward (indicated by the arrow F in FIG. 90 toward the center in the width direction) along the plane of 0, as indicated by the two-dot chain line,
The lithographic printing plate 10 tends to bend convexly toward the outside of the laminated stack 758. However, the surface contact plate 73 is provided substantially at the center of the front face 758F of the laminated bundle 758 thus provided.
By disposing 6, the part of the contraction force from the stretch film 738 acts as a pressing force for pressing the substantially center of the lithographic printing plate 10 toward the inside of the laminated stack 758 (in the direction toward the support plate 754). I do. For this reason, the lithographic printing plate 10
Does not bend and remains planar.

In the example shown in FIG.
2 and an end face substantially L-shaped square backing plate 7 having a narrow portion 764
34 is applied so that the wide portion 762 comes into surface contact with the front surface 758F of the installed bundle 758, and the narrow portion 764 comes into surface contact with the side surface 758S. For this reason, even if an object hits from outside during transportation or storage, the corners of the lithographic printing plate 10 constituting the stacked bundle 12 are protected, and no damage or deformation occurs. Generally, since the lithographic printing plate 10 is formed in a thin plate shape, if a corner or a side is scratched or deformed, an image is blurred when developed, or the ink becomes uneven when printed. Although a problem may occur, when the lithographic printing plate 10 packed by the packing structure 730 is used after being transported or stored, since the corners are not scratched or deformed as described above, It is possible to always obtain a clear image without a problem such as blurring of an image or unevenness of ink during printing. In addition, as described above, the wide portion 762 having a contact area relatively larger than the narrow portion 764 is brought into contact with the front surface of the stacked bundle 758, so that, for example, the narrow portion 764 is
8, the lithographic printing plate 10 can be more effectively prevented from being curved as compared to the case where the lithographic printing plate 10 is arranged so as to contact the front surface 758F of the lithographic printing plate 8. Of course, as shown in FIG.
34 and the surface contact plate 736 may be used together.

[0600] The size of the square applying plate 734 is as described above as long as it is applied to at least the side of the laminated stack 758 and is not shifted or dropped from this side by the tightening force from the stretch film 738. Thus, the planographic printing plate 10 can be protected. From the viewpoint of preventing such displacement and dropping, the size of the square abutment plate 734 is preferably large, and conversely, from the viewpoint of reducing the weight, the smaller is preferable. In order to achieve both, for example, the width of the wide portion 762 and the narrow portion 764 is 10 mm to 400 m.
m, but preferably 20 mm to 200 mm, more preferably 40 mm to 60 mm. Although the thickness of the square backing plate 734 is not particularly limited,
If it is thin, it tends to be deformed (especially curved), and if it is thick, it is bulky at the time of collection and the like, and its weight increases. Therefore, the thickness of the square backing plate 734 is, for example,
The distance may be about 0 mm, preferably 20 mm to 200 mm, more preferably 50 mm to 150 mm.

Similarly, even with the size of the surface contact plate 736, the center of the front face 758F of the laminated stack 758 is pressed by receiving the tightening force of the stretch film 738,
There is no particular limitation as long as the lithographic printing plate 10 can be prevented from bending. As the width of the surface applying plate 736 increases, the curvature of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be more effectively prevented. However, since the size is large, the weight increases and the handling becomes difficult. Further, when the width is reduced, the handling is excellent, but the surface contact plate 736 itself is easily deformed, so that the lithographic printing plate 10 may be deformed. In consideration of these, the width of the surface contact plate 36 can be set to 10 mm to 400 mm, and 20 mm
To 200 mm, preferably 50 mm to 150
mm is more preferable. In addition, the facing plate 736
When the thickness is increased, the curvature of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be more effectively prevented, but the weight increases. Therefore, 10 mm
It is preferably about 30 mm. For example, in the case of the size of the lithographic printing plate 10 shown in the first embodiment, the surface contact plate 36 has a thickness of 15 mm, a width of 100 mm, and a length of 1 mm.
A 100 mm wooden board can be used.

Further, depending on the relationship with the size of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the like, it is possible to prevent the lithographic printing plate 10 from being curved by the wide portion 762 of the square contact plate 734. In such a case, The surface contact plate 736 may be omitted.

[0603] The length of the square contact plate 734 and the surface contact plate 736 is sufficient if it is longer than, for example, the height of the laminated stack 758, but from the viewpoint of reducing the overall height of the packing structure 730, It is preferable that the height is substantially the same as the height of the laminated stack 758. Considering that the size of the built-in stacked bundle 758 is various, by making the height approximately equal to the height of the support plate 754, the built-in stacked bundle 758 having a different size is provided.
Even in this case, the versatility may be enhanced by making the square contact plate 734 and the surface contact plate 736 applicable. Also, without contacting the entire vertically stacked layered bundle 758,
As long as the planographic printing plate 10 is not deformed, the length may be, for example, about 50 mm up and down and not in contact with the built-in stacked bundle 758.

Also, the square contact plate 734 and the surface contact plate 736
Need not necessarily be continuous in the height direction or the horizontal direction, and may be divided in the height direction and / or the horizontal direction so as to further reduce the weight.

The material of the square abutment plate 734 and the surface abutment plate 736 is not particularly limited as long as they have the strength required for these members. For example, wood, metal, resin, corrugated cardboard, cardboard, honeycomb material, etc. It may be. Further, the shapes of these members are not limited to those described above.
By combining a letter-shaped member, an H-shaped member, and a solid or hollow bar (which may be cylindrical or prismatic) in cross section, the square contact plate 734 and the surface contact plate 736 are combined. You may comprise. When a plurality of members are combined as described above, each member may be fixed or not fixed.

In the case of using corrugated cardboard as the square abutment plate 734 and the surface abutment plate 736, the following configuration is preferable from the viewpoint of strength and rigidity.

First, the order of the corrugated cardboard (flute) is preferably A flute, C flute, B flute, and E flute. The layer structure of the corrugated cardboard is preferably in the order of double-sided double-sided cardboard (such as AAA), double-sided double-sided cardboard (such as AA), and double-sided cardboard (such as A).

The grades of the front liner and the back liner of the corrugated cardboard are, in order of preference, AA grade, A grade, B grade and C grade, and the basis weight of the front liner and the back liner is 16
It is 0 (g / m ² ) or more and 440 (g / m ² ) or less. The types of corrugated medium shin are listed in order of preference, and they are reinforced medium shin, A class, B class, and C class.
It is 100 (g / m ² ) or more and 280 (g / m ² ) or less.

When a paper-made honeycomb structural material is used in place of the corrugated cardboard, it is preferable to use the same front liner, back liner, and middle lining as the corrugated cardboard described above.

Further, when cardboard is used instead of cardboard, the basis weight is 200 (g / m ² ) or more and 2000 (g / m ² ) or more.
/ M ² ) or less.

[0611] Further, as shown in FIG.
4 and between the facing plate 736 and the laminated bundle 758 already
A cushioning material 784 made of a deformable member may be provided. With this cushioning material 784, a stretch film 738 acting via a square contact plate 734 or a surface contact plate 736.
Of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be more effectively prevented. As a specific example of the cushioning material 784, a rubber plate, foam material, corrugated cardboard, cardboard, honeycomb-structured paper, or the like can be used. In particular, the thickness is about 1 mm to 5 mm, and the spring type is specified in JIS K6301. A rubber plate having a hardness of about 10 to 98 degrees in a hardness test is preferable. In addition, the cushioning material 784 is
34 and the surface contact plate 736 may be formed separately, or may be bonded to the square contact plate 734 and the surface contact plate 736 to be integrated.

[0699] Instead of the above-described packing structures 730 and 770, a lithographic printing plate 10 is provided by a packing structure 820 shown in FIG.
May be packaged.

The packing structure 820 is provided with a loading table 822 on which the stacked bundle 12 is loaded as shown in FIG. A pallet 824 having a substantially rectangular plate shape is disposed at the lower end of the loading table 822. The short side and long side of the outer surface of the pallet 824 have a longitudinal direction (arrow L direction) and a lateral direction (arrow S direction), respectively.
An insertion hole 826 that penetrates through is opened. These insertion holes 826 serve as fork insertion portions when the packing structure 820 is transported by a forklift or a hand lift, respectively.

The loading table 822 has an inclined plate 828 fixed on a pallet section 824 as shown in FIG. The inclined plate 828 is formed in a wedge shape such that the thickness decreases from one end to the other end side along the longitudinal direction of the pallet portion 824, whereby the upper surface of the inclined plate 828 has one end to the other end. A loading support surface 830 which is a flat surface inclined downward toward the side is provided. Further, on the loading table 822, a flat back plate 832 is provided upright on the pallet portion 824 so as to be in contact with the other end of the inclined plate 828. The back plate 832 has a flat surface on the side of the inclined plate 828 and the loading support surface 83.
It is fixed to the pallet part 824 so as to be orthogonal to 0, and 5 to 30 degrees (preferably 1
(0 to 15 °). Thus, the flat surface of the back plate 832 on the side of the inclined plate 828 serves as the contact support surface 34 that receives a part of the load from the stacked bundle 12 loaded on the loading table 822.

As shown in FIG. 96, a slit-shaped insertion hole 836 penetrating in the short direction of the pallet portion 824 is opened on the side end surface of the inclined plate 828. This insertion hole 83
As shown in FIG. 94, an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of a fastening belt 838 in the form of an elongated band is inserted through 6. As a result, the fastening belt 838 is connected to the inclined plate 828, and the fastening belt 83 is opened from both open ends of the insertion hole 836.
8 extend from both ends. A metal belt buckle 840 is fixed to one end of the fastening belt 838. Here, various types of fastening belts 838 can be used as long as they have sufficient strength and durability.
Specifically, for example, a high-strength belt called a so-called lashing belt is used.

Also, as shown in FIG. 96, a slit-shaped insertion hole 842 that penetrates in the short direction of the pallet portion 824 is opened on the side end surface of the back plate 832. This insertion hole 8
As shown in FIG. 94, an elongate belt-shaped overturn prevention belt 844 is inserted through 42. Thereby, the overturn prevention belt 844 is connected to the back plate 832,
Fastening belts 838 extend from both open ends of the insertion holes 836, respectively. The overturn prevention belt 844 is inserted into the insertion hole 8.
Although both ends are joined together to form a loop after being inserted into 42, a belt buckle may be used to adjust the belt length of the loop portion, similarly to the fastening belt 838. The overturn prevention belt 844 may have the same structure and material as the tightening belt 838, but is thinner than the tightening belt 838 because the load is small. In addition, a storage portion (for storing a part of the overturn prevention belt 844 to prevent the overturn prevention belt 844 from hanging down when the overturn prevention belt 844 is not used is provided on the back side of the contact support surface 834 of the back plate 832. (Not shown).

As shown in FIG. 96, one or more stacked bundles 12 are stacked in the thickness direction on the loading table 822, and as shown in FIG.
Are packaged in a stack. Also, interior paper 846
Of the inclined plate 8 with an adhesive tape or the like as necessary.
28 and the back plate 832.

Here, the interior paper 846 is formed by attaching a metal thin film having a predetermined thickness to a single rectangular kraft paper having a predetermined size. It is configured by laminating a resin layer having a thickness.
As described above, photosensitive printing plates are generally highly photosensitive,
Even if the photosensitive layer is exposed to light in a slight visible light wavelength band, a change occurs in the photosensitive layer. Also, the heat-sensitive printing plate is preferably subjected to appropriate light shielding because the heat-sensitive layer may be degraded by the heat energy of the applied light or the sensitivity may change due to the progress of the reaction.
Further, if a sudden change in humidity or temperature is applied, any of the printing plates is disadvantageous in that dew condensation occurs on the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer to deteriorate the quality, or that the printing plate is adhered to the interleaf paper 14. , Need to be moisture proof. Since the interior paper 846 has a certain light-shielding property and moisture-proofing property by being configured as described above, deterioration of the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer of the lithographic printing plate 10 is prevented, and the lithographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a certain quality. Is done.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the interior paper 846, kraft paper having a size sufficient to integrally package the plurality of stacked bundles 12 stacked on the stacking support surface 830 is formed of aluminum having a thickness of 6 to 7 μm. The foil is attached with a low-density polyethylene layer of 10 to 20 μm.
A low-density polyethylene layer of 10 to 70 μm is adhered to this aluminum foil, or a black polyethylene film of about 70 μm is further adhered to this low-density polyethylene layer to obtain a material having improved light-shielding properties and moisture-proof properties. May be used. If the interior paper 846 can exhibit a certain light-shielding property and moisture-proofing property, it is not always necessary to attach the low-density polyethylene layer and the black polyethylene film.

[0620] As shown in Figs. 94 and 95, the stacked bundle 12 is loaded on the loading table 822 in a substantially vertical state. When the stacked bundle 12 is stacked on the loading table 822, the load due to the own weight of the stacked bundle 12 acts on the loading support surface 830 and the contact support surface 834 of the loading table 822, respectively. Since the bundles 12 are substantially stacked vertically, the load acting on the loading support surface 830 among the loads due to the weight of the laminated bundle 12 is larger than the load acting on the contact support surface 834. That is, the stacked bundle 12 on the loading table 822 is
The bottom surface portion of the outer peripheral end surface along the surface direction is pressed against the loading support surface 830 and the back surface along the thickness direction is pressed against the contact support surface 834 via. This allows
The stacked bundle 12 is positioned in the plane direction and the thickness direction, respectively.

When the stacked bundle 12 is stacked on the stacking table 822, the portion extending from the insertion hole 836 is attached to both sides or the back of the inclined plate 828 in a state where the fastening belt 838 is not connected by the belt buckle 840. It is placed on the back side of the plate 832, and the part of the fall prevention belt 844 extending from the insertion hole 842 is turned to the back side of the back plate 832 on the opposite side to the contact support surface 834.

As shown in FIG. 94, the packing structure 820 comes into contact with both corners on the top surface side of the outer peripheral end surface of the stacked bundle 12 loaded on the loading table 822 via the interior paper 846. A pair of square contact members 848 that are mounted as described above are provided. The square contact member 848 is formed to be elongated in the thickness direction of the stacked bundle 12 using a wooden board as a raw material. A flat top plate portion 850 is provided on the top side of the corner contact member 848, and a flat side plate portion 852 bent substantially perpendicularly downward at one end along the width direction of the top plate portion 850. Is provided. Here, the top plate 85
The width of 0 is longer than or approximately equal to the width of the side plate portion 852. In addition, the length of the corner contact member 848 is
6 needs to be longer than the thickness of the stacked bundle 12 including
If the dimensional difference is too large, the tip of the square contact member 848 projects, which is not preferable.

As shown in FIG. 94, a rubber sheet 854 is attached to the inner surface of the side plate portion 852 as a cushioning material. Thus, the corner contact member 848 causes the side plate portion 852 to abut on the side surface of the outer peripheral end surface of the stacked bundle 12 via the rubber sheet 854. Further, the corner contact member 848 holds the top plate 8
A plate-like urethane sponge 856 is also inserted between 50 and the top surface of the stacked bundle 12 as a cushioning material. This allows
The corner contact member 848 makes the top plate 850 abut on the top surface of the stacked bundle 12 via the urethane sponge 856.

Here, the thickness of the rubber sheet 854 is 1 mm.
And a rubber hardness (JISK 63).
01) of about 10 to 98 is suitable. The urethane sponge 856 is thicker than the rubber sheet 854 and has a thickness of about 5 mm to several tens mm. The dimensions of the rubber sheet 854 and the urethane sponge 856 are several mm to 10 mm outward from the square contact member 848, respectively.
The side plate portion 852 and the top plate portion 850 are extended to about mm.
It is larger. Thereby, the corner contact member 84
Even when the sheet 8 is fastened by the fastening belt 838 with a strong force, the edge of the square contact member 848 is prevented from directly contacting the stacked bundle 12. However, as long as the rubber sheet 854 and the urethane sponge 856 have a sufficient thickness, there is no problem even if the dimensions are smaller than the side plate portion 852 and the top plate portion 850, respectively.

As a cushioning material between the square contact member 848 and the stacked bundle 12, besides the rubber sheet 854 and the urethane sponge 856, cardboard, cardboard, honeycomb structured paper and the like can be used. However, if the material of the corner contact member 848 is sufficiently flexible, the cushioning material is omitted because deformation of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the like can be sufficiently prevented only by interposing the interior paper 846 between the lithographic printing plate 10 and the lithographic printing plate 10. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of the rubber sheet 854 and the urethane sponge 856 are used as the cushioning material.
2 and the same type of cushioning material may be arranged inside the top plate portion 850.

When the pair of square contact members 848 are mounted on the stacked bundle 12 loaded on the loading table 822, the fastening belt 8
38 are wound from the side surface to the top surface of the outer peripheral end surface of the stacked bundle 12 from the side surface, and are connected to each other by the belt buckle 840 to form a loop around the stacked bundle 12. Belt buckle 840
Has a function of adjusting a tightening length, which is a length of a loop portion of the tightening belt 838, and tightens the tightening belt 838 by pulling one end of the tightening belt 838 extending from the belt buckle 840. The length becomes shorter. The belt buckle 840 does not increase the tightening length of the tightening belt 838 unless the lock lever 841 is raised to release the locked state. The fastening belt 838 is previously formed in a loop shape by a belt buckle 840 and the back plate 83 is formed.
After the fastening belt 838 is attached to the stack of bundles 12, the loop portion of the fastening belt 838 is turned toward the contact support surface 834 of the back plate 832. The length is adjusted by the belt buckle 840, and the stacked bundle 12 on which the square contact members 838 are mounted is fastened to the fastening belt 83.
8 may be used.

[0627] The fastening belt 838 is provided with a belt buckle 8 so that a sufficiently large tension is generated with respect to the weight of the stacked bundle 12.
40 adjusts the tightening length. As a result, the belt buckle 840 presses against the outer surfaces of the pair of square contact members 848 as shown in FIG. 94, and the tightening belt 838 moves between the pair of square contact members 848 and between the pair of square contact members 848. Each of the stacked bundles 12 is stretched between the inclined plates 828 and is separated from the outer peripheral end surface of the stacked bundle 12.

[0628] The fastening belt 838 is provided with a square contact member 848.
Is arranged so as to be pressed against the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the corner contact member 848 may slightly deform so that the central portion in the longitudinal direction protrudes toward the stacked bundle 12, but even when such flexure occurs, the corner contact member 848 is flexible. Since the rubber sheet 854 and the urethane sponge 856 press against the laminated bundle 12, local load concentration from the square contact member 848 to the laminated bundle 12 can be reduced.

The length of the portion of the fastening belt 838 extending from the inclined plate 828 is adjusted in advance so that the belt buckle 840 is held on the top plate 850 of one of the corner contact members 848. This reliably prevents the metal belt buckle 840 from directly colliding with the stacked bundle 12. Note that the width of the top plate portion 850 of the corner contact member 848 is
The length of the belt buckle 840 is about 20 to 30 mm longer than the length of the fastening belt 838 along the longitudinal direction.

The overturn prevention belt 844 is rotated from the back side of the back plate 832 to the contact support surface 834 side, and as shown in FIG. 94, a pair of side surfaces and the thickness direction along the plane direction of the stacked bundle 12. Loosely wrapped around the outside of the front along.
This allows the loading support surface 830 to be moved by the back plate 8 for some reason while the loading table 822 is being conveyed by a vehicle, a forklift, or the like.
Even in the case where the stack 13 is inclined in the direction opposite to the direction 32 or a large impact acts on the loading table 822, the stacked bundle 12 is prevented from slipping off the loading support surface 830.

In the packing structure 820 having such a configuration, if the tightening length of the tightening belt 838 is adjusted by the belt buckle 840 so that the tension of the tightening belt 838 becomes sufficiently large with respect to the weight of the stacked bundle 12, A pair of square contact members 848 tightened by a tightening belt 838 connected to the loading table 822 via the inclined plate 828 forms a rubber sheet 85.
4 and urethane sponge 856, each of which presses against both corners on the top surface side of the stacked bundle 12 loaded on the loading table 822, and presses the pair of square contact members 848 to apply the bottom surface of the stacked bundle 12. Is pressed against the loading support surface 830 of the loading table 822, so that the movement of the stacked bundle 12 along the surface direction is performed by the loading support surface 830 and the pair of square contact members 84.
8 and along the thickness direction of the laminated bundle 12 due to the frictional resistance generated between the laminated bundle 12 and the rubber sheet 854 and the urethane sponge 856, and the deformation resistance of the compressed and deformed rubber sheet 854 and the urethane sponge 856. The stacking stack 12 can be firmly fixed on the loading table 822 so that the stacking stack 12 is in contact with the stacking support surface 830 and the contact support surface 834, respectively. Relative movement between the lithographic printing plates 10 can be reliably prevented.

In this packing structure 820, the stacked bundle 1
Since a large pressing force along the thickness direction does not act on the lithographic printing plate 10 constituting the second printing plate 2, a large pressing force acts directly on the image forming surface of the lithographic printing plate 10 to cause distortion, deformation, and the accompanying light exposure. A chemical change of the layer or the thermosensitive layer can be prevented.

In the packing structure 820, even when the stacked bundle 12 is formed of a large-sized planographic printing plate 10, the size of the planographic printing plate 10 is reduced as in the case of the conventional packing structure (see FIG. 5). Accordingly, it is not necessary to increase the size of the square contact member 848, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the square contact member 848 that is attached to the stacked bundle 12 at the time of packing and to be removed from the stacked bundle 12 at the time of unpacking, and to suppress an increase in weight associated therewith. The load at the time of packing and unpacking work on the stacked bundle 12 is reduced, and the amount of materials necessary for packing the stacked bundle 12 can be reduced. Further, in the packing structure 820, the fall prevention belt 844 is rotated to the rear side of the back plate 832 without removing the pair of square contact members 848 from the stacked bundle 12,
By only slightly extending the tightening length of the tightening belt 838 by the belt buckle 840, the required number of lithographic printing plates 10 can be taken out of the loading table 822 and the tightening length of the tightening belt 838 can be reduced. The lithographic printing plate 10 can be re-fixed with the stacking stack 1 loaded on the loading table 822.
The work of removing the lithographic printing plate 10 from the printing plate 2 is also simplified.

In the packing structure 820, the square contact member 848 is tightened by one tightening belt 838. However, a plurality of tightening belts 838 are connected to the inclined plate 828, and a plurality of tightening belts are connected. According to 838, the square contact member 848
May be fastened by a plurality of fastening belts 838 respectively. In this way, the plurality of fastening belts 838 allow the square contact member 84 to be used.
8 by dispersing the load on
Of the stacked bundle 12 from the square contact member 848
Can be made uniform along the longitudinal direction. As a result, for example, urethane sponge 85 as a cushioning material
6 and the rubber sheet 854 are thinned or omitted,
It is possible to prevent a part of the planographic printing plate 10 from being distorted or deformed due to a high pressing force acting thereon. Also a fall prevention belt 8
There is no need to provide one belt 44, and a plurality of overturn prevention belts 844 may be wound around the stacked bundle 12. Further, a belt buckle is provided in the middle of the overturn prevention belt 844, and The tightening length and the slack length may be adjusted so as to be tightened.

The material of the square contact member 848 may be
The material is not limited to wood, and for example, metal such as resin, iron, and aluminum may be used as the material. Further, in the present embodiment, the top plate portion 850 and the side plate portion 852 of the corner contact member 848 are provided integrally, but the top plate portion 850 and the side plate portion 852 of the corner contact member 848 have a divided structure, and the top plate portion 850 is provided. Alternatively, the side plate 852 may be applied to the top surface and the side surface of the stacked bundle 12, respectively, and these may be fastened by the fastening belt 838.

In this packing structure 820, the stacked bundle 1
The lithographic printing plates 10 constituting the stack 2 are stacked vertically in a loading table 82.
Although the lithographic printing plate 10 is stacked on the loading table, the lithographic printing plate 10 can be stacked on the loading table. Specifically, the stacked bundles 12 are stacked so that the lithographic printing plate 10 is substantially horizontal on the bottom plate portion of the loading table, and the stacked bundles 12 are mounted on the side plate portion of the loading table that is erected at one end of the bottom plate portion. The two end portions along the surface direction of the stacked bundle 12 are brought into contact with each other, and a pair of corner contact members are brought into contact with the two corner portions on the other end surface side along the surface direction of the stacked bundle 12, respectively. Tighten by the fastening belt connected to the side plate. When the lithographic printing plates 10 are in the stacked state as described above, the number of the lithographic printing plates 10 constituting the stacked bundle 12 is large, and when the thickness of the stacked bundle 12 is large, the storage space of the stacked bundle 12 is efficiently reduced. You can use it.

FIG. 97 shows the packing structure 820 described above.
2 shows a configuration example in the case where a reinforcing member is interposed between the square contact member and the fastening belt. Fastening belt 83
In the case where it is necessary to tighten the square contact member 848 with a strong force due to 8 or when the rigidity of the square contact member 848 cannot be sufficiently increased with respect to the tightening force of the tightening belt 838, the square contact member 848 undergoes bending deformation. Due to the occurrence or local deformation, a strong pressing force acts on a part of the plurality of lithographic printing plates 10 constituting the stacked bundle 12 to cause problems such as distortion and deformation.

In order to prevent the above-mentioned deformation of the corner contact member 848, the packing structure 820 shown in FIG.
A reinforcing member 860 whose rigidity along the longitudinal direction is sufficiently larger than the rigidity of the square contact member 848 is sandwiched between the fastening belt 838 and the stacked bundle 12. This reinforcing member 86
0, the top plate portion 850 and the side plate portions 8
52 and a top plate portion 862 and a side plate portion 864, respectively.
Are provided integrally. The reinforcing member 860 is made of a metal such as iron or aluminum having a higher strength than the wood used as the material of the squaring member 838, or another type of wood, and is thus made thinner than the squaring member 848. Have sufficient strength (rigidity). Therefore, as compared with the square contact member 848, bending deformation and local deformation are less likely to occur due to the pressing force from the fastening belt 838.

Here, the reinforcing member 860 is connected to the square contact member 84.
The area of the press-contact portion (press-contact area) to the fixing belt 8 is
Is larger than the pressure contact area with the reinforcing member 860.
Accordingly, the pressing force from the tightening belt 838 can be dispersed over a wide area by the reinforcing member 860 and can be applied to the square applying member 848. Therefore, it is necessary to tighten the square applying member 848 with the tightening belt 838 with a strong force. In some cases or when the fastening force of the fastening belt 838 is
Even if the rigidity of the square contact member 8 cannot be increased sufficiently,
48 can be prevented from being bent or deformed locally. As a result, it is possible to prevent the corner contact member 848 from being bent or locally deformed, and from causing distortion, deformation, and the like in a part of the plurality of lithographic printing plates 10 constituting the stacked bundle 12.

[0640] Instead of the packing structure described above, FIGS.
A packing structure 910 shown in FIG. This packing structure 910 is a so-called flat stacking package on which the planographic printing plates 10 are stacked substantially horizontally.

In this packing structure 910, FIG. 98 and FIG.
As shown in FIG. 00, the lithographic printing plate 10 is placed in a state where many lithographic printing plates 10 are stacked on a plate base 914 installed on a frame 912 (see FIG. 98). Stacked stack 1
A cardboard 918 serving as a cushioning member is arranged on the outer periphery of 2. The cardboard 9 is made up of the plate stand 914 and the stacked bundle 12.
This is provided in order to prevent a step from being generated between the stacked bundles 12 and to buffer a force applied in the displacement direction to the stacked bundle 12. In the book shown in FIGS. 98 and 100, the cardboard 918 is provided on two of the four outer peripheral surfaces of the stacked bundle 12, but it is more effective to provide it on the entire surface. The cushioning member is not limited to the corrugated cardboard 918, but may be paperboard, molded paper pulp, paper honeycomb, polyethylene foam, polystyrene foam, urethane foam, or an air cap.

[0641] The laminated bundle 12 including the outer periphery of the cardboard 918
Are wrapped by the interior paper 16 as shown in FIG. After wrapping the laminated bundle 12, the interior paper 16 is adhered to each other with an adhesive tape 922, and
14 is attached. As the light-shielding envelope, not only the interior paper 16 but also various plastic films such as a multilayer of kraft paper and polyethylene (PE) and a multilayer of kraft paper, polyethylene (PE) and aluminum foil can be applied. .

[0643] A corrugated cardboard 924 is arranged on the entire outer periphery of the interior paper 16 as shown in FIG. This corrugated cardboard 924 is an outer corrugated cardboard that also has light-shielding properties.
As an example, double-sided cardboard (JIS: K280-SP)
C125-K280). Cardboard 92
A reinforcing cardboard (or a material having the same performance) 926 as a reinforcing member is arranged on the outer periphery of 4. These reinforced cardboards 926 are provided along the thickness direction of the stacked bundle 12 at positions corresponding to the center portions of the four sides of the lithographic printing plate 10. These reinforced corrugated cardboard 926 is a corrugated cardboard for reinforcement for tightening the laminated bundle 12 in the lateral direction. As an example, a double-sided corrugated cardboard (JIS standard: K280-SPC125-SPC280) having a stronger strength than a double-sided corrugated cardboard
-SPC125-K280).

Cardboard 924 including Reinforced Cardboard 926
103, a stretch film 928 having elasticity is wound a plurality of times (eight times in the present embodiment) in the outer circumferential direction of the stacked bundle 12 as shown in FIG. With this stretch film 928, the stacked bundle 12 is tightened and fixed in the plane direction. Stretch film 928
As a low-density polyethylene (LDPE), a linear polyethylene (LLDPE), a single-layer film such as an ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), or a multilayer film obtained by combining these, a thickness of which can be applied. 1
Those having a length of 5 to 50 µ and an elongation of 120 to 200% are preferable.

The stretch film 928 has a length of 120 to 2
Wrap with 00% elongation. At this time, the stacking bundle 12 is clamped in the plane direction by the restoring force of the stretch film 928 which is about to shrink. As a result, the stacked bundle 12 is fixed. When a heat-shrinkable film is used instead of the stretch film 928, a single-layer film such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), polypropylene (PP), ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA),
Alternatively, a multilayer film in which these are combined can be applied, and the thickness thereof is preferably 100 to 200 μm.

In FIG. 104, the upper bundle opening 930 of the stacked bundle 12 wound by the stretch film 928 is shielded by the upper lid 930. This top cover 930 is
It is fixed to the stretch film 928 by the craft adhesive tape 934. Reference numeral 936 is a dew condensation prevention caution label attached to the upper lid. In the laminated bundle 12 packaged as described above, the restoring force of the stretch film 928 (the stretch film 928 indicated by an arrow A in FIG. 105).
The tightening force generated at the corner of the stacked bundle 12 as shown by the arrow B in the figure, and also by the strengthened cardboard 926 provided on the outer periphery of the cardboard 924 as shown by the arrow C in the figure. Occurs as shown.

[0647] Therefore, in the packaging method according to the present embodiment, the provision of the reinforcing cardboard 926 can increase the tightening force of the stretch film 928 applied to the stacked bundle 12. Therefore, in this configuration, the tightening force of the stretch film 928 can be efficiently applied to the stacked bundle 12, thereby preventing the stacked photosensitive lithographic printing plates from shifting.

In this configuration, as shown in FIG. 100, a cardboard 91 serving as a cushioning member is
8 are arranged, the stacked bundle 12 has an arrow D in FIG.
Even if a force for shifting is applied, the force is buffered by the cardboard 918. Therefore, the packaging method of the present embodiment can surely prevent the stacked bundle 12 from shifting.

In the present invention, FIGS.
Pallets 1010, 1030, 1040, 1 shown in FIG.
The planographic printing plate 10 may be stacked and packed at 050. Figure 1
19 shows a schematic configuration of a production line for producing the lithographic printing plate 10 packaged by the lithographic printing plate packaging material of the present invention (or the lithographic printing plate 10 constituting the lithographic printing plate packaging structure of the present invention). Have been. The lithographic printing plate manufactured by this manufacturing line can of course be also loaded and packaged on the pallets described below to form a lithographic printing plate packaging structure.

The production line 1310 has an upstream side (FIG. 11)
9 upper right side) to the downstream side (lower left side in FIG. 119) in order from the transmitter 1312, the notcher 1314, and the slitter 1
316, flying shear 1318, and integrated device 13
20 are provided.

[0651] In the feeder 1312, the rolled web 1
322 is sent out, and a plurality of webs 1322 are sequentially joined to form a long web. The interleaf paper 1330 conveyed from another line is bonded to the web 1322 sent from the sending machine 1312, and the notcher 1314
Leads to.

[0652] The notch 1314 is formed by partially punching out both ends in the width direction of the web 1322, so-called
Is configured. Further, the web 1322 is trimmed to a predetermined width by the trimming upper blade 1326 and the trimming lower blade 1328 of the slitter 1316. Further, since the upper trimming blade 1326 and the lower trimming blade 1328 of the slitter 1316 enter the ear 1324, the web 13
22 can be moved in the width direction. Thereby, while continuously cutting, the trimming width of the web 1322 (slitter 1
316) can be changed.

The web 1322 having a predetermined trimming width is cut by the flying shear 1318 into a predetermined length, and a photosensitive printing plate having a desired size is manufactured.

[0654] In the stacking device 1320, a plurality of photosensitive printing plates to which the interleaving paper 1330 is attached are stacked (accordingly, the photosensitive printing plates and the interleaving paper 1330 are alternately stacked), and the photosensitive printing plates are stacked. A bundle 12 is formed.

[0655] The laminated bundle 12 is further added to the production line 131.
0, a stacking unit 114 is formed by one or a plurality of stacked bundles 12 as a stacking unit stacked on one pallet 10 as shown in FIG. As an example, a case is shown in which four stacking bundles 112 are arranged two by two in the longitudinal and longitudinal directions and the width method to form a stacking unit 114 and stacked on the pallet 10).

As shown in FIG. 107, the pallet 1010
Is a loading plate 1 on which a stacked bundle 12 of lithographic printing plates 10 is loaded.
012, a bottom plate 1014 arranged in parallel with the loading plate 1012, and a plurality (nine in this embodiment) of leg portions 101 arranged between the loading plate 1012 and the bottom plate 1014.
6, and 6.

As shown in detail in FIG. 108, the loading plate 1
012 is formed by laminating a plurality of cardboards 1018 having the same shape in the thickness direction and bonding them with an adhesive such as general glue. In this embodiment, the number of cardboards 1018 constituting the stacking plate 1012 is five, but is not particularly limited. That is, as long as the load of the loading unit 1114 loaded on the loading plate 1012 (the total load of the stacked bundle 12) and the loads of the interior material 124 and the exterior material 116 can be supported, only one sheet may be used. However, in order to reliably support this load, it is preferable that a plurality of the base plates 1014 be stacked. Further, the cardboards 1018 constituting the loading plate 1012 do not necessarily have to have the same shape, and the loading plate 1012 may be configured by stacking cardboards 1018 of different shapes for each sheet.

[0658] As shown in Fig. 107, the width W1 and the length L1 of the loading plate 1012 are set to predetermined sizes so as to be slightly larger than those in which the periphery of the loading unit 1114 is surrounded by the exterior material 116. . More specifically, the width W1 and the length L1 of the loading plate 1012 are W1 with respect to the width W and the length L of the loading unit 1114 (see FIG. 109) and the thickness D of the exterior material 116 (see FIG. 110). > W
+ 2D (1) Within a range satisfying L1> L + 2D (2),
It is set so that it can be set in the accumulation device 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110, the periphery of the loading unit 1114 loaded on the loading plate 1012 is
The outer periphery of the stacking plate 1012 protrudes from the stacking unit 1114 in a state in which the stacking unit 1114 is mounted. This overhang is
The overhang portion 1020 in the present invention is provided. In addition, overhang part 1
020 is not necessary, W1 = W + 2D
(1) 'L1 = L + 2D (2)'.

In FIG. 108, the cardboard 10
The corrugated paperboards 1018 are laminated such that the wave directions of the inner shin 18 are all the same, but the wave direction of the inner shin is not particularly limited.
The inner lining 18 may be laminated so as to intersect (including orthogonal) with the inner lining of another cardboard 1018.
By stacking them in an intersecting manner, the strength of the loading plate 1012 does not decrease in a specific direction. By reducing the directionality of the strength (variation due to the direction) in this manner, an insertion portion 102 described later is formed.
When a fork of a forklift is inserted into and supported by the forklift 2, the fork can be inserted and supported from any direction.

[0660] The leg 1016 is made of a long corrugated cardboard 101.
8 is bent at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction at a right angle to form a rectangular spiral shape. The leg 1016 as a whole is formed so as to have a square tubular shape that is open upward and downward. The shape of the leg portion 1016 is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a block shape, a long girder shape, or the like. The shape is not particularly limited as long as it is a hollow cylindrical shape such as a cylindrical shape, so that a space is formed inside, so that the weight is reduced, and the amount of corrugated cardboard 1018 required to form the leg 1016 (leg portion) The length of the long corrugated cardboard 1018 before forming the 1016) is also reduced. In addition, the strength required to support the load of the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 acting via the loading plate 1012 can be maintained.

Also, the configuration of the rectangular tube is not limited to the above-mentioned spiral shape, but by making the spiral shape, the legs 1016 can be constituted by the integrated corrugated cardboard 1018, so that the number of parts can be reduced and , Leg 1016
Molding becomes easier.

The legs 1016 are arranged at a predetermined interval from each other, and the adjacent legs 1016 and the loading plate 1
An insertion hole 1022 is formed between the 012 and the bottom plate 1014. This insertion hole 1022 is
The forklift is configured to have a predetermined shape so that a fork of a forklift carrying the fork 0 can be inserted.

The bottom plate 1014 is made of a cardboard having substantially the same shape as the cardboard constituting the loading plate 1012. The number of cardboards constituting the bottom plate 1014 is not particularly limited, and a plurality of cardboards may be stacked in the thickness direction, but in the present embodiment, the cardboard is constituted by one cardboard.

The loading plate 1012 and the leg 1016, and the leg 1016 and the bottom plate 1014 are adhered with an adhesive such as general glue so that they are not separated carelessly or displaced. The leg 1016 is provided on the loading plate 1.
012 and the bottom plate 1014 are fixed from both sides and connected to each other.
2 can be reliably supported.

When the pallet 10 is loaded with the stacked bundles 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10 for packaging (interior and exterior), first, the pallets 10 are stacked on a stacking unit 1320 of a lithographic printing plate 10 manufacturing line 1310 shown in FIG. Set to a predetermined position. The shape of the pallet 10 is larger than that of the stacking unit 1114 constituted by the stacked bundles 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10, but to a lesser extent, without changing the structure and shape of the stacking device 1320. Can be set directly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109, the lower interior material 1124A is placed substantially at the center of the upper surface of the loading plate 1012. This lower interior material 1124A is formed larger than the bottom surface of the stacking unit 1114 by paper having moisture-proof and light-shielding properties. The lower interior material 1124A is the loading plate 101
Although it may be simply placed on the surface 2, it is preferable to fix it with an adhesive or an adhesive tape.

When the production line 1310 is operated, the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10 is directly loaded on the pallet 1010, and the loading unit 1114 is formed. Since the lower interior material 1124A is formed larger than the bottom surface of the loading unit 1114, the outer edge portion of the lower interior material 1124A protrudes from the loading unit 1114. in this way,
Laminate bundle 12 of lithographic printing plate 10 directly on pallet 1010
Are loaded to form the loading unit 1114,
There is no need to temporarily accumulate from the accumulating device 1320 on another pallet and then reload it on the pallet 10, so that the accumulating operation can be performed efficiently.

After the stacked bundle 12 is stacked on the stacking plate 1012 to form the stacking unit 1114, the lower interior material 1124 is formed.
The protruding portion of A is bent upward along the loading unit 1114, and the outer peripheral surface of the loading unit 1114 (the front surface 11)
14A, rear surface 1114B and side surface 1114C). Thereby, a part (or all) of the bottom surface and the outer peripheral surface of the loading unit 1114 is installed.

[0669] The upper interior material 1124B is placed substantially at the center of the top surface of the loading unit 1114. This upper interior material 1
124B is also formed of paper of the same material as the lower interior material 1124A, and when a portion protruding outside from the top surface of the loading unit 1114 is bent so as to be in surface contact with the outer peripheral surface of the loading unit 1114, the lower side is obtained. Interior materials 112
It has a predetermined size so as to partially overlap 4A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 110, after bending the upper interior material 1124B, the overlapping portion of the upper interior material 1124B and the lower interior material 1124A is
Due to 126, it is fixed over the entire circumference of the loading unit 1114. As a result, the loading unit 1114 moves the interior material 1124 (the upper interior material 1124B and the lower interior material 112
4A) completely surrounds and is completely moisture-proof and light-shielded (so-called complete moisture-proof). That is, the lithographic printing plate 10
Due to its nature, it is sensitive in the visible light wavelength band, so light shielding is required. Further, even when a heat-sensitive printing plate is used in place of the lithographic printing plate 10, appropriate heat-shielding is performed since the heat energy of the applied light may alter the heat-sensitive layer or cause a change in sensitivity due to the progress of the reaction. Is preferred. In addition, under high humidity, in both printing plates, the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer is deteriorated, so that problems such as a change in sensitivity and adhesion to the interleaf paper 14 or an adjacent printing plate are likely to occur. Need to be done. Therefore, as mentioned above,
Since the planographic printing plate 10 (photosensitive printing plate or heat-sensitive printing plate) is completely moisture-proof and shaded by the interior material 1124,
All of the above problems can be solved. In addition,
Either of the upper interior material 1124B and the lower interior material 1124A may be on the outside.

[0671] In this way, the fork of the forklift is inserted into the insertion hole 1022 formed between the legs 1016 of the pallet 1010 in a state where the loading unit 1114 is housed by the interior material 1124 and completely moisture-proof.
While the stacked bundle 12 is placed on the loading plate 1012,
The pallet 1010 is separated from the production line 1310.
At this time, in the case of the loading plate 1012 configured so that the wave direction of the shin of at least one cardboard 1018 intersects with the wave direction of the shin of another cardboard 1018, the strength direction (variation due to the direction) ), The fork can be inserted and supported from any direction. Note that the pallet 1010 on which the loading unit 1114 is loaded may be separated from the production line 1310 and then housed. In this case, the production line 131
After laying the lower interior material 1124A on the stacking plate 1012 outside the stacking unit 10, the stacking unit 1114 on which the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10 is stacked can be configured.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111, the periphery of the loading unit 1114 is packaged with a package 1116.
In this embodiment, the exterior material 1116 is composed of two sets of side exterior materials 1118 each having two pieces of corrugated cardboard bonded thereto.
And a top surface exterior material 1128 on which two pieces of cardboard are similarly bonded. The inner corrugated cardboard of the two cardboards constituting the side surface exterior material 1118 has substantially the same height as the loading unit 1114, and the outer corrugated cardboard is higher than the inner cardboard by the thickness of the top surface exterior material 1128 described later. Is also higher. In addition, the side exterior material 1
The 118 and the top surface exterior material 1128 do not necessarily need to be formed by bonding two pieces of cardboard, but may be formed by bonding three or more pieces or by one piece. Further, it is not always necessary to bond them.

[0673] The loading unit 1114 in which the two sets of side exterior materials 1118 are respectively housed by interior materials 1124 is provided.
The front surface 1114A and the rear surface 1114B (both in FIG.
9), and the portion protruding from both sides in the width direction of the stacking unit 1114 is bent to form the stacking unit 11.
14 is brought into surface contact with the side surface 1114C (see FIG. 109). At this time, the loading plate 1012 is
Is larger than the above formulas (1) and (2), so that the side surface exterior material 1 is provided on the upper surface of the loading plate 1012 at a portion protruding outside the loading unit 1114.
The exterior work can be easily performed by positioning the lower end 116 against the lower end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112, the top surface of the loading unit 1114 is covered with a top surface exterior material 1128. The top surface exterior material 1128 is formed in a predetermined shape so as to be housed without a gap inside the outer cardboard constituting the side surface exterior material 1118. Therefore, the top surface exterior material 1128
Are the top and side exterior materials 111 of the loading unit 1114
8 is arranged in contact with the upper side of the inner cardboard. Then, the side surface exterior member 1118 and the stacking plate 1012, and the side surface exterior member 1118 and the top surface exterior member 1128 are fixed with an adhesive tape 1126. As a result, the exterior material 1116 is configured by integrating the top exterior material 1128 and the side exterior material 1118.

The relationship between the shape and height of the side surface exterior member 1118 and the shape and thickness of the top surface exterior member 1128 is not limited to the above. For example, the side exterior material 1118
The height of the corrugated cardboard constituting the
114 and the thickness of the top surface exterior material 1128 (when the side surface exterior material 1118 is composed of a plurality of cardboards, the height of all the cardboards is the same). Inside, loaded loading unit 1
114 so as to be placed on the upper surface of
May be placed.

Also, the height of the corrugated cardboard forming the side exterior material 1118 is set to be the same as the height of the loaded stacking unit 1114 (when the side exterior material 1118 is composed of a plurality of cardboards, The height is the same), and both the upper side of the side exterior material 1118 and the upper surface of the loaded loading unit 1114 are provided with the top exterior material 1128.
May be placed.

[0677] Further, when the side exterior material 1118 and the top surface exterior material 1128 are formed by stacking a plurality of cardboards in the thickness direction, the height of the cardboard constituting the side exterior material 1118 is increased from the inside to the outside. The upper side of the side surface exterior material 1118 may be formed stepwise. And the top surface exterior material 1128 is also the side exterior material 111.
8 is formed stepwise from the lower side to the upper side in accordance with the shape of the upper side of the base member 8 so as to be stepwise downward, and the side exterior material 1118 and the top exterior material 1128 are each formed in a step shape. The top exterior material 112 is placed on the upper surface of the loading unit 1114 so that
8 may be placed.

[0678] The top surface exterior material 1128 is
8 may be formed so as to extend further outward. In this case, in particular, a band 112 described later is used.
When fixed by 0 or the like, it is possible to prevent a local load from acting on the sides and corners of the lithographic printing plate 10 and prevent the lithographic printing plate 10 from being deformed or damaged. Also, the interior material 1124
It is also possible to prevent the interior material 1112 from being damaged and maintain the light-shielding property and moisture-proof property.

[0679] The side exterior member 1118 does not need to be divided into two as described above, and the configuration is not particularly limited as long as the outer peripheral surface of the loaded stacking unit 1114 can be exteriorized. . For example, loading unit 1
Four side exterior members are formed so as to cover the outer peripheral surface of the stacking unit 114, respectively.
4 may be arranged so as to cover from above. The size of the side exterior material 1118 is set to a size such that a predetermined gap is formed between the loaded exterior unit 1114 and another exterior material (for example, a cushioning material or the like) is newly added to the gap after the side exterior material 1118 is attached. ) May be inserted.

[0680] Thereafter, the periphery of the exterior material 1116 is surrounded by a resin cover 1122. As a result, the exterior material 1116 and the laminated bundle 12 are removed from moisture, dust, rain, etc. in the air.
(Lithographic printing plate 10) is protected. The interior material 112
When the laminated bundle 12 (lithographic printing plate 10) is reliably protected from moisture, dust, rain, and the like in the air by the cover material 4 and the exterior material 1116, the cover 1122 may be omitted.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 113, the cover 1
The loading unit 1114 and the pallet 1010, which are surrounded by 122 and the exterior material 1116, are fixed by a resin or metal band 1120 (in FIG. 113, two vertical and horizontal bands are used, but not limited to three or more). I do. Thereby, the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is
However, the pallet 1010 is prevented from being displaced or falling off, and handling such as transportation and storage can be easily performed. Note that the cover 1122 may be attached after fixing the exterior material 1116 and the pallet 1010 with the band 1120.

[0688] In this way, the stacked bundles 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10 are stacked on the pallet 1010 and the stacking units 11
14 and is integrated with the pallet 1010. Therefore, when the pallet 1010 is to be mounted on another transportation means during transportation (for example, when the pallet is mounted on another truck, a railcar, a ship, or the like), the pallet 1010 is used. It can be performed every time, and work efficiency is excellent. In this state, the loading plate 1
Since a portion around 012 protrudes from the loading unit 1114 and the exterior material 1116 as an overhang 1020, even if foreign matter hits the pallet 1010 from outside during transportation, the foreign matter hits the stacked bundle 12 by the overhang 1020. The lithographic printing plate 10 is protected. In particular, since the lithographic printing plate 10 (photosensitive printing plate or heat-sensitive printing plate) loaded on the pallet 1010 has a single thin plate shape, deformation or scratches are formed on the corners, sides or inside. If there is
There are problems such as blurring of an image when developed by exposure to light or heat, and unevenness of ink when printed. Therefore, the packaging material needs to have such rigidity and strength that no deformation or the like remains on the printing plate during transportation. By loading and transporting the pallet 1010, the above-described deformation and damage can be prevented.

[0684] A plurality of pallets 1010 on which the loading units 1114 are loaded can also be stacked in the height direction. In this case, the bottom plate 1014 of the pallet 1010
Is a top surface exterior material 1128 immediately below the pallet 1010.
And the leg 1016 is not in direct contact. That is, since the load of the pallet 1010 and the loading unit 1114 above the loading unit 1114 acts on the entire upper surface and the load is dispersed, the loading unit 1114
14 are protected. Further, a plurality of pallets 1010 on which the loading units 1114 are loaded can be arranged in the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, and the vertical direction, and further loaded on another large pallet.

When the lithographic printing plate 10 is to be used at the transport destination by loading it into the device, the band 1120 is released (if the cover 1122 is attached, the cover 1122 is not used).
Is also removed), and the exterior material 1116 is opened. Pallet 1
Since the loading plate 1012 of 010 is formed slightly larger than the loading unit 1114, the pallet 1010
Can be directly set on the device with the stacked bundles 12 loaded thereon. Of course, the stacked bundle 12 may be taken out of the pallet 1010 and set on the device. In this way, in order to directly set the stacking device on the device, the stacking plate 1012 may be formed to have the same size or smaller than the stacking unit 1114.

When the stacked bundles 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10 loaded on the pallet 1010 are all loaded into the apparatus, only the pallet 1010 remains. When the pallet 1010 maintains a certain shape and strength, the pallet 1010 can be reused. However, even when the pallet 1010 cannot be reused, the loading plate 1012, the legs 1016, and the bottom plate 1014 constituting the pallet 1010 are all formed of corrugated cardboard. So they can be recycled. Also, disposal can be facilitated.

The lower interior material 1124A does not need to have a size protruding from the loading unit 1114, and may be approximately the same size as the loading unit 1114. In this case, the upper interior material 1124B is
Is formed large enough to reach the upper interior material 11.
The so-called high moisture-proof interior can be obtained by fixing 24B to the upper surface of the loading plate 1012 (the portion forming the overhang portion 1020) or the outer peripheral surface with an adhesive tape. In addition, the lower interior material 1124A may be omitted to provide a so-called general moisture-proof interior.

FIG. 114 shows a pallet 1030 different from those shown in FIGS. 107 to 113. This pallet 1030 differs from the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS. 107 to 113 only in the configuration of the loading member on which the loading unit 1114 is loaded. Hereafter, pallet 1
The same components and members as those of 010 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

[0688] In this pallet 1030, the pallet 10
The loading plate 10 having the same configuration as the loading plate 1012 of FIG.
In addition, a step portion 1032 formed by stacking a plurality of cardboards in the thickness direction is formed at the center of the stacking plate 1012. Step 103
The width W2 and the length L2 of the second unit 2 are formed to be the same as the width W and the length L of the loading unit 1114 (see FIG. 109). Loading plate 1012 and step 1032
Constitute a stacking member.

When stacking the stacked bundles 12 on the pallet 1030, the stacking device 1320 of the manufacturing line 1310 is used.
(See FIG. 119) Positioning Guide 1332 Provided
(Indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 114) is arranged in contact with the outer peripheral portion 1032A of the step portion 1032. Positioning guide 13
The height of 32 is higher than the height of the step 1032,
When placing the stacked bundle 12 on the step 1032, the stacked bundle 1
2 hits the positioning guide 1332 and is positioned. In addition, the positioning guide 1332 is
It is also possible to dispose at both ends in the longitudinal direction.

[0690] Unlike the pallet 1010 shown in Figs. 107 to 113, the lower interior material 1124A (Fig.
9), the stacked bundle 12 is directly placed on the step 1032. As shown in FIG. 115, a predetermined number of stacked bundles 12
When the loading unit 1114 is configured by this, the upper interior material 1124B is placed on the top surface of the loading unit 1114.
The upper interior material 1124B has a portion protruding outward from the top surface of the loading unit 1114.
Outer surface (front surface 1114A, rear surface 1114B, side surface 11)
14C), the step 103
2 has a predetermined size so as to reach the outer peripheral portion 1032A.

The upper interior material 1124B and the outer peripheral portion 1032A of the step portion 1032 are fixed with the adhesive tape 1126 (see FIG. 109) over the entire circumference of the stacking unit 1114.
At this time, the step portion 1032 is formed in a predetermined size so as to have the same width W2 and length L2 as the width W and length L of the loading unit 1114.
And the outer peripheral portion 1032A of the step portion 1032 are flush with each other, so that the upper interior material 1124B is brought into surface contact with both of them, so that the interior can be easily installed. Further, by making the upper interior material 1124B sufficiently large, the lower end thereof can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the loading plate 1012, and the interior work becomes easier. Also, the upper interior material 11
Since the loading unit 1114 is housed in the inside of 24B without any gap by surface contact, the loading unit 1114
114 is securely fixed to the pallet 1030.
The upper interior material 1124B may be fixed to the upper surface or the outer peripheral surface of the loading plate 1012 with an adhesive tape 1126.

[0691] In this way, the loading unit 1114 is mounted with the interior material 1124 (upper interior material 1124B), and the pallet 1030 is so-called highly moisture-proof.
And the loading unit 1114 is separated from the production line.
Note that, similarly to the case of the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS. 107 to 113, the pallet 1030 loaded with the loading unit 1114 may be installed after being separated from the production line 1310, and in this case, the pallet 1030 may be installed outside the production line 1310. After laying the side interior material 1124A on the loading plate 1012, the loading unit 1114 can be configured.

Then, similarly to the example shown in FIGS. 107 to 113, the loading unit 1114 is
Exterior. At this time, since the lower side of the side surface exterior material 1116 can be disposed in surface contact with the outer peripheral portion of the step portion 1032, it is securely fixed to the step portion 1032 and does not misalign. Further, similarly to the case of the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS. 107 to 113, by using the band 1120 and the cover 1122, the stacked bundle 12 is more firmly fixed to the pallet 1030, and moisture, dust, rain, etc. Etc. can be more reliably protected.

Also, in this state, the outer edge of the loading plate 1012 becomes the overhanging portion 1020 projecting outward from the loading unit 1114 and the exterior material 1116, so that the loading unit 1114 is reliably protected.

[0695] Regarding the pallet 1030 of Fig. 114, the lower interior material 1124A is placed on the step portion 1032, the portion protruding from the loading unit 1114 is bent upward, and the overlapping portion with the upper interior material 1124B is adhesive tape 1126. By fixing the interior, a so-called completely moisture-proof interior may be provided.

FIG. 116 shows a pallet 1040 different from the above. This pallet 1040
Only the configuration of the loading member is different from that of the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS. Hereinafter, FIG.
The same components and members as those of the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS.

[0697] In this pallet 1040, the loading plate 101
A pair of fixed plates 1042 are erected perpendicularly from both ends in the width direction of No. 2, and a stacking member is constituted by the stacking plate 1012 and the fixed plate 1042. Distance D1 between fixing plates 1042
Is given by D1 = W + 2D in consideration of the width W of the loading unit 1114 and the thickness D of the interior material 1124 and the exterior material 1116.
(3) is set. Therefore, when the stacking unit 1114 is stacked on the stacking plate 1012, the portion of the stacking plate 1012 where the fixing plate 1042 is erected (near both ends in the width direction) and the fixing plate 1042 are stretched from the stacking unit 1114. The projecting portion 20 is provided.

When using the pallet 1040 to stack the stacked bundles 12 of the lithographic printing plates 10 sent out from the production line 1310 (see FIG. 119), the stacking plate 10
Since the stacked bundle 12 fed onto the stack 12 is positioned by being brought into contact with the fixing plate 1042, the stacking operation is facilitated.

[0699] Then, after the accumulation, the interior material 1124 is similar to the case of the pallet 1010 shown in Figs.
(The lower interior material 1124A and the upper interior material 1124B) completely and moisture-proof the loading unit 1114. Further, in the stacking state, the vicinity of both ends in the width direction of the stacking plate 1012 and the fixing plate 1042 act as the overhang portion 1020 which protrudes outside the stacked bundle 12.
0 protects the stacked bundle 12.

When the laminated bundle 12 is packaged using the package 1116 (see FIG. 110), the fixing plate 104
2 is set so as to satisfy the above formula (3), so that the package can be packaged by sandwiching the package 1116 between the stacked bundle 12 and the fixing plate 1042. As a result, the exterior material 1116 is held by the fixing plate 1042 from the outside, so that the exterior material 1116 does not shift. Then, the exterior material 1116 is fixed to the fixing plate 1042 with an adhesive tape 1126, so that the pallet 1040 is fixed.
Is securely fixed to Further, FIGS.
As in the case of the pallet 1010 shown in FIG.
By using the cover 20 and the cover 1122, the stacked bundle 12 can be more firmly fixed to the pallet 1040.

[0707] At both ends in the longitudinal direction of the loading plate 1012,
A fixed plate similar to the fixed plate 1042 may be provided upright. In this case, the distance D2 between the fixing plates is determined by considering the length L of the loading unit 1114 and the thickness D of the exterior material 1116, and D2 = L +
What is necessary is just to set so that 2D (4) may be satisfied.

Also, the interior is not limited to the completely moisture-proof interior described above.
A high-moisture-proof interior in which the lower interior material 1124A has substantially the same size as the bottom surface of the loading unit 1114, or the lower interior material 11
24A may be omitted to provide a general moisture-proof interior.

FIG. 117 shows a pallet 1050 that is further different from the one described above. This pallet 1
050, only the configuration of the loading member is shown in FIGS.
Is different from the pallet 1010 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, FIG.
The same components and members as those of the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS.

[0704] In this pallet 1050, the loading plate 105
2 from both ends in the longitudinal direction and both ends in the width direction.
The extension plates 1054, 1056 extend in the same plane as the above. A bending line 1058 (shown by a dashed line in FIG. 117) is formed at the boundary between the loading plate 1052 and the overhanging plates 1054, 1056.
Can be bent upward (the inside of the bending line 1058 acts as a substantial loading plate). Then, the overhang plate 10 is bent by the bending line 1058.
The length D of the loading unit 1114 is L, the width is W, and the exterior material 1116 is the same as the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS. Where D is the thickness of D
L + 2D (5) is set. Similarly, the interval D4 between the overhanging plates 1056 is D4 = W + 2D
(6) is set.

[0705] The specific structure of the folding line 1058 is not limited, as long as the overhanging plates 1054, 1056 can be bent upward. For example, a cut is made in the stacking plate 1052 from below. It can be easily bent by making it partially thin.

In the case where the stacked bundle 12 is stacked on the pallet 1050 to constitute the stacking unit 1114 and housed therein, first, the stacked bundle 12 is stacked on the stacking plate 1052 in a state where the overhanging plates 1054 and 1056 are not bent. To constitute a loading unit 1114 (see FIG. 109).
Similarly to the case of the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS. 07 to 113, the loading unit 1114 is mounted with the interior material 1124 (the lower interior material 1124A and the upper interior material 1124B). This interior may be any interior of complete moisture proof, high moisture proof and general moisture proof.

[0707] Further, an exterior material 1116 is arranged at a predetermined position and exteriorly mounted. Thereafter, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG.
56 is folded and the side surface 1114 of the loading unit 1114 is folded.
C (see FIG. 109). As a result, the overhanging plates 1054 and 1056 have the thickness corresponding to the thickness of the loading unit 11.
The loading unit 1114 is protected because it becomes an overhanging portion that projects outward from the outer material 14 and the exterior material 1116. Further, since the exterior material 1116 is held by the overhanging plates 1054 and 1056 from the outside, the exterior material 1116 does not shift. Then, the exterior material 1116 is firmly fixed to the pallet 1050 by being fixed to the overhanging plates 1054, 1056 with the adhesive tape 1126. Further, similarly to the case of the pallet 1010 shown in FIG. 107 to FIG. 113, the use of the band 1120 and the cover
It can be fixed to 50.

In this pallet 1050, only the overhang plate 1054 may be provided without providing the overhang plate 1056, or conversely, only the overhang plate 1056 may be provided without providing the overhang plate 1054. . Overhang plate 1054,
The shape of the 1056 is not limited to the above, and for example, the length of the overhang plate 1056 may be the same as the length L of the loading unit 1114. In addition, the length of the overhang plate 1054 may be the same as the width W of the loading unit 1114.

Further, the overhanging plates 1054 and 1056 may be bent in advance at a right angle or at an angle less than the right angle (obliquely), and then the stacked bundle 12 may be stacked. In this case, the stacked bundle 12 is positioned by the overhanging plates 1054, 1056 or the bending line 1058, so that the stacking operation becomes easy.

FIG. 118 shows still another pallet 10
70 is shown. This pallet 1070 differs from the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS. 107 to 113 only in the configuration of the loading member. Hereinafter, the same components and members as those of the pallet 1010 shown in FIGS. 107 to 113 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

[0711] In this pallet 1070, the loading plate 107
The size of the pallet 1 shown in FIGS.
Similarly to 010, it is formed so as to satisfy the above equations (1) and (2).

[0712] From both ends in the longitudinal direction of the loading plate 1072,
Along the center in the longitudinal direction, a plurality of accommodation portions 1074 having a fixed width (in this embodiment, the front surface 1072A of the stacking plate 1072)
And four from the rear surface 1072B, for a total of eight). The accommodation portion 1074 on the front surface 1072A side of the loading plate 1072 is open upward and toward the front surface 1072A. Similarly, the rear surface 1072 of the loading plate 1072
The housing part 1074 on the B side is open upward and toward the rear surface 1074B.

[0713] The position and shape of each accommodating portion 1074 are determined by the integration device 1320 (Fig. 11) of the manufacturing line 1310.
8) is provided in correspondence with the accumulation arm 1334 provided in the first embodiment. That is, the stacking device 1320 is provided with a stacking arm 1334 having a plurality of (two in FIG. 118) forks 1336, and the manufactured lithographic printing plate 10 is positioned and stacked on the stacking arm 1334. It has become so. When a predetermined number of the lithographic printing plates 10 are stacked to form the stacked bundle 12, the stacking arm 1334 moves to load the stacked bundle 12 on the stacking plate 1072 of the pallet 1070. At this time, the storage portion 1074 is opened upward and the fork 1336 of the stacking arm 1334 is stored in the storage portion 1074, so that the fork 1336 is
72 does not occur.

[0714] Also, since the accommodation portion 1074 is open toward the front surface 1072A or the rear surface 1072B of the loading plate 1072, the fork 1336 can be pulled out of the accommodation portion 1074 after the stacked bundle 12 is loaded on the loading plate 1072.

[0715] In this pallet 1070, FIG.
7 to 113 in the same manner as the pallet 1010 shown in FIG.
A stacking unit 1114 is configured on the stacking plate 1072, and the interior and exterior can be arranged by the interior material 1124 and the exterior material 1116. In particular, as described above, the accumulation arm 1
The stack 1 of the lithographic printing plate 10 on the fork 1336
2 can be stacked on the stacking plate 1072 and the fork 1336 can be pulled out from the accommodation portion 1074 as it is, thereby further facilitating the stacking operation. It should be noted that not only the fork 1336 of the stacking arm 1334 but also the fork of the forklift may be used.
72, and the fork can be pulled out of the storage portion 1074.

Also, the outer edge portion of the loading plate 1072 projects from the loading unit 1114 to the overhang portion 1020 (FIG. 110).
The lithographic printing plate 10 constituting the stacked bundle 12 is protected. However, the overhang portion 1020 is not necessarily provided like the pallet 10 of the first embodiment.

In the above description, the components constituting the pallet (loading plates 1012, 1052, 107
2, the bottom plate 1014, the leg 1016, the step portion 1032, and the fixing plate 1042) have all been made of corrugated cardboard, but the paper constituting these components is not limited to corrugated cardboard. That is, it is preferable that the paper be made of paper that can maintain a certain shape and strength required for supporting a load as a pallet and that can be easily recycled and discarded. For example, cardboard, kraft paper, paper-made honeycomb structure materials, and the like can be used, and further, these can be used in appropriate combination. The paper used may be different depending on each component. In any case, by forming with paper,
Compared to conventional metal or resin pallets, they are lighter in weight and easier to carry and store. In addition, since it is made of paper, it can be manufactured at low cost. Note that, even when the stacking plate is formed using paper other than corrugated cardboard, a plurality of papers must be stacked so that the direction of the eyes of at least one sheet intersects the direction of the eyes of the other paper. Thus, the directionality of the strength (variation due to the direction) is reduced, and the fork can be inserted and supported from any direction.

FIGS. 120 to 128 show a stacking structure of the lithographic printing plate 10 using two types of pallets having different sizes (small pallets and large pallets). The lithographic printing plate 10 loaded and packaged by this loading structure can be manufactured by a manufacturing line substantially similar to the manufacturing line 1310 shown in FIG. 119.

As shown in FIG. 123, the loading structure 201
Numeral 0 includes a small pallet 2012 on which the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plates 10 is loaded, and a large pallet 2014 on which a plurality of the small pallets 2012 are further loaded.

As shown in detail in FIG. 121, the small pallet 2012 includes a loading plate 2016 on which the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plates 10 is loaded, a bottom plate 2018 arranged in parallel with the loading plate 2016, and a loading plate. 2016 and bottom plate 201
And a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) legs 2020 arranged between the two.

[0721] The loading plate 2016 is formed by laminating a plurality of corrugated boards 2022 of the same shape in the thickness direction and bonding them with an adhesive such as general glue. Loading plate 201
Although the number of cardboards 2022 constituting 6 is five in the present embodiment, it is not particularly limited. That is,
Laminated bundle 1 of lithographic printing plate 10 loaded on loading plate 2016
12 (a small pallet 2012 on which a stacked bundle 112 of lithographic printing plates 10 is further loaded as described later)
If the load is loaded, the total load of these loads)
May be supported as long as it can support. However, in order to reliably support this load, it is preferable to stack more sheets than the bottom plate 2018.

The width W1 and the depth D1 of the loading plate 2016 are
The length is set to be the same as or slightly shorter than the width W and the depth D of the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10 (more precisely, the width W and the depth D of the lower surface of the stacked bundle 112). As a result, the small pallets 2012 can be
(See FIG. 119), and can be directly set on equipment using the lithographic printing plate 10.

The corrugated cardboard 2022 constituting the stacking plate 2016 does not necessarily have to have the same shape and configuration.
The stacking plates 2016 may be configured by stacking the stacking plates 22. In this case, when the stacked plate 112 and the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10 are viewed in a plan view, each of the cardboard boxes 2022 is so arranged that the stacked plate 2016 does not protrude outside the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10. By configuring the stacking plate 2016 by determining the shape and the relative position of the bonding, the small pallet 2012 can be directly set on the stacking device 320, the device using the lithographic printing plate 10, or the like.

[0724] In the case where the stacking plate 2016 is formed by laminating a plurality of corrugated boards 2022, the wave direction of the middle of the corrugated board 2022 is not particularly limited. For example, cardboard 2
The corrugated cardboards 2022 may be laminated so that the wave directions of the inner carcass 022 are all in the same direction, but at least one corrugated cardboard 2022 intersects the inner corrugated cardboard 2022 ( (Including orthogonal). By stacking in such a manner that they intersect with each other, the strength of the loading plate 2016 does not decrease in a specific direction.

[0725] The leg 2020 is a long cardboard 202.
2 is bent in a predetermined direction at a predetermined position to form a rectangular spiral. The entire leg 2020 is formed so as to have a square tubular shape that is open upward and outward. With such a cylindrical shape, a space is formed inside, so that the weight is reduced, and the amount of the corrugated cardboard 2022 required for forming the leg 2020 is also reduced. Further, the strength required for supporting the load of the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10 acting via the loading plate 2016 can be maintained.

The legs 2020 are arranged at a predetermined interval from each other, and an insertion hole 202 is provided between the adjacent legs 2020 and the loading plate 2016 and the bottom plate 2018.
4 are configured. The insertion hole 2024 has a predetermined shape so that a fork of a hand lift or a forklift (both not shown) for handling (particularly, carrying) the small pallet 2012 can be inserted.

[0727] The bottom plate 2018 is made of a cardboard 2022 having the same shape as the cardboard 2022 constituting the stacking plate 2016. Like the stacking plate 2016, the bottom plate 2018 may protrude from the stacked bundle 112 of the planographic printing plate 10 when viewed in plan. There is no shape. The number of cardboards 2022 forming the bottom plate 2018 is not particularly limited, and a plurality of cardboards 20 may be stacked in the thickness direction.
In the example shown in FIG. 1, one small cardboard 2022 is used to reduce the weight of the small pallet 2012.

[0727] The loading plate 2016 and the leg 2020, and the leg 2020 and the bottom plate 2018 are adhered with an adhesive such as general glue so that they are not separated carelessly or displaced. Further, since the leg portions 2020 are fixed from both sides by the loading plate 2016 and the bottom plate 2018 and are connected to each other, the loading plate 2016 on which the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is loaded can be securely mounted. Can be supported.

As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the large pallet 2014 is composed of a loading plate 2026 on which a small pallet 2012 on which the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is loaded, and a parallel loading plate 2026. A plurality of (nine in the present embodiment) legs 2028 disposed between the bottom plate 2028 and the loading plate 2026 and the bottom plate 2028.
30. These loading plates 2026,
Both the bottom plate 2028 and the leg 2030 are made of wood.

As shown in FIG. 123, two small pallets 2012 are loaded on the loading plate 2026 in the width direction and the depth direction, respectively, and the outside of the small pallet 2012 and the space between the small pallets 2012. In a state where cushioning materials 2032 and 2034 to be described later are arranged, they are formed in a rectangular plate shape so as to protrude outward from the outer cushioning material 2032. The overhanging portion becomes the overhang portion 2036 in the present invention. Also,
The loading plate 2026 is a small pallet 2 on which the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is loaded on the loading plate 2026 in this way.
012 are loaded in total, and the cushioning material 2032,
In a state where the 2034 is arranged, the strength is constant so as to bear the weight of the whole. The thickness of the loading plate 2026 is not particularly limited as long as it has a certain strength. In addition, the loading plate 2026 may be configured by one plate material, or may be configured by stacking a plurality of plate materials in the thickness direction. When laminating a plurality of plate materials, by laminating them so that the directions of the plates (grain direction) intersect, the variation in strength depending on the direction is reduced,
By increasing the strength as a whole, even if the weight of the entire load becomes large, it is possible to secure sufficient strength to withstand this weight.

[0731] The leg portion 2030 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the small pallet 2012 loaded on the loading plate 2026,
It has a certain strength capable of supporting the load of the whole of the loads loaded on the loading plate 2026, such as the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10, the cushioning material 2032, and the like. Note that the leg portion 2030 may be formed in a cylindrical shape that is opened upward and downward, so as to achieve both strength maintenance and weight reduction.

[0732] The legs 2030 are arranged at a predetermined interval from each other, and the insertion hole 203 is provided between the adjacent legs 2030 and the loading plate 2026 and the bottom plate 2028.
8 are configured. The insertion hole 2038 has a predetermined shape so that a fork of a forklift (not shown) for handling (particularly, carrying) the large pallet 2014 can be inserted.

[0731] The bottom plate 2028 is formed in a plate shape having substantially the same shape as the loading plate 2026. The thickness of the bottom plate 2028 is not particularly limited. For example, the bottom plate 2028 may have the same configuration as the loading plate 2026, but may be configured to be thinner than the loading plate 2026 to reduce the weight of the large pallet 2014. .

[0734] The bottom plate 2028 itself has an insertion hole 2040 into which a fork of a hand lift for handling a large pallet 2014 can be inserted by partially reducing the thickness from the bottom side. When the use of the hand lift is not considered, the insertion hole 2040 may not be formed.

As shown in FIG. 123, the large pallet 201
The cushioning materials 2032 and 2034 are provided on the outside of the small pallets 2012 loaded on
Is arranged. Further, when the small pallets 2012 are stacked in the vertical direction, the cushioning material 2034 is also arranged between the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plates 10 stacked on the lower small pallet 2012 and the upper small pallet 2012. You. The cushioning materials 2032 and 2034 are formed of a deformable material such as cardboard,
When an impact is externally applied to the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plates 10 on the 012 or when the bundles of the lithographic printing plates 10 approach each other, the lithographic printing plates 10 are deformed and absorb energy, and the deformation of the lithographic printing plates 10 is reduced. Prevent damage. The cushioning material 2032
The deformation of the lithographic printing plate 1
It is sufficient that deformation and damage of 0 can be prevented, and it may be plastic deformation or elastic deformation.

Next, with this loading structure 2010,
A method of stacking the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10 and an operation of the stack structure 2010 will be described.

First, the small pallet 2012 is set at a predetermined position of the stacking device 320 shown in FIG. Loading plate 2
Since the width W1 and the depth D1 of 016 are set to be slightly shorter than or substantially equal to the width W and the depth D of the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10, the accumulating device 320 is used. The small pallet 2012 can be positioned at a predetermined position of the stacking device 320 and set directly without changing the structure or shape of the small pallet.

When the production line 310 is operated, the slip sheet 3
The lithographic printing plate 10 with the small pallet 2012
A stacked bundle 112 which is directly stacked on the top and in which the lithographic printing plates 10 and the interleaving sheets 330 are alternately stacked is configured. of course,
Instead of setting the small pallets 2012 on the stacking device 320, the lithographic printing plates 10 may be stacked by, for example, a manual operation to form the stacked bundle 112.

Here, as shown in FIG. 121, the protective cardboard 114 is placed on the stacked bundle 112. This protective cardboard 1
14 and the large pallet 201
The lithographic printing plate 10 is protected from external force acting on the lithographic printing plate 10 at the time of loading work on the lithographic printing plate 4 or opening work at a transport destination. For example, even when a sharp blade or the like is used for the opening operation, the lithographic printing plate 10 is prevented from being damaged. Further, in the case where the stacked bundle 112 is constituted by the lithographic printing plates 10 to which the interleaving paper 330 is not bonded, it is possible to prevent the surface of the lithographic printing plates 10 from being stained, adhered to dust, and the like. If necessary, the protective cardboard 114 may be inserted not only at the top and bottom of the stacked bundle 112 but also at every fixed number of lithographic printing plates 10 (for example, every 30 sheets or every 50 sheets).

Next, as shown in FIG.
2 and the cardboard for protection 114 are wrapped with a wrapping paper 2116. The interior paper 2116 is made of paper having a light-shielding property and a moisture-proof property. When the interior paper 2116 is covered from above the stacked bundle 112 and folded down as shown in FIG. Loading plate 20
It has a predetermined size so as to reach 16 side surfaces.
This contact portion extends over the entire circumference of the small pallet 2012
By fixing with the fixing means such as the kraft adhesive tape 2118, the lithographic printing plate 10 is embedded with the interior paper 2116, and is protected from moisture and light. That is, since the photosensitive printing plate is sensitive in the visible light wavelength band due to its properties, light shielding is required. Also, in the heat-sensitive printing plate, the heat-sensitive layer may be degraded by the heat energy of the applied light, or the sensitivity may be changed by the progress of the reaction. In addition, under high humidity, in any printing plate, the photosensitive layer or the heat-sensitive layer is deteriorated, so that a problem such as a change in sensitivity or adhesion to the interleaving paper 330 or an adjacent printing plate tends to occur. Need to be done. Therefore, as described above, since the planographic printing plate 10 (or the heat-sensitive printing plate) is moisture-proof and light-shielded by being covered with the interior paper 2116, all the above-mentioned problems are solved.

[0741] Further, by embedding the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plates 10 with the interior paper 2116, the plurality of lithographic printing plates 10 are substantially integrated, and
12 are also integrated. For this reason, the handling of the small pallets 2012 is easy.

[0741] In this manner, the lithographic printing plate 10 is stacked on the small pallet 2012 to form the stacked bundle 112, and the pallet printing plate 10 is loaded with the interior paper 2116. A small pallet 2012 is transported onto a large pallet 2014 by inserting a fork (not shown) of a hand lift for use. At this time, when the wave direction of the shin of the at least one cardboard 2022 constituting the loading plate 2016 intersects with the wave direction of the shin of the other cardboard 2022, the directionality of the strength (variation due to the direction). , The fork can be inserted into the insertion hole 2024 from any direction to support the small pallet 2012. Note that a fork of a forklift may be inserted into the insertion hole 2024, and the small pallet 2012 may be transported by the forklift.

[0743] Then, as shown in Fig. 123, a plurality of the small pallets 2012 are arranged on the large pallet 2014 in at least one of the width direction, the depth direction, and the height direction (Fig. 1).
23, two in each direction).
A plurality (eight in FIG. 123) of small pallets 2012 as a whole
Are loaded on the loading plate 2026 of the large pallet 2014.
In the process of arranging the small pallets 2012, the cushioning material 20
34 between adjacent stacked pallets 112 of the lithographic printing plates 10 (more precisely, between the inner sheets 2116 that house the stacked bunches 112 of the lithographic printing plates 10) and the lower small pallet 2012
The upper lithographic printing plate 10 is arranged between the stacked bundle 112 and the upper small pallet 2012. In addition, small pallet 2012
The cushioning material 2032 is also arranged on the outer side and the upper side. Thus, when an external shock is applied to the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plates 10 or when the bundles of the lithographic printing plates 10 approach each other, the cushioning materials 2032 and 34 are deformed to absorb energy. Therefore, deformation and damage of the lithographic printing plate 10 can be prevented.

As can be seen from FIG. 124, with a predetermined number of small pallets 2012 stacked on the large pallet 2014, the peripheral portion of the loading plate 2026 of the large pallet 2014 projects outward from the small pallet 2012. An overhang portion 2036 is provided. Therefore, in the subsequent handling of a load such as transportation, even if foreign matter hits the large pallet 2014 from the outside, the foreign matter only hits the overhang portion 2036 and does not hit the planographic printing plate 10, and the planographic printing plate 10 is protected.
In particular, since the lithographic printing plate 10 (or heat-sensitive printing plate) loaded on the large pallet 2014 of the present embodiment has a single thin plate shape, if there is any deformation or scratch on the corners, sides, or inside, In addition, problems such as blurring of an image when developed by exposure to light or heat, and non-uniformity of ink when printed are likely to occur. The stacking structure 2010 of the present embodiment has sufficient rigidity and strength so that no deformation or the like remains on the printing plate, so that the above-described deformation and scratches are reliably prevented.

[0745] Then, as shown in FIG.
The exterior material 2120 is placed on the upper side of 032, and the exterior material 2122 is arranged outside the cushioning material 2032.
The exterior material 2122 arranged outside the cushioning material 2032 is substantially L-shaped in plan view. As can be seen from FIG. 125, the exterior material 2122 is located at the center of each side of the large pallet 2014. Gap 1 between the tips of
24 are configured. In this state, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 20, the exterior materials 2120 and 122 and the exterior material 2122 and the large pallet 2014 are temporarily fixed with the kraft adhesive tape 2118, and the exterior materials 21
Stretch film 2126 from the outside of 20, 122
(In FIG. 120, for convenience of illustration, it is indicated by a two-dot chain line). Note that, instead of the stretch film 2126, it may be bound with a belt or the like used for general packing or the like.

[0746] Further, two ester bands 2128 are arranged on the long side and the short side of the large pallet 2014, respectively.
By tightening the ester band 2128, the exterior material 2120, the cushioning material 2032, the small pallet 2012, the stacked bundle 112, and the like are fixed to the large pallet 2014. At this time, due to the binding force from the stretch film 2126 and the fastening force from the ester band 2128, the direction in which the exterior material 2120 closes the gap 124 (the large pallet 20)
14 in the width direction, the depth direction, or the direction in which these are combined vectorwise), for example, the biting of the ester band 2128 into the exterior material 2122 is reduced, and the binding force of the stretch film 2126 and the binding force of the ester band 2128 are reduced. The tightening force is applied to the exterior material 2122 and the cushioning material 20.
32, the small pallet 2012, the stacked bundle 112, etc., effectively act as a force for fixing the large pallet 2014. As a result, during the transportation, the stacked bundle 112 and the exterior material 2122 are displaced with respect to the large pallet 2014, or the exterior material 21
The misalignment of the stacked bundle 112 inside the inside 22 is prevented.

[0747] In addition, the exterior material 2122 covers the small pallet 2012 and the stacked bundle 112 from the outside, and these are surely protected from external force. The width of the gap 124 depends on the binding force of the stretch film 2126 and the fastening force of the ester band 2128.
It is preferable to make the distance as small as possible within a range larger than the movement amount of the lens 22. In other words, by reducing the width of the gap, the exterior material 2122 covers the side surface of the stacked bundle 112 over substantially the entire circumference, so that the stacked bundle 112 can be protected more effectively.

[0748] In this way, the small pallet 2012 on which the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is stacked is replaced with the large pallet 2
The large pallet 2
Since cargo handling such as transportation and storage can be performed by using the unit 014 as a unit, the number of times of handling the cargo is reduced as compared with the case where the cargo is handled by using the small pallet 2012 as a unit, and handling becomes easy. Also, the insertion hole 2038 of the large pallet 2014
The forklift has a shape corresponding to the fork of the forklift, so that it is possible to handle the load using the forklift. In addition, even in the case of loading on another transportation means during transportation (for example, switching from a truck to another truck, a railway car, a ship, or the like), the entire pallet 2014 can be carried out using a forklift. Excellent efficiency.

[0749] When the lithographic printing plate 10 is used by being loaded in an apparatus at the transport destination, first, the ester band 21 is used.
28 and the stretch film 2126 are removed, and the exterior materials 2120 and 2122 and the cushioning material 2032 are also removed. This makes it possible to handle each individual small pallet 2012, for example, a small amount or
Even with a small size lithographic printing plate 10, in small units,
By using a hand lift or the like, it is possible to transport to a predetermined position.

Since the loading plate 2016 and the bottom plate 2018 of the small pallet 2012 are formed to be the same as or slightly smaller than the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10, the lithographic printing plate 10 is loaded on the small pallet 2012. ,
The lithographic printing plate 10 can be directly set on a device or the like.
The removal of the interior paper 2116 may be performed after the small pallet 2012 is set in the device. However, if a certain condition (for example, a dark room) is satisfied in the work space, the device may be removed from the device. It may be removed before setting. Of course, the interior paper 2116 may be removed on the small pallet 2012, and thereafter, only the stack 112 of the planographic printing plates 10 may be directly lifted by an operator and loaded into the device.

When all the lithographic printing plates 10 loaded on the small pallet 2012 are loaded into the device, the small pallet 20
12 remain. When the small pallet 2012 has a certain shape and strength, it can be reused. However, even when the small pallet 2012 cannot be reused, the loading plate 2016, the legs 2020, and the bottom plate 2018 that constitute the small pallet 2012 are all cardboard boxes 20. It can be recycled because it is made of Also, disposal can be facilitated.

[0752] From the large pallet 2014 to the small pallet 201
When all 2 are unloaded, the large pallet 2014 remains,
The loading plate 2026 and the leg 2 that constitute the large pallet 2014
030 and the bottom plate 2028 are both made of wood, and their shape and strength do not change even after long-term use. Therefore, the large pallet 2014 can be reused for a long time. In addition, even when the large pallet 2014 cannot be reused in the end, it is made of wood.
Can be easily discarded.

As described above, in the loading structure 2010 shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of the small pallets 2012 on which the stacked bundle 112 (load) of the lithographic printing plates 10 are loaded are further loaded on the large pallet 2014. Large pallet 201
4 makes it possible to handle a large number of lithographic printing plates 10 in a lump. Compared to the case where the lithographic printing plate 10 is loaded on the small pallet 2012 and handled as a load, the number of times the load is handled is reduced, so that the handling is facilitated. In particular,
Even the lithographic printing plate 10 having a small size can be handled in a lump in a large amount. In addition, the time required for handling the lithographic printing plate 10 and preparation for loading the lithographic printing plate 10 into a device using the lithographic printing plate 10 is substantially reduced.
Note that, as described above, the specific configuration in which the plurality of small pallets 2012 are stacked on the large pallet 2014 is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the small pallet 201 is placed in one of the width direction and the depth direction of the large pallet 2014.
Only one of the two may be arranged. In addition, large pallets 20
A plurality of small pallets 2012 may be stacked on the large pallet 2014 by arranging only one small pallet 2012 in the width direction and the depth direction of 14 and stacking a plurality of small pallets 2012 in the height direction.

In addition, the structure for loading the lithographic printing plate 10 on the small pallet 2012 is not limited to the above. For example, a plurality of lithographic printing plates 10 may be arranged and stacked in at least one of the width direction and the depth direction.

Also, since the small pallet 2012 is made of paper (made of corrugated cardboard), it becomes lighter in weight as compared with a material using other materials (for example, metal or resin), so that transportation becomes easy. In addition, the use of paper makes it possible to supply inexpensively.

Further, compared to the case where the lithographic printing plate 10 is packed using a cardboard box as in the related art, the labor for unpacking the cardboard box is not required, so that the unsealing operation is facilitated. There is no waste of cardboard after opening.

FIG. 126 shows another example of the small pallet which can constitute the loading structure 2010 shown in FIGS. In other words, different configurations can be used as the small pallets, and the loading structure can also have a different configuration. In the example shown below, this small pallet 2
Only the loading structure 142 shown in FIGS.
010, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Therefore, only the small pallet 2142 will be described, and the description of the overall configuration of the loading structure will be omitted.

[0758] This small pallet 2142 has a loading plate 2016 similarly to the small pallet 2012 shown in Fig. 121. At the center of the upper surface of the loading plate 2016, a plurality of cardboards 20 are also loaded in the thickness direction. Step 2 composed of
144 are provided. The width W2 and the depth D2 of the step portion 2144 are formed to be the same as the width W and the depth D of the stacked bundle 112 of the planographic printing plate 10 (see FIG. 121).

When stacking the stacked bundles 112 on the small pallet 2142, the stacking device 320 of the manufacturing line 310
(Refer to FIG. 119) positioning guide 2332
(Shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 126)
44A and placed. Positioning guide 2332
Is a movable stopper that moves while deforming an elastic body such as a spring in the direction in which the stacked bundle 112 moves (the direction in which the stacked bundle 112 hits), on both sides of the moving direction of the stacked bundle 112 and before the moving direction. And a wall formed by a rigid body such as metal on the side (upstream side). The kinetic energy of the stacked bundle 112 is absorbed by the deformation of the elastic body, and the stacked bundle 112 is positioned by the stopper and the wall. Note that a cushioning member (a thin metal plate or the like) may be provided on the surface of the wall via a cushioning material to enhance the cushioning effect.

The height of the positioning guide 2332 is
The height of the stacked bundle 112 is higher than the height of the stacked bundle 112, and when the stacked bundle 112 is stacked on the step portion 2144, the stacked bundle 112 hits the positioning guide 2332 and is positioned. FIG. 126
Although the depth D2 of the step portion 2144 matches the depth D1 of the loading plate 2016, the depth D2 of the step portion 2144 is shorter than the depth D1 of the loading plate 2016, and the positioning guide 2332 is moved in the depth direction (longitudinal direction). ) It is also possible to arrange on both sides.

[0764] Subsequently, the stacked bundle 112 is formed on the step portion 2144 in the same manner as the case of forming the stacking structure 2010 shown in Figs.
After placing the sheet No. 4, the sheet is wrapped with the wrapping paper 2116. Next, the plurality of small pallets 2142 are stacked on the stacking plate 2026 of the large pallet 2014, and the cushioning material 2032 is arranged (see FIG. 123). At this time, the loading plate 2016 of the small pallet 2142 shown in FIG.
Is substantially larger than the small pallet 21
The cushioning material 2032 and the small pallet 21 disposed between
There is a gap between the stacked bundle 112 and the stacked bundle 112. Even if there is such a gap, the cushioning effect of the cushioning material 2032 can be sufficiently obtained, but another cushioning material 20 may be disposed in this gap to enhance the cushioning effect.

Next, the exterior material 212 is placed on the cushioning material 2032.
0 and the outer package 212 of the cushioning material 2032
2 is arranged. Finally, binding is performed from the outside of the exterior materials 2120 and 122 with a stretch film 2126, and the long side and the short side of the large pallet 2014 are fastened with two ester bands 2128, respectively.

As can be seen from the above description, the loading structure using the small pallet 1242 in FIG.
The same effects as those of the loading structure 2010 (see FIG. 120) of the first embodiment can be obtained. In addition to this, when the stacked bundle 112 is stacked on the step portion 2144, the stacked bundle 11
2 is positioned by hitting the positioning guide 332, so that the work of stacking the lithographic printing plates 10 can be performed more easily.

[0764] Fig. 127 shows still another example of the small pallet which can constitute the loading structure 2010 shown in Figs. 120 to 125. Also in this example, only the configuration of the small pallet 2152 is different from the loading structure 2 of the first embodiment.
010 is different from the small pallet 215 in the following.
2 will be described, and the description of the overall configuration of the loading structure will be omitted.

[0765] In this small pallet 2152, the loading plate 20
A pair of fixing plates 2154 are provided upright from both sides in the width direction of 16. The interval W3 between the fixing plates 2154 is set to be equal to the width W of the stacked bundle 112.

[0766] In the loading structure employing the small pallet 2152, the loading structure 201 shown in FIG.
It has the same effect as 0. In addition to this, when stacking the bundle 112 on the small pallet 2152,
Since the lithographic printing plate 10 is positioned against the fixing plate 2154, the loading operation is facilitated.

Further, the pallet shown in FIG. 117 and the pallet shown in FIG.
A pallet or the like shown in FIG. 18 can be adopted as a small pallet constituting the loading structure.

[0768] Fig. 127 shows an example of a large pallet which can constitute the loading structure 2010 shown in Figs. 120 to 125. That is, it is possible to use a different structure as the large pallet and a different structure and the loading structure 2180 as the loading structure.

In this large pallet 2182, a plurality of (three in this embodiment) legs 2184 are attached to the loading plate 2026.
Are arranged at equal intervals along the width direction. Each of the legs 2184 is formed in a long shape having the same length as the depth of the loading plate 2026. Further, a plurality of (three in this embodiment) bottom plates 2186 are
20 are arranged at equal intervals along the direction orthogonal to 20. The bottom plate 2186 is formed in a long shape having the same length as the width of the loading plate 2026.

[0770] The adjacent legs 2184 and the loading plate 2
An insertion hole 2038 is formed between the bottom plate 2186 and the bottom plate 2186. Further, between adjacent bottom plates 2186, an insertion hole 20 into which a fork of a hand lift or a forklift for handling a large pallet 2182 can be inserted.
40 are configured.

The loading plate 2026 may be formed of a single plate material, but as shown in FIG. 128, is constituted by arranging a plurality of long plate materials 26A of a predetermined width in the width direction. It may be.

[0772] The large pallet 218 thus constructed
In the same way as in the large pallet 2014 shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of small pallets on which the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10 is stacked can be stacked on the stacking plate 2026. It has the same effect as the loading structure 2010 of the first embodiment. In addition, FIG.
In the example shown in FIG. 28, the insertion hole 2040 can be formed only by fixing to the leg portion 2184 without processing the bottom plate 2186, so that the manufacture of the large pallet 2182 becomes easy.

In this large pallet 2182, the bottom plate 2
The number of 186 is not particularly limited.
82 may be provided only at both ends in the width direction (accordingly, two sheets).
As shown in FIG. 128, by providing a bottom plate 2186 at the center in the width direction of the large pallet 2182 to make a total of three sheets, bending of the large pallet 2182 can be reliably prevented, and furthermore, the entire bottom surface of the large pallet 2182 The amount of plate material can be reduced as compared with the case where the bottom plate 2186 is provided. Also, bottom plate 2
Since there will be an interval between 186,
It can be used as a gap for passing the ester band 2128.

The number of the legs 2184 is not limited either. For example, the large pallets 2182 may be received only at both ends in the depth direction (thus, two). As shown in FIG. 128, by providing the legs 2184 also in the center of the large pallet 2182 in the depth direction, it is possible to effectively prevent the bending of the loading plate 2020 (the downward bending of the central portion). 1
12 are arranged on the large pallet 2182 without gaps (or with narrow gaps),
Never hit each other. Of course, the amount of deflection of the loading plate 2020 is determined by the strength of the loading plate 2026 due to the thickness and length thereof, the weight of the load, and the like. By adjusting the interval and the like, it is possible to reliably prevent the deflection.

[0775] The height of the leg 2184 is
From the viewpoint of inserting a fork of a forklift into the forklift 38, it is necessary to make the height of these forks or the like higher. In consideration of the height of a fork of a general forklift, it is preferable that the height of the leg portion 2184 be 100 mm or more from the viewpoint of facilitating insertion of a fork or the like.

The width (thickness) of the leg portion 2184 is not particularly limited as long as it has sufficient strength to support the load and withstand the load, but the material is reduced and the large pallet 2182 is reduced in weight. From the viewpoint, it is preferable to make it narrower (thinner).

[0777] The plurality of legs 2184 may have different shapes. However, the same shape eliminates the necessity of distinguishing each leg.
The workability at the time of manufacturing 82 is improved, and it can be manufactured at low cost. Similarly, regarding the plurality of bottom plates 2186,
Although the shapes may be different from each other, the same shape eliminates the necessity of distinction, so that workability is improved at the time of manufacturing the large pallet 2182 and the large pallet 2182 can be manufactured at low cost.

When the loading plate 2026 is formed of a long plate 26A having a predetermined width as shown in FIG. 128, the width of the plate 26A is not particularly limited. As an example, if the width is 12
A large pallet 2182 can be manufactured at low cost by appropriately combining the stacking plates 2026 with a desired width. In a combination of only commercially available plate materials, the loading plate 2026
Even if it is not possible to obtain the desired width of the large pallet 218, the loading plate 2026 can have the desired width by setting only one plate material to the specific width.
2 can be manufactured.

The thickness of the loading plate 2026 is not particularly limited as long as it has strength enough to withstand the weight of the load.
For example, by making the thickness larger than the thickness of the bottom plate 2186, the predetermined strength of the loading plate 2026 can be ensured even with a small amount of material, and bending can be prevented.

[0780] For example, when a load is directly placed on the upper surface of the loading plate 2026, a protective member such as a decorative plywood must be attached from the viewpoint of preventing the load from being damaged by projections such as nails. However, according to the present invention, since the load is not directly mounted on the load plate 2026, such a protective member is not required, and the large pallet 2182 can be manufactured at low cost, and the load structure can also be used. ,
Inexpensive and lightweight.

In the above description, the components constituting the small pallet are all made of cardboard. However, the material of these components is not limited to the cardboard 20. That is, small pallet 2
As long as it is 0, it is only necessary to maintain a certain shape and strength required to support the load (the stacked bundle 112 of the lithographic printing plate 10). For example, paper, wood, resin, metal, etc., such as cardboard, kraft paper, and paper honeycomb structural material, may be used, or these materials may be used in an appropriate combination.

Similarly, large pallets 20142, 2182
The material of the constituent members constituting is not limited to wood,
It is only necessary that the material has a certain shape and strength required to support the weight of the load (the small pallet 20 on which the stacked bundle 112 is loaded). For example, any of cardboard, kraft paper, paper such as a honeycomb structure made of paper, resin, metal and the like may be used, and these materials may be used in an appropriate combination. Further, the large pallet 2 shown in FIGS.
014 and 2182 (skeletal portion) made of wood, and a part or all of the surface of the skeletal portion is attached with another part or member other than wood to form a large pallet as a whole. It may be so. In this case, as an example of another component or another member to be attached,
Paper and equipment for information transmission in which necessary information such as the type of the lithographic printing plate 10 is recorded, and to prevent the load from slipping on the large pallet and to protect the load by buffering the large pallet. A resin sheet, a coating agent for preventing a load from sliding on a large pallet, a resin component for guiding or reinforcing the ester band 2128, and the like are included. In any case, since the skeleton is made of wood, it can be easily manufactured as compared with those made of metal or resin, and the large pallet after use can be easily discarded. In addition, the predetermined strength and shape can be maintained for a longer period of time as compared with the case where all are made of paper.

[0783] By making at least a part of each of the small pallet and the large pallet from paper, it is lighter in weight than metal or resin pallets, which facilitates handling and reduces the cost. Can be manufactured. In the case where the stacking plate 2016 is formed using paper other than corrugated cardboard, a plurality of papers are stacked so that the direction of the eyes of at least one sheet intersects the direction of the eyes of the other paper. In addition, the directionality of the strength (variation due to the direction) can be reduced.

The interior paper 2116 is not necessarily limited to paper having light-shielding properties and moisture-proof properties, but may be general paper such as kraft paper. In this case, the light shielding property is lower than that of the paper having the light shielding property.
Thereby, the light-shielding property can be supplemented, and the planographic printing plate 10 can be prevented from being carelessly exposed. Similarly, since the moisture-proof property is lower than that of the paper having moisture-proof property, the moisture-proof property can be supplemented by the exterior material 2120 and other members, parts, and the like, so that the lithographic printing plate 10 can be prevented from being deteriorated in quality and from changing in sensitivity.

[0785] In each of the above examples, as the exterior material,
It is preferable to use a paper hard board, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, cardboard may be used. Further, as the figure cushioning materials 2032 and 2034, corrugated cardboard of BA flute or AB flute is preferable, but other corrugated cardboard may be used, or a foamed resin material sheet may be used.

[0786] The components constituting the pallet do not necessarily need to be fixed with an adhesive, nails, or the like as long as they are not separated carelessly or their mutual positions are not changed. For example, you may fix by engagement, fitting, etc.

[0787] The material constituting the pallet (or skid) is not particularly limited, and in addition to the above-mentioned corrugated cardboard, cardboard, kraft paper (and those obtained by laminating them to increase the strength), paper honeycomb structural material , Wood, resin, metal, etc.
Various materials can be applied. These materials may be combined.

As described above, in any of the embodiments of the present invention, the planographic printing plate 10 can be reliably protected from eating out, and can be protected from being carelessly deformed or damaged. Moreover, since the lithographic printing plate 10 is reliably shielded from light and protected from moisture, deterioration of the image forming surface 10P (coating film) can be prevented, and the lithographic printing plate 10 is maintained at a constant quality.

[0789] The lithographic printing plate packaging material of the present invention (interleaf paper, protective cardboard, interior paper, exterior material, packaging box, pallet,
The skid and the like are not limited to the lithographic printing plate packaging structure of each example described above, and are appropriately selected and used in combination according to the type of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the assumed handling situation of the load. . In other words, by assuming such a combination in advance, effects such as protection of the lithographic printing plate 10 and prevention of deterioration of the coating film can be obtained. This combination is not subject to any restrictions as long as the lithographic printing plate 10 can be reliably protected and the quality can be kept constant. The type of the lithographic printing plate 10 and the applicability of the lithographic printing plate packaging structure are not limited, and any lithographic printing plate packaging structure can be applied to all lithographic printing plates.

[0790] In constructing the lithographic printing plate packaging structure, there is no particular limitation on whether this operation is performed manually or using an apparatus or a machine. For example, lithographic printing plate 10
Stacking work and interior work (placement and folding of interior materials,
Loading and fixing, etc.) or exterior work (placement of exterior materials, loading into an exterior box, etc.) may be performed manually or by using an apparatus or the like. Similarly, the operation of stacking the stacked bundle of the lithographic printing plates 10 on a pallet or skid may be performed manually or using an apparatus or the like. These operations may be performed, for example, as a part of the lithographic printing plate processing line 1310 shown in FIG. In particular, the lithographic printing plate 10
By providing the stacking device and the stacking device, the efficiency of these operations can be improved.

For example, the image forming surface 10 of the lithographic printing plate 10
If P has a predetermined strength, the lithographic printing plate 10 may be packaged by forming the stacked bundle 12 without using the slip sheet 14 in some cases. Since the interleaf 14 is not used, when the lithographic printing plate 10 is supplied to the automatic plate-making machine by setting the layered bundle 12 on an automatic plate-making machine having an automatic plate-supply function or a so-called plate setter, the interleaf paper is lithographically printed. It is not supplied together with the printing plate, and the plate feeding operation does not stop.

[0792] Image forming surface 1 of such lithographic printing plate 10
The intensity of 0P is quantified, for example, by measuring by the following image forming surface intensity measuring method, and the interleaving paper 14 is measured.
Can be used as an index for determining whether or not to use.

This image forming surface strength measuring method is shown in FIG.
As shown in (A), first, a lithographic printing plate 10 as an object to be measured is placed so that an image forming surface 10P faces upward, and a lithographic printing plate 10 as a counterpart member for measurement is further placed thereon. Is placed such that the image forming surface 10P faces upward.
As a result, the image forming surface 10P of the planographic printing plate 10 as the measurement target and the planographic printing plate 10
Contact with the non-image forming surface 10Q.

[0794] In this state, a weight W having a predetermined mass is further placed on the upper lithographic printing plate 10 which is a measuring partner.
The upper planographic printing plate 10 and the weight W are integrally formed as shown in FIG.
As shown in (B), the lower lithographic printing plate 10
It may be shifted in the direction along the image forming surface 10P (or the lower lithographic printing plate 10 may be shifted relatively to the upper lithographic printing plate 10 and the weight W. That is, a relative shift occurs. If so, either may be shifted). Thereby, the image forming surface 10 is formed on the packaging structure (laminated bundle 12) in which the lithographic printing plates 10 are stacked and packaged without using a conventionally used lithographic printing plate protective material such as interleaf paper.
This approximately creates a situation where P may be damaged.

[0795] Finally, the lower lithographic printing plate 10, which is the object to be measured, is removed, and the presence or absence of damage to the image forming surface 10P is visually checked (including the case where a magnifying glass such as a loupe is used). That is, when the image forming surface 10 </ b> P is damaged, so-called film peeling has occurred to the extent that it can be visually confirmed. This observation was made on the upper lithographic printing plate 10.
And the weight W may be shifted immediately after the lithographic printing plate 10 on the lower side (before performing various processes for forming an image on the lithographic printing plate 10 to be measured), Depending on the type and purpose of the lithographic printing plate 10, it may be performed after various processes such as exposure and development.

The above steps are repeated a plurality of times while changing the mass of the weight W. The maximum value of the pressure acting on the image forming surface 10P when the image forming surface 10P is not damaged is defined as the image forming surface strength. Thereby, the image forming surface 1 is actually
The strength of the image forming surface, which is an index of whether or not 0P is damaged, is quantitatively measured by the pressure acting on the image forming surface 10P. In other words, the stacked bundle 12 of the lithographic printing plate 10
Whether the image forming surface 10P can be prevented from being damaged without using the interleaving paper 14 or how much politeness should be handled when the interleaving paper 14 is not used. Whether or not damage to the image forming surface can be prevented to the extent that practical problems do not occur can be specifically determined by the pressure on the image forming surface strength measured by the above-described image forming surface strength measuring method. .

When the lithographic printing plate 10 is a so-called double-sided product, the lithographic printing plate 10 of both the object to be measured and the counterpart member for measurement can be moved without considering their orientations as shown in FIG.
As shown in (A), the image forming surface strength can be measured by contact.

[0798] The image forming surface strength measured in this way is specifically determined as to whether the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10 is not damaged even if the slip sheet 14 is omitted.
The point differs depending on the type of the lithographic printing plate 10,
As an example, if the image forming surface strength is 980 Pa or more, there is often no problem even if packaging is performed without using the slip sheet 14. Further, even if the image forming surface strength is about 490 Pa (or more), a certain degree of image forming surface strength is ensured. For example, when handling a load, carefully handle the lithographic printing plate 10. The image forming surface 1 to such an extent that there is no practical problem.
In some cases, it is possible to prevent the damage of 0P.

[0799] In the configuration in which the interleaf 14 is not used, not only the interleaf removal failure does not occur in an automatic plate making machine having an automatic plate feeding function or a so-called plate setter as described above, but also Since the operation for removing elimination is not required, the operation efficiency is also improved. Further, since the slip sheet 14 is not used, the amount of waste material after unpacking the lithographic printing plate packaging structure (lithographic printing plate packaging box 22) is reduced.

As is clear from the above description, the lithographic printing plate packaging material according to the present invention can be used alone for the lithographic printing plate 10.
It is not necessary to be able to prevent deformation or damage to the image forming surface or to prevent the image forming surface 10P (coating film) from deteriorating, and the above-described effects can be obtained by combination with another lithographic printing plate packaging material. Is also good.

When using corrugated cardboard as the exterior material or pallet according to the present invention, from the viewpoint of maintaining strength and the like,
The following configuration is preferable.

First, the order of the corrugated cardboard (flute) is preferably BA flute, AB flute, A flute, C flute, and B flute. Also, taking a grade table liner and the back liner cardboard preferred order, AA grade, A grade, B grade, C class, as the basis weight of the front liner and the back liner, 160 (g / m ²⁾ or more 340 (g / m ² ) or less. When the types of the middle shin of the corrugated cardboard 20 are listed in a preferred order, reinforced middle shin, A class, B
Grade, C grade, and the basis weight of the medium shin is 115 (g /
m ² ) or more and 280 (g / m ² ) or less.

[0813] In particular, the small pallet 2012 shown in FIG.
The corrugated cardboard constituting AB is preferably a double-faced double-faced corrugated cardboard made of AB flute using a kraft paper having a basis weight of 280 g / m ² as a front liner and a back liner, and a semi-chemical pulp having a basis weight of 125 g / m ² as a middle lining. Are listed.

In the case where a paper honeycomb structural material is used instead of the corrugated cardboard, the front liner, the back liner, and the middle liner which are the same as the corrugated cardboard described above are preferable.

Further, when cardboard is used in place of cardboard, the basis weight is 300 (g / m ² ) to 2000 (g / m ² ).
/ M ² ) or less.

The above conditions for the cardboard, honeycomb structure material and cardboard can be applied as conditions for the exterior material of the present invention.

[0807] The lithographic printing plate 1 may be used as the slip sheet according to the present invention.
The configuration is not particularly limited as long as the 0 coating film can be protected with certainty. For example, those having various physical properties shown in Table 17 below can be employed. The smoothness (Table) in Table 17 is the Beck smoothness on the side that comes into contact with the image forming surface 10P of the lithographic printing plate 10, and the smoothness (Back) is the non-image formation of the lithographic printing plate 10. This is the Beck smoothness on the side contacting the surface Q.

[0808]

[Table 17]

(Note 1) The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value obtained by measuring the thickness of an arbitrary position of one sheet according to JIS P8118. (Note 2) When the size (A) dried at 110 ° C. for 1 hour and the size (B) left standing at 20 ° C. and 65% RH for 3 hours, “stretch degree (rate) = (BA) / A × 100 ”. (Note 3) Cut the interleaving paper into 150 mm x 150 mm sheets, leave the sheets at a temperature of 20 ° C and a humidity of 65% RH for 3 hours or more, and then under the same environment, high sensitivity vibration manufactured by Kawaguchi Electric Works. The volume resistance was measured with a capacitive universal electrometer (MMAII-17 and P-601). The volume resistivity (ρv) was determined by dividing the interleaf paper thickness (t) from the product of the volume resistivity (Rv) and the electrode area of the measuring instrument (19.62 cm ² ).

Ρv = 19.62 / t × Rv (Note 4) The interleaf paper is cut into a 150 mm × 150 mm sheet, and the sheet is left under an environment of a temperature of 20 ° C. and a humidity of 65% RH for 3 hours or more. Under the same environment, the surface resistance was measured by a high sensitivity vibration capacitance type universal electrometer (MMAII-17 and P-601) manufactured by Kawaguchi Electric Works. From the product of the surface resistance value (Rs) and a coefficient (18.7) calculated from the electrode area of the measuring instrument, a surface specific resistance value (ρs) was obtained.

[0811] ρs = 18.7 × Rs (Note 5) The contacting object is the image forming surface of the lithographic printing plate. (Note 6) Cut 20 g of sample finely into 100 g of pure water, heat sealed at 110 ° C. for 10 minutes, and then use Kitagawa gas. Detector tube (20p
pm). (Note 7) 3 ml of the slip paper sample is placed in 6 ml of distilled water,
Two drops of a 1% silver nitrate solution were dropped therein, and the presence or absence of cloudiness was observed.

[0812]

According to the present invention, the planographic printing plate can be packaged while maintaining the desired printing characteristics.

[Brief description of the drawings]

FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a step of packaging a lithographic printing plate using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to an embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a step of packaging a lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate packaging material of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a step of packaging a lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate packaging material of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a step of packaging a lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate packaging material of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 5 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a state in which the planographic printing plate is packaged using the planographic printing plate packaging material of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 6 is a development view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to an embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a step of packaging a planographic printing plate using a planographic printing plate packaging material of another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing a step of packaging a lithographic printing plate using a lithographic printing plate packaging material of still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the static friction coefficient between the planographic printing plate packaging material of the present invention and the planographic printing plate.

FIG. 10 is a graph showing the light transmittance at each wavelength of the lithographic printing plate packaging material of the present invention.

FIG. 11 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a state where a lithographic printing plate is packaged using a lithographic printing plate packaging material of still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 12 is a development view showing the lithographic printing plate packaging material shown in FIG. 11;

FIG. 13 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a state where a lithographic printing plate is packaged using a lithographic printing plate packaging material of still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 14 is a development view showing the lithographic printing plate packaging material shown in FIG. 13;

FIG. 15 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a state where a lithographic printing plate is packaged using a lithographic printing plate packaging material of still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 16 is a development view showing the lithographic printing plate packaging material shown in FIG. 15;

FIG. 17 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure constituted by using a lithographic printing plate packaging material of still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

18 is an exploded perspective view showing a state of constituting the lithographic printing plate packaging structure shown in FIG.

19 is a cross-sectional view showing the lithographic printing plate packaging structure shown in FIG.

FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure constituted by using a lithographic printing plate packaging material of still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure configured using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure formed using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure constituted by using a lithographic printing plate packaging material of still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure constituted by using a lithographic printing plate packaging material of still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure constituted by using a lithographic printing plate packaging material of still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 26 is an explanatory view of a coating apparatus for forming a mat on a photosensitive layer of a lithographic printing plate according to the present invention.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing a coating apparatus for coating a photosensitive layer of a lithographic printing plate according to the present invention.

FIG. 28 is a sectional view showing another example of the coating apparatus for coating the photosensitive layer of the planographic printing plate according to the present invention, which is different from that shown in FIG. 27;

FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing a drying device for drying a photosensitive layer of a lithographic printing plate according to the present invention.

FIG. 30 is a schematic plan view of an accumulating device showing a case where a stacked bundle is formed using a general protective cardboard.

FIG. 31 is a schematic plan view of an accumulating device showing a case where a laminated bundle is formed using a general protective cardboard.

FIG. 32 is a plan view showing a protective cardboard and a lithographic printing plate according to an embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 33 is a schematic plan view of an accumulating device showing a case where a laminated bundle is formed using the protective cardboard of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 34 is a schematic plan view of an accumulating apparatus showing a case where a laminated bundle is formed using the protective cardboard of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 35 is a perspective view showing a step of packaging a lithographic printing plate using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where a lithographic printing plate is packaged using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a planographic printing plate is packaged using a planographic printing plate packaging material according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory view showing a state where a lithographic printing plate is packaged using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where a lithographic printing plate is packaged using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the planographic printing plate according to the invention is cut.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing the amount of breakage in a state where the lithographic printing plate according to the present invention is cut.

FIG. 42 is a perspective view sequentially showing steps (A) to (C) of forming a lithographic printing plate packaging structure using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention. is there.

FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II-II of FIG. 42 (C) showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure using a planographic printing plate packaging material according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line III-III of FIG. 42 (C) showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure using a planographic printing plate packaging material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 46 is a sectional view taken along line VV of FIG. 45 showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure using a planographic printing plate packaging material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 47 is a front view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure using a planographic printing plate packaging material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 48 is a front view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure using a planographic printing plate packaging material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 49 is a front view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure using a planographic printing plate packaging material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 50 is a perspective view showing another example of the arrangement position of the adhesive tape in the lithographic printing plate packaging structure of the present invention.

FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view showing a conventional planographic printing plate packaging structure.

FIG. 52 is a sectional view showing a conventional planographic printing plate packaging structure.

FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view showing a conventional lithographic printing plate packaging structure.

FIG. 54 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure using a lithographic printing plate packaging material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 55 shows a step of packaging a lithographic printing plate in a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention, wherein (A) is broken in the length direction of the lithographic printing plate packaging material. Sectional drawing, (B) is a sectional view broken in the width direction.

FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view showing a step of packaging a lithographic printing plate in a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another example of the embodiment of the present invention, cut along the length direction of the lithographic printing plate packaging material. .

FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view showing a step of packaging a lithographic printing plate in a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention, cut along the length direction of the lithographic printing plate packaging material. .

FIGS. 58A to 58C are cross-sectional views showing another example of a bent portion of a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing, in order, steps (A) to (C) constituting a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing an initial state of packaging a lithographic printing plate in a lithographic printing plate packaging structure of the present invention different from those shown in FIGS. 54 to 59;

FIG. 61 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing a state in which a lithographic printing plate packaging box according to the lithographic printing plate packaging structure of one embodiment of the present invention contains and packs a stacked bundle of lithographic printing plates.

FIG. 62 is a development view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging box according to an embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to an embodiment of the present invention in a state where a planographic printing plate packaging box is unpacked and a stacked bundle is separated.

FIG. 64 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of an automatic plate making machine using a planographic printing plate packaged by the planographic printing plate packaging structure of the present invention.

FIG. 65 is a side view showing a schematic configuration of a reversing device used to configure the lithographic printing plate packaging structure of the present invention.

FIG. 66 is a perspective view showing still another example of a planographic printing plate packaging box according to the planographic printing plate packaging structure of one embodiment of the present invention.

67 is an exploded view showing a packaging box main body of the lithographic printing plate packaging box shown in FIG. 66.

FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view showing the planographic printing plate packaging structure shown in FIG. 66 in a state where a stacked bundle is separated.

FIG. 69 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a planographic printing plate packaging box according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention, wherein FIG. (B) is a state in which packaging is in progress, and FIG.

FIGS. 70A and 70B are schematic plan views each showing another example of the non-linear portion of the lithographic printing plate packaging box according to the present invention.

71A and 71B show still another example of the non-linear portion of the lithographic printing plate packaging box according to the present invention, wherein FIG. 71A is a schematic perspective view, and FIG.
FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram viewed from the direction of arrow S in FIG.

FIG. 72 is a perspective view showing a packaging box according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention in an unfolded state, and showing a stacked bundle of lithographic printing plates provided with the packaging box.

73 is a perspective view showing a state in which the stack of planographic printing plates is being packaged by the packaging box shown in FIG. 72;

74 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacked bundle of planographic printing plates is externally packaged by the packaging box shown in FIG. 72.

FIG. 75 is a perspective view showing a packaging box according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention in an unfolded state, and showing a stacked bundle of planographic printing plates provided with the packaging box.

76 is a perspective view showing a state in which the stack of planographic printing plates is being packaged by the packaging box shown in FIG. 75;

FIG. 77 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacked bundle of planographic printing plates is exteriorized by the packaging box shown in FIG. 75.

FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing another example of a method of attaching an adhesive tape in the present invention.

FIG. 79 is a perspective view showing still another example of a method of attaching an adhesive tape in the present invention.

FIG. 80 shows a protective cardboard according to still another embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 80 (A) is a front view showing an example in which a cardboard of a size obtained by dividing a lithographic printing plate into two is attached.
(B) is a front view showing an example in which thick paper of a size obtained by dividing a lithographic printing plate into four parts is bonded, and (C) is a side view showing a bonding structure in which thick paper is bonded to form a protective thick paper. is there.

FIG. 81 is a perspective view showing an exterior material according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 82 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the exterior material shown in FIG. 81 in a partially enlarged manner.

FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view showing the exterior material shown in FIG. 81.

FIG. 84 is a perspective view showing an exterior material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing an exterior material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 86 is a perspective view showing an exterior material according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 87 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 89 is a perspective view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to one embodiment of the present invention, further provided with a pressing member.

FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to one embodiment of the present invention further provided with a contact member.

FIG. 92 is a cross-sectional view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to an embodiment of the present invention, further provided with a pressing member and a contact member.

FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to one embodiment of the present invention further provided with a pressing member, a contact member, and a cushioning material.

FIG. 94 is a perspective view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 95 is a front view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view showing a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention in a state before packaging.

FIG. 97 is a front view showing an example of a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention, in which a reinforcing member is interposed between a square contact member and a fastening belt.

FIG. 98 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 99 is a cross-sectional view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 100 is a perspective view showing a state in which cardboard is arranged outside a stacked bundle of planographic printing plates in a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 101 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 102 is a perspective view of a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention, showing a state in which cardboard is arranged outside the stacked bundle of planographic printing plates.

FIG. 103 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention, in which the outer periphery is wound with a stretch film.

FIG. 104 is a perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention, in which the outer periphery is wound with a stretch film and an upper lid is attached.

FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a tightening force of a stretch film.

FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which a force in the lateral shift direction is generated in the stack of planographic printing plates.

FIG. 107 is a perspective view showing a pallet according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

108 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the pallet shown in FIG. 107 in a partially enlarged manner.

FIG. 109 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacking unit as a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to an embodiment of the present invention is configured.

FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacking unit as a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to an embodiment of the present invention is configured.

FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacking unit as a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to an embodiment of the present invention is configured.

FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacking unit as a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to an embodiment of the present invention is configured.

FIG. 113 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacking unit as a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to an embodiment of the present invention is configured.

FIG. 114 is a perspective view showing a pallet according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 115 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacking unit as a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to an embodiment of the present invention is configured.

FIG. 116 is a perspective view showing a pallet according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a pallet according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 118 is a perspective view showing a pallet according to still another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 119 is a schematic perspective view showing a lithographic printing plate production line according to an embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 120 is a perspective view showing a stacking structure which is a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 121 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacking structure as a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention is configured.

FIG. 122 is a perspective view showing a state in which a stacked bundle of lithographic printing plates is mounted on a small pallet constituting a stacking structure which is a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention. .

FIG. 123 shows a state in which a small pallet in which a stacked bundle of lithographic printing plates is loaded on a large pallet constituting a loading structure which is a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention. FIG.

FIG. 124 is a perspective view showing a state in which a load is externally mounted on a large pallet constituting a load structure that is a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 125 is a perspective view showing a state in which a load is externally mounted on a large pallet constituting a loading structure which is a planographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 126 is a perspective view showing another example of a small pallet constituting a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to still another example of an embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 127 is a perspective view showing another example of a small pallet constituting a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 128 is a perspective view showing a loading structure configured using a large pallet that forms a lithographic printing plate packaging structure according to yet another example of an embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 129 shows a method for measuring the strength of an image forming surface of a lithographic printing plate according to the present invention, wherein (A) shows a state before the lithographic printing plates are shifted, and (B) shows a state after the lithographic printing plates have been shifted. is there.

[Explanation of symbols]

 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Lithographic printing plate 10P Image forming surface 10Q Non-image forming surface 12 Lamination bundle 14 Interleaf paper (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 18 Lithographic printing plate packaging structure 31 Interior structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 32 Protective cardboard (lithographic printing) Plate packaging material) 34 Lithographic printing plate packaging structure 33 Interior structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 35 Interior structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 36 Interior paper (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 38 Lithographic printing plate packaging structure 39 Interior Structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 40 Lithographic printing plate packaging structure 60 Lithographic printing plate packaging structure 62 Packaging box (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 92 Packaging box (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 102 Packaging box (lithographic printing plate packaging material) Packaging material) 110 Packaging box (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 130 Packing structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 132 Loading member (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 134 Square plate (lithographic printing plate packaging) Materials) 136 Surface plate (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 170 Packaging structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 201 Packaging material (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 321 Packaging material (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 330 Packaging box ( Lithographic printing plate packaging material) 510 Packaging box (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 540 Packaging box (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 700 Packaging box (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 730 Packaging structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 732 Loading member (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 770 Packing structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 820 Packaging structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 822 Loading table (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 910 Packaging structure (lithographic printing plate packaging) Structure) 1010 Pallet (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 1030 Pallet (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 1040 Pallet (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 1050 Pallet (lithographic printing plate packaging) Materials) 1070 Pallet (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 1110 Lithographic printing plate packaging structure 1118 Side exterior material (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 1128 Top surface exterior material (lithographic printing plate exterior material) 1124 Interior material (lithographic printing plate) Packaging material) 1170 Packaging box (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 2010 Loading structure (lithographic printing plate packaging structure) 2012 Small pallet (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 2014 Large pallet (lithographic printing plate packaging material) 2120 Exterior Materials (lithographic printing plate packaging materials) 2122 Exterior materials (lithographic printing plate packaging materials) 2142 Small pallets (lithographic printing plate packaging materials) 2152 Small pallets (lithographic printing plate packaging materials) 2180 Loading structures (lithographic printing plates) Packaging structure) 2182 Large pallet (Packaging material for planographic printing plate)

──────────────────────────────────────────────────の Continued on the front page (51) Int.Cl. ⁷ Identification symbol FI Theme coat ゛ (Reference) B65D 81/30 B65D 81/30 D // G03F 7/00 503 G03F 7/00 503 F-term (Reference) 2H096 AA06 BA01 BA09 BA17 EA04 2H114 AA04 AA23 AA24 BA01 BA10 EA10 3E067 AA12 AC03 AC14 BA06A BA08A BA17A BB01A BB02A BB11A BB12A BB14A BB15A BB25A CA12 CA13 EA27 EC29 ED04 3E002 AB05 AD05 3A0BA BB

Claims (2)

[Claims] 1. A packaging material for a lithographic printing plate, characterized in that the lithographic printing plate has predetermined physical properties that can be protected so as to maintain desired printing characteristics. 2. A lithographic printing plate, and a lithographic printing plate packaging material for packaging the lithographic printing plate and having predetermined physical properties capable of protecting the lithographic printing plate so as to maintain desired printing characteristics. A lithographic printing plate packaging structure comprising: